Uganda BTVET Training Providers Construction Specs

Republic of Uganda
MINISTRY OF EDUCATIONAND SPORTS

Bidding Document
for the
Procurement of Works
OPEN BIDDING
VOLUME 3 OF 4
(SPECIFICATIONS)
Subject of Procurement: CONSTRUCTION OF FIVE (5NO)

BTVET TRAINING PROVIDERS
Procurement Reference No: …………………………………………….
Date of Issue: Mar, 2018

DOCUMENTS SUMMARY PAGE
Volume 1 of 4: Bidding procedures, employer's requirements and conditions of

contract & contract forms
Volume 2 of 4: Bills of quantities
Volume 3 of 4: Technical Specifications comprising:
(A) Standard Specifications for Building works
(B) Code for Electrical Installations in Buildings
Volume 4 of 4: Drawings
FLYSHEET:
Volume 3A of 4 - Standard
Specifications for Building works
FIVE (5) BTVET TRAINING PROVIDERS – BIDDING DOCUMENTS (VOLUME 3 OF 4)

THE REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
MINISTRY OF WORKS AND TRANSPORT
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
BUILDING WORKS
December 2012
B4

FOREWORD
The mission of the Ministry of Works and Transport (MoWT) is to promote an
adequate, safe and well maintained works and transport infrastructure and
services so as to effectively contribute to the socio-economic development of
the country.
In exercising this mission and in discharging its responsibilities, the Ministry is

issuing a series of Design Manuals, Guidelines, Codes and Standards, of
which the “Standard Specifications for Building Works” is one part thereof.
The Standard Specifications for Building Works will be a nationally recognized

document which will serve as a standard reference for the preparation of
specifications for works to be undertaken on building construction projects.
The major benefits to be gained in applying this document are the

harmonization of professional practice in the building construction in Uganda
and curtailment of informal developments so as to ensure well-planned, well-
maintained, safe, cost effective and decent building developments and human
settlements throughout the country.
The Standard Specifications will be periodically updated and new editions

issued to cater for the dynamic technological developments in the construction
industry.
Abraham Byandala
Minister of Works and Transport
December2012

1
Standard Specifications for Building Works
General Table of Contents
Part 1: Architectural, Structural and

General Works
Part 2: Building Sanitation
Part 3: Electrical Services
Part 4: Air-conditioning
Ministry of Works and Transport i

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL MATTERS ...................................................................................................... 2

1.1 General Conditions of Contract ............................................................................... 2
1.2 Instructions to Bidders ............................................................................................. 2
1.3 Scope of Contractor’s Obligations ........................................................................... 2
1.4 Interpretation of Terms ............................................................................................ 2
1.5 Workmanship .......................................................................................................... 3
1.6 Codes of Practices .................................................................................................. 3
1.7 Materials .................................................................................................................. 3
1.8 Ordering of Materials ............................................................................................... 3
1.9 Proprietary of Materials ........................................................................................... 4
1.10 Samples .................................................................................................................. 4
1.11 Prove Vouchers ....................................................................................................... 4
1.12 Tests ........................................................................................................................ 4
1.13 Payment forTests .................................................................................................... 5
1.14 Test Samples .......................................................................................................... 5
1.15 Rejected Workmanship and Materials .................................................................... 5
1.16 Materials intended for the Works ............................................................................ 5
1.17 Overtime or Nightwork............................................................................................. 5
1.18 Nuisance to Adjoining Buildings andProperty ......................................................... 6
1.19 Existing and Adjacent Property ............................................................................... 6
1.20 Damage to Public and Private Roads ..................................................................... 6
1.21 Existing Services ..................................................................................................... 6
1.22 Watching and Lighting ............................................................................................. 6
1.23 Licenses and Permits .............................................................................................. 6
1.24 Notices and Fees .................................................................................................... 7
1.25 Definition of “Fix only”.............................................................................................. 7
1.26 Attendance of Nominated Sub-Contractors ............................................................ 7
1.27 Temporary Roads .................................................................................................... 7
1.28 Temporary Fencing ................................................................................................. 8
1.29 Storage of Materials ................................................................................................ 8
1.30 Sheds for Operatives............................................................................................... 8
1.31 Site Office ................................................................................................................ 8
1.32 Site Meetings ........................................................................................................... 8
1.33 Works Diary ............................................................................................................. 8
1.34 Foreman-in-Charge ................................................................................................. 9
1.35 Temporary Latrines and Ablutions .......................................................................... 9
1.36 Water for Works ...................................................................................................... 9
1.37 Light and Power for the Works ................................................................................ 9
1.38 Signboards .............................................................................................................. 9
1.39 Protection of Works ............................................................................................... 10
1.40 Keeping and Delivering Site and Works Clean ..................................................... 10
1.41 Contingencies ........................................................................................................ 10
2.0 WORKS OF DEMOLITION AND ALTERATIONS ......................................................... 11
2.1 Demolition ............................................................................................................. 11
2.2 Obstruction of Public Road etc .............................................................................. 11
2.3 Prevention of Dust and Fans ................................................................................. 11
2.4 Removal of Rubbish .............................................................................................. 11
2.5 Disposal of Rubbish .............................................................................................. 11
2.6 Use of Suitable Material for Hardcore ................................................................... 11
2.7 Dustproof Screens................................................................................................. 11
2.8 Shoring .................................................................................................................. 11
2.9 Building Openings ................................................................................................. 12
2.10 Cutting Openings in Existing Walls ....................................................................... 12
2.11 Existing Public Service Mains ............................................................................... 12
2.12 Government to Retain Ownership of Old Materials .............................................. 12
2.13 Materials to be Cleared Away ............................................................................... 12
Ministry of Works and Transport ii

2.14 Definiton of “Make Out”and “Make Good” ............................................................. 12

3.0 EXCAVATION ................................................................................................................ 13
3.1 Clearance of Site ................................................................................................... 13
3.2 Trees and Bushesto be Preserved........................................................................ 13
3.3 Felling Trees .......................................................................................................... 13
3.4 Anthills ................................................................................................................... 13
3.5 Removal of Vegetable Soil .................................................................................... 13
3.6 Excavation to Reduce Level .................................................................................. 13
3.7 Excavation for Embankments ............................................................................... 14
3.8 Excavation for Foundations ................................................................................... 14
3.9 Steps in Foundations............................................................................................. 14
3.10 Excess Excavations .............................................................................................. 14
3.11 Bottoms of Excavations to be Approved ............................................................... 14
3.12 Soft Spots .............................................................................................................. 14
3.13 Excess Excavations .............................................................................................. 14
3.14 Working Space ...................................................................................................... 14
3.15 Excavation in Rock ................................................................................................ 15
3.16 Definition of Solid Rock ......................................................................................... 15
3.17 Determination of Rock Excavation ........................................................................ 15
3.18 Payment for Rock Excavation ............................................................................... 15
3.19 Blasting .................................................................................................................. 15
3.20 Returning, Filling and Ramming ............................................................................ 15
3.21 Filling to Make-up Levels ...................................................................................... 16
3.22 Borrow Pits ............................................................................................................ 16
3.23 Replacement of Vegetable Soil ............................................................................. 16
3.24 Disposal of Surplus Excavated Material................................................................ 16
3.25 Definition of “Get out” ............................................................................................ 16
3.26 Planking and Strutting ........................................................................................... 16
3.27 Keeping Excavations Free of Water...................................................................... 17
3.28 Hardcore ................................................................................................................ 17
3.29 Temporary Retaining Boards ................................................................................ 17
3.30 Anti-termite treatment ............................................................................................ 17
4. 0 CONCRETE WORK ....................................................................................................... 21
4.1 General Requirements .......................................................................................... 21
4.2 Cement .................................................................................................................. 21
4.3 Aggregate for Concrete ......................................................................................... 22
4.4 Grading of Aggregates .......................................................................................... 22
4.5 Sand ...................................................................................................................... 23
4.6 Grading of Aggregates .......................................................................................... 23
4.7 Maximum Sizes of Coarse Aggregates ................................................................. 24
4.8 Storage of Aggregates .......................................................................................... 24
4.9 Concrete Mixes by Volume or Weight ................................................................... 24
4.10 Concrete Mixes ..................................................................................................... 24
4.11 Design Mixes ......................................................................................................... 25
4.12 Trial Mixes ............................................................................................................. 25
4.13 Mixing of Concrete ................................................................................................ 26
4.14 Hand Mixing .......................................................................................................... 27
4.15 Transporting and Placing Concrete....................................................................... 27
4.16 Ready Mix Concrete .............................................................................................. 28
4.17 Compaction of Concrete ....................................................................................... 28
4.18 Construction Joints ................................................................................................ 28
4.19 Movement /Expansion Joints ................................................................................ 29
4.20 Protection of Concrete........................................................................................... 30
4.21 Concrete Surface Finishes .................................................................................... 30
4.22 Fair Face and Fine Face Finishes of Concrete ..................................................... 31
4.23 Form HoleChases ................................................................................................. 31
4.24 Steel Reinforcement .............................................................................................. 31
4.25 Bending Reinforcement ......................................................................................... 32
4.26 Spacing of RC bars ............................................................................................... 33
Ministry of Works and Transport iii

4.27 Fixing and Assembly of Reinforcement................................................................. 33

4.28 Cover to Concrete ................................................................................................. 33
4.29 Inspection of Reinforcement ................................................................................. 33
4.30 Formwork .............................................................................................................. 33
4.31 Formwork Non-Exposed Concrete ........................................................................ 34
4.32 Formwork for Exposed Concrete .......................................................................... 34
4.33 Preparation of Formwork before Concreting ......................................................... 34
4.34 Approval of Formwork ........................................................................................... 35
4.35 Removal of Formwork ........................................................................................... 35
4.36. Composite Concrete/HollowClay Block Structures ............................................... 35
4.37 “Freespan” and “Maxspan” Suspended Structures ............................................... 36
4.38 “Freespan” Units or Beams ................................................................................... 37
4.39 “Maxspan” Precast Rib and Filler Block Structures .............................................. 37
4.40 Concrete Lintels .................................................................................................... 37
4.40 Precast Concrete................................................................................................... 40
4.41 Concrete Apron ..................................................................................................... 40
4.42 Attendance ............................................................................................................ 41
5.0 WALLING ....................................................................................................................... 42
5.1 General Requirements .......................................................................................... 42
5.2 Brick Walling .......................................................................................................... 43
6. ROOFING ....................................................................................................................... 47
6.1 General .................................................................................................................. 47
6.2 Steel Sheet ............................................................................................................ 47
6.3 Aluminum Sheets .................................................................................................. 47
6.4 Roof Tiling ............................................................................................................. 48
6.5 Bituminous Felt Roofing ........................................................................................ 50
6.6 Roofing Shingles ................................................................................................... 51
6.7 Proprietary Roofing Systems ................................................................................ 51
6.8 Roof Screeds ......................................................................................................... 51
6.9 Make Good ............................................................................................................ 51
7.0 CARPENTRY .................................................................................................................. 52
7.1 Timber ................................................................................................................... 52
7.2 Timber for Special Structures ................................................................................ 54
7.3 Preventive Treatment for Timber .......................................................................... 54
7.4 Seasoning ............................................................................................................. 54
7.5 Samples and Testing............................................................................................. 54
7.6 Sawn Timber ......................................................................................................... 54
7.7 Wrot Timber........................................................................................................... 55
7.8 Workmanship ........................................................................................................ 55
7.9 Jointing .................................................................................................................. 55
7.10 Connectors ............................................................................................................ 55
7.11 Nails and Bolts ...................................................................................................... 56
7.12 Roofs ..................................................................................................................... 56
7.13 Ends of Timber ...................................................................................................... 56
7.14 Fixing Slips and Plugs ........................................................................................... 56
7.15 Insect Damage ...................................................................................................... 56
7.16 Cleaning ................................................................................................................ 57
8.0 JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY ................................................................................... 58
8.1 Timber ................................................................................................................... 58
8.2 Species of Timber for Joinery Works .................................................................... 58
8.3 Preventive Treatment ............................................................................................ 60
8.4 Seasoning ............................................................................................................. 60
8.5 Samples for Testing .............................................................................................. 60
8.6 All Joinery to be Wrot ............................................................................................ 60
8.7 Selected Timber for Polish .................................................................................... 60
8.8 Plywood ................................................................................................................. 60
8.9 Block Boards ......................................................................................................... 60
8.10 Wood Chipboards .................................................................................................. 60
Ministry of Works and Transport iv

8.11 Veneers ................................................................................................................. 61

8.12 Adhesives .............................................................................................................. 61
8.13 Nails and Screws ................................................................................................... 61
8.14 Workmanship ........................................................................................................ 61
8.15 Joints ..................................................................................................................... 61
8.16. Moulding ................................................................................................................ 62
8.17. Fixing or Building Frames ..................................................................................... 62
8.18 Fixing Beads etc .................................................................................................... 62
8.19 Scribing ................................................................................................................. 62
8.20 Grounds ................................................................................................................. 62
8.21 Flush Doors ........................................................................................................... 63
8.22 Priming .................................................................................................................. 63
8.23 Polish or Clear Finishes ........................................................................................ 63
8.24. Inspection .............................................................................................................. 63
8.25. Storage and Delivery ............................................................................................. 63
8.26 Protection of Joinery.............................................................................................. 64
8.27 Ironmongery .......................................................................................................... 64
8.28 Dowels ................................................................................................................... 64
8.29. Mosquito Gauze .................................................................................................... 64
8.30. Making Good ......................................................................................................... 64
9.0 METAL WORK ............................................................................................................... 65
9.1 Materials generally ................................................................................................ 65
9.2 Structural Steel ...................................................................................................... 65
9.3 Welding ................................................................................................................. 65
9.4 Bolts....................................................................................................................... 65
9.5 Metal Windows and Doors .................................................................................... 65
9.6 Hanging ................................................................................................................. 65
9.7 Fittings ................................................................................................................... 66
9.8 Glazing Clips ......................................................................................................... 66
9.9 Fixing Lugs and Screws ........................................................................................ 66
9.10. Composite Windows.............................................................................................. 66
9.11. Protective Finish .................................................................................................... 66
9.12 Fly Screens ........................................................................................................... 67
10.0 PAVING ..................................................................................................................... 68
10.1 Cement .................................................................................................................. 68
10.2 Sand ...................................................................................................................... 68
10.3. Granolithic Coarse Aggregate ............................................................................... 68
10.4. Water ..................................................................................................................... 68
10.5. Granolithic paving.................................................................................................. 68
10.6. Granolithic Paving (Separate Construction) .......................................................... 69
10.7 Granolithic Paving (Monolithic) ............................................................................. 69
10.8 Chemical Surface Treatment ................................................................................ 69
10.9 Screeds ................................................................................................................. 70
10.10. Terrazzo Paving ................................................................................................... 70
10.11 Concrete and Quarry Tile Paving .......................................................................... 70
10.12 Cork Tile Paving ................................................................................................... 70
10.13 Flexible P.V.C Floor Tiling .................................................................................... 71
10.14 Dividing Strips ....................................................................................................... 71
10.15 Cover up and Protection of Paving ....................................................................... 71
11.0 WALL AND CEILING FINISHES ................................................................................... 72
11.1 Cement .................................................................................................................. 72
11.2. Lime ...................................................................................................................... 72
11.3. Sand ...................................................................................................................... 72
11.4 Plastering Generally .............................................................................................. 72
11.5 Internal Plastering ................................................................................................. 73
11.6 External Rendering................................................................................................ 73
11.7 Tyrolean Finish Rendering .................................................................................... 73
11.8. Expanded Metal Lathing ....................................................................................... 73
11.9. Wall Tiling .............................................................................................................. 74
Ministry of Works and Transport v

11.10 Expanded Polystyrene Tiles ................................................................................. 74

11.11 Insulation Board .................................................................................................... 75
11.12 Flat Sheets ............................................................................................................ 75
11.13 Make Good ........................................................................................................... 75
12.0 GLASS WORKS............................................................................................................ 76
12-1 Glass ..................................................................................................................... 76
12.2 Putty ...................................................................................................................... 76
12.3 Glazing .................................................................................................................. 76
12.4 Bedding Strips ....................................................................................................... 76
12.5 Cleaning on Completion ........................................................................................ 76
13.0 PAINTING...................................................................................................................... 77
13.1 Workmanship ........................................................................................................ 77
13.2 Sub-letting Work .................................................................................................... 77
13.3 Materials ................................................................................................................ 77
13.4 Paint ...................................................................................................................... 77
13.5 Linseed Oil ............................................................................................................ 77
13.6 Knotting ................................................................................................................. 77
13.7 Wax Polish ............................................................................................................ 77
13.8 Lacquer Treatment ................................................................................................ 77
13.9 Generally ............................................................................................................... 77
13.10 Preparation ........................................................................................................... 78
13.11 Preparation of Existing surfaces ........................................................................... 79
13.12 Backs of Frames ................................................................................................... 79
13.13 Remove Ironmongery ............................................................................................ 79
13.14 Cover up and Protect ............................................................................................ 79
13.15 Cleaning up ........................................................................................................... 80
14.0FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, pumpsand ACCESSORIES ............................... 81
14.1 Fire extinguisher cabinets ..................................................................................... 81
14.2 Fire extinguishers .................................................................................................. 81
14.3 Accessories ........................................................................................................... 81
14.4 Pumps ................................................................................................................... 81
14.5 Hosereel Installation .............................................................................................. 82
15. EXTERNAL WORKS ....................................................................................................... 83
15.1 Standards .............................................................................................................. 83
15.2 Generally ............................................................................................................... 83
15.3 Site Clearance and Earthworks ............................................................................. 85
15.4 Construction of Sub-Base and Bases ................................................................... 91
15.5 Drive Ways and Parking Areas ............................................................................. 94
PART 2 99
BUILDING SANITATION ....................................................................................................... 99
1.0 PLUMBING ................................................................................................................... 100
1.1 Statutory Requirements....................................................................................... 100
1.2 Galvanised Steel Pipes and Fittings ................................................................... 100
1.3 PPR pipes and fittings ......................................................................................... 100
1.4 Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Vent Pipes ................................................................. 101
1.4.1 uP.V.C. Soil Systems .......................................................................................... 101
1.5 Tubing Generally ................................................................................................. 101
1.6 Water Service and Distribution Pipework ............................................................ 101
1.7 Branches to Drinking Water Draw-off Taps......................................................... 101
1.8. Delivery Pipes ..................................................................................................... 101
1.9 Running, Jointing and Fixing Pipes ..................................................................... 102
1.10 Stops, Taps and Ball Valves ............................................................................... 102
1.11 Storage Cisterns .................................................................................................. 102
1.12. Testing of Water Mains and Services ................................................................. 102
1.13 Sanitary Fittings General ..................................................................................... 102
1.14 Water Closets ...................................................................................................... 103
1.15 Urinals ................................................................................................................. 103
Ministry of Works and Transport vi

1.16 Baths, Lavatory Basins and Sinks....................................................................... 103

2.0 DRAIN LAYING ............................................................................................................ 104
2.1 Drainage & Sanitation Rules ............................................................................... 104
2.2 Excavation ........................................................................................................... 104
2.3 Laying Lines of Pipes .......................................................................................... 104
2.4 Materials .............................................................................................................. 104
2.5 Size of Pipe and Fall ........................................................................................... 104
2.6 Minimum Cover to Pipes ..................................................................................... 104
2.7 Minimum Cover to Pipes other then cast Iron and Steel..................................... 105
2.8 Foundation for Drains .......................................................................................... 105
2.9. Drain Junctions .................................................................................................... 105
2.10. Provision of Inspection Chambers ...................................................................... 105
2.11 Construction and sizes of Inspection Chambers ................................................. 106
2.12. Inspection Chambers in Buildings ....................................................................... 106
2.13 Inspection Chamber Covers ................................................................................ 106
2.14 Channels and Benching in Inspection Chambers ............................................... 106
2.15 Deep Inspection Chamber of Means of Access .................................................. 107
2.16 Ventilation ............................................................................................................ 107
2.17 Soil Pipe Materials ............................................................................................... 107
2.18 Anti-Siphonage to Soil Pipes ............................................................................... 108
2.19 Channels or Open Drains .................................................................................... 108
2.20. Waste-Pipes and Waste Water Fittings .............................................................. 109
2.21 Rain Water Pipes ................................................................................................ 109
2.22 Overflow Pipes .................................................................................................... 109
2.23 Requirement of Gully Traps ................................................................................ 110
2.24. Provision of Grease Traps .................................................................................. 110
2.25. Septic Tanks and Cesspool Biological Filters ..................................................... 110
3.0. SUBTERRANEAN STORM AND SURFACE WATER DRAINAGE ........................... 111
3.1 Site ...................................................................................................................... 111
3.2 Roof ..................................................................................................................... 111
3.3. Surface water ...................................................................................................... 111
3.4. Drains, Sewers and channels for surface or storm water ................................... 111
3.5 Silt Traps and Grills or Gratings .......................................................................... 112
ELECTRICAL SERVICES .................................................................................................... 113
1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................... 114
2.0 ELECTRICAL WORK ................................................................................................... 116
3.0 RELATED BUILDER’S WORK .................................................................................... 117
4.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS/SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT ............... 118
5.0 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY ................................................................................................ 119
6.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 120
7.0 POWER INTAKE-UNDERGROUND AND OVERHEAD ............................................. 122
8.0 CONDUITS FOR INTERNAL WIRE DRAWING .......................................................... 123
9.0 CABLES (SINGLE AND MULTI-CORE) AND CONDUCTORS .................................. 124
9.0 MAIN AND SUB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS ................................................................ 125
10.0 WIRING ACCESSORIES, SMALL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL ............................ 126
11.0 INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY ......................................... 128
12.0 LUMINAIRES AND LAMPS ......................................................................................... 129
13.0 SITE LIGHTING ............................................................................................................ 130
14.0 LIGHTNING PROTECTION AND EARTHING ............................................................. 131
15.0 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SURVEILLANCE ...................................... 136
16.0 CENTRALISED TELEVISION SYSTEM ...................................................................... 137
Ministry of Works and Transport vii

17.0 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM ................................................................. 138

19.0 TRAINING OF CLIENT’S PERSONNEL ...................................................................... 139
20.0 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ...................................................... 140
AIRCONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION.................................................. 141
List of Reference Documents ............................................................................................ 148
Ministry of Works and Transport viii

Standard Specifications for Building Works Part 1
PART 1
ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL
AND
GENERAL WORKS
Ministry of Works and Transport 1

Standard Specifications for Building Works Part 1 - Section 1
1.0 GENERAL MATTERS
1.1 General Conditions of Contract
All clauses, definitions and procedures described in the General Conditions of

Contract for the Procurement of Works, issued by the Public Procurement
and Disposal of Public Assets Authority (PPDA)in June 2003 will apply to
these specifications unless specifically ruled otherwise in Special Conditions
of Contract.
1.2 Instructions to Bidders

All clauses, definitions and instructions issued in the Invitation to Bid and
Instructions to Bidders will apply to these specifications unless otherwise
ruled in the Bid Data Sheet/Bidding Data of the Bidding Documents
1.3 Scope of Contractor’s Obligations
The Contractor shall provide everything necessary for the proper execution
and completion of the works, according to these specifications, the particular
specification and/or the bills of quantities whether the same is particularly
described or not.
The Contractor shall provide all labour, carriage, freightage, building

materials, implements, tools, tackle and plant and whatever else may be
required for the proper and efficient execution and completion of the works.
The Contractor shall obtain necessary consents, pay any charges for,
provide, erect, maintain and remove all necessary self supporting and other
scaffolding, staging, gangways etc together with the necessary planks,
ladders, trestles, etc. for the use of all trades engaged upon the buildings.
The Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain and alter as necessary and
remove on completion all internal scaffolding, planks, trestles, ladders etc to
all floors for the use of all trades engaged upon the building.
The Contractor shall include in his rates, unit prices or tender for all charges
for waste, establishment and overhead charges and profit.
1.4 Interpretation of Terms

Wherever the words – ‘selected’ as ‘directed’ ‘as required’, or words of similar
meaning are used in these documents, it is to be understood that the
selection, direction or requirements of the Project Manager are intended.
Similarly the words ‘approved’, ‘satisfactory’ or other synonyms shall mean
‘approved by’ or ‘satisfactory to’ the Project Manager and the Project
Manager’s approval must first be obtained before the materials are ordered or
the works to which the words refer are put in hand.
Where the words ‘necessary’, ‘proper’ or words of similar meaning are used
in these documents with respect to the extent conduct or character or work
described, it is to be understood that they shall mean that the said work shall
be executed to the extent, must be conducted in a manner or be of a
character which is ‘necessary’ or ‘proper’ in the opinion of the Project
Manager.

1.5 Workmanship
All workmanship shall be carried out by skilled operatives well versed in their
respective trades.
All persons carrying out Plumbing and Drainage works shall hold licenses for
carrying out such work in accordance with Section 1.2.4 of the Uganda Code
for Sanitary Installations in Buildings.
1.6 Codes of Practices

Where certain classes of work are described as in accordance with a Code of
Practice or Standard, this shall be understood to mean the most recent and
up to date editions of the Codes of Practicesor Standards referred to. Where
a Uganda Standard is not in existence, the most recent version of the British
Standard as published by the Council for Codes of Practice, British Standards
Institutions or such other Code of Practice as shall be expressly stated herein
by the Project Manager may be applied.
1.7 Materials
All materials shall be new unless otherwise directed or permitted by the
Project Manager and in all cases where the quality of goods or materials is
not described or otherwise specified is to be the best quality obtainable in the
ordinary meaning of the word ‘best’ and not merely a trade signification of
that word.
A reference to Standard Specification shall be understood to mean the most

recent and up to date edition of that specification as published by the Ministry
responsible for Works
In absence of a specification of intended material does not exist in that

Standard Specification, reference to a British Standard Specification may
used and shall be understood to mean the most recent and up to date edition
of that specification as published by the British Standard Institution. The
initials ‘B.S.’ used in this document are the abbreviated form of British
Standard Specification.
The Project Manager reserves the right to substitute, amend, alter, enlarge
upon, correct or revise any of the foregoing and where this is intended it will
be expressly stated herein.
1.8 Ordering of Materials

The Contractor shall be solely responsible for ordering all materials required
for use on the works.
The Contractor shall order all material, other than those covered by Prime
Cost or Provisional Sums, as early as necessary after the Contract is signed
to ensure that such material will be on site when required for incorporation in
the works.
Materials which are the subject of Prime Cost or Provisional sums in these
documents shall be ordered immediately after written instructions are
received to do so from the Project Manager.

The Contractor is to take his own measurements for the ordering of materials.
No responsibility will be accepted by Government for surplus, shortage, loss
or expense if the goods are wrongly ordered.
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall replace or make good at his
own expense any materials lost or damaged, no matter how arising.
1.9 Proprietary of Materials

All proprietary materials and goods, i.e. those specified to be obtained from a
particular manufacturer shall be used and fixed strictly in accordance with
their instructions.
Where proprietary materials are specified hereafter the Contractor may

propose the use of materials of other manufacture and equal quality for
approval by the Project Manager. If such approval is given, in writing, then
these alternative materials may be incorporated in the works at no extra cost
to the Government.
1.10 Samples
The Contractor shall furnish at the earliest possible opportunity before work
commences and at this own cost, any samples of materials or workmanship
that may be called for by the Project Manager for his approval or rejection
and any further samples in the case of rejection until such samples are
approved. Such samples when approved shall be of not less than the
minimum standard for the work to which they apply.
Samples shall be as representative as possible and no attempt shall be made

to be unduly selective, samples shall be taken separately from a number of
places in a particular load, heap, stock pile, batch deposit pit or suppliers
store as the case may be, as directed by the Project Manager.
1.11 Prove Vouchers

The contractor shall upon, request by the Project Manager, furnish vouchers
to prove that materials are being supplied in accordance with the
specifications.
1.12 Tests
The Project Manager shall, as stated in the GCC, clause 34, be at liberty to
make all tests necessary in order to satisfy himself that the materials and
workmanship of every kind are in accordance with the Specification.
Where tests are carried out on the Works or samples taken by the Project
Manager, the Contractor shall give all necessary assistance when called
upon to do so.
The testing of materials will, unless expressly stated to the contrary, be

carried out either by the Chief Materials Engineer of the Ministry responsible
for Works at the Central Materials Laboratory, Kampala, or equivalent
laboratory as determined by the Project Manager. Tests may also be carried
out by Project Manager or his representative on site when adequate facilities
for such site tests exist.

1.13 Payment forTests

In case the Contract Documents include a Provisional Sum to meet the cost
of testing all materials other than concrete work cube tests as later described.
The Contractor shall keep an accurate record of the costs incurred in the
successful testing of materials and such costs will be adjusted in the final
account and set off against the Provisional sum.
The Contractor will not be paid for unsuccessful tests due to the submission
of materials which for any reason whatsoever are not of the required
standard.
1.14 Test Samples
Each sample submitted to the laboratory for testing shall be properly packed,
adequately labeled and have affixed to it the following information for the
purposes of identification:-
(a) Name of project and location

(b) Type of material
(c) Intended use
(d) Date sample taken
(e) By whom sampled
(f) In cases of aggregate or other naturally occurring material, the location
of the pit or deposit.
(g) Name of contractor and contractor’s sample reference number.
1.15 Rejected Workmanship and Materials

Any workmanship or materials not complying with the requirements of the
specification or approved samples which have been damaged, contaminated
or have deteriorated, must be immediately removed from the site and
replaced at the Contractor’s expense, as directed by the Project Manager.
1.16 Materials intended for the Works

No timber or other materials required in the permanent construction of the
works will be allowed to be used as plant or scaffolding.
1.17 Overtime or Nightwork

If the Contractor determines for the purpose of expediting the Works or for
any other reason to permit the working of overtime or nightwork necessary so
that the works or any part thereof, shall be completed in every respect ready
for occupation and use within the time stated, he must include for same in his
tender as no extra payment will be allowed for this at the settlement of the
accounts.
When the Project Manager directs the Contractor in writing, for any reasons
whatsoever; to carry out work outside normal working hours, he will be
reimbursed the net difference in cost between the operatives normal hourly or
daily rate of pay and the enhanced overtime rate where this applies.

1.18 Nuisance to Adjoining Buildings andProperty

The Contractor is to make every reasonable and practical effort, consistent
with good and expeditious work, to avoid nuisance from noise, dust, transport
or any other cause to the occupants of existing buildings and adjoining
property and to the public generally.
1.19 Existing and Adjacent Property

The Contractor must take all steps necessary to safeguard the existing
property and adjacent property, make good at his own expense any injury to
persons or damage to property caused thereon, and hold the Government
indemnified against any such claim arising.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to avoid damage to the
surrounding ground, grass, plants, shrubs and trees and reinstate at his own
expense any damage caused thereto.
1.20 Damage to Public and Private Roads

The Contractor will be required to make good at his own expense, any
damage he may cause to the present road surfaces and pavements during
the period of the works.
1.21 Existing Services
Prior to commencement of any work the Contractor is to ascertain from the

relevant Authorities the exact position, depth and level of all existing electric
and telephone cables water pipes or other services in the area and he shall
make whatever provisions may be required by the Authorities concerned for
the support and protection of such services. Any damage or disturbance
caused to any service shall be reported immediately to the Project Manager
and the relevant authority and shall be made good to their satisfaction at the
Contractor’s expense.
1.22 Watching and Lighting
The Contractor shall provide at his own cost all requisite day and night
watching and lighting including that for use by his Sub-Contractors, whether
nominated or otherwise and everything else necessary for the protection and
security of the Works, plant, materials on site, the Public, and all persons
lawfully using the premises during the execution of the works.
The Contractor shall provide red warning lamps at night to all obstructions
and excavations either on, in or adjacent to the public highway.
1.23 Licenses and Permits
The Contractor must ensure that he, as sole proprietor or as an authorized

director of his company and his workpeople are in possession
He must also ensure that he or his suppliers are in possession of valid import
licences for materials which are required to be obtained from outside Uganda.

1.24 Notices and Fees

The Contractor shall allow for giving all notices to Public Authorities and
Statutory undertakings and for payment all fees and charges legally
demandable. (see separate clause regarding water charges).
1.25 Definition of “Fix only”

For all items described in these documents as ‘Fix only” the Contractor shall
allow in addition to the foregoing for taking delivery where directed, checking
with invoices or indents, reporting and claiming damages for shortages and
damaged goods, defraying demurrage charges, transporting, unloading,
storing and protecting until the time of fixing, unpacking, replacing anything
lost or damaged, sorting, assembling, distributing, hoisting to required levels
and fixing complete in accordance with the directions supplied or specified.
1.26 Attendance of Nominated Sub-Contractors

The Contractor shall afford both general and specific attendance upon all
Nominated sub-contractors, specialists and other executing works for which
prime cost or provisional sums or prices are included hereafter.
The Contractor shall give such facilities to all firms employed upon the Works
as the Project Manager considers reasonable and afford them use of
scaffolding and ladders, alter standing scaffolding as required, or erect and
remove any special scaffolding which they may require for the purpose of
carrying out their work, supply them with labour and tackle for unloading,
getting in, storing, hoisting and distributing their materials, use of electric light,
power, and water and allow them use of storage for their materials, and the
use by the Nominated Sub-Contractors employees of all messrooms, sanitary
accommodation and welfare facilities and clear away all rubbish.
The Contractor shall give Nominated Sub-Contractors and other parties

working on the premises all information reasonably necessary to enable them
to properly set out and execute their work in harmony with the surroundings
and other trades, and is not to allow them to proceed otherwise.
The Contractor shall be responsible in every respect for Nominated Sub-

Contractors and in particular to see that their work proceeds regularly with the
general progress of the building works and in accordance with the Works
Program or Implementation Schedule.
The value of the foregoing services to be rendered by the Contractor to the

Sub-Contractors, as described in this Clause is to be allowed for in the Bills of
Quantities or particular specification under the item “Attendance’ which
follows each Prime Cost or Provisional Sum.
The Contractor shall allow for hacking surfaces to receive special finishes as
required by Nominated Sub-Contractors.
1.27 Temporary Roads

The Contractor shall provide and maintain as necessary, all temporary roads,
ramps, hard-standing, tracks, crossings and the like for the efficient running
of the Works for all vehicles entering and on the site, including those of
Nominated Sub-Contractors and afterwards remove and reinstate the ground
to its original condition if so directed by the Project Manager.

1.28 Temporary Fencing

The Contractor will not, unless otherwise expressly instructed in the Contract
Documents, be expected to provide a temporary fence or hoarding around
the site. He will however be required to afford adequate protection and
security from theft or other loss by the provision of a safe area or compound
for the storage of materials which cannot be properly stored in a lockable
store as provided hereafter. The compound must be properly constructed and
have adequate means of access and locking facilities and afterwards it must
be dismantled and clear away from the site.
1.29 Storage of Materials

The Contractor shall provide erect and maintain and clear away on
completion suitable watertight sheds and other protection for the storage of
materials including those of all Sub-Contractors.
Floors of sheds used for the storage of cement and other perishable
materials shall be raised at least 150 mm above ground level. Cement stacks
or bags shall be placed on timber pallets approved by the Project Manager.
1.30 Sheds for Operatives

The Contractor shall similarly provide suitable watertight sheds for the use of
the operatives and those of all Sub-Contractors.
1.31 Site Office

The Contractor shall provide erect and maintain and clear away on
completion suitable watertight temporary office accommodation for the use of
his site staff and a similar separate-office for the use of the Project Manager’s
Supervising Officer.
Each office shall be of suitable size for the purpose for which it is intended
and shall have a lockable door, windows of a size proportionate to the floor
area, adequate means of ventilation, and be fitted with a desk with a drawer
for the storage of plans and chair for the use of the staff.
1.32 Site Meetings
Site Meetings will be held in the Site Office at intervals as directed and the
contractor will be required to summon the attendance of Sub-Contractors and
specialists, prepare and distribute minutes and generally organize the
meetings.
1.33 Works Diary

The Project Manager will issue to the Contractor one copy of the Standard
Works Diary which shall be kept on the site at all times.

1.34 Foreman-in-Charge
The Contractor shall keep a Foreman-in-Charge in constant attendance upon
the works. He shall be capable of reading, writing and speaking English and
he shall keep copies of all drawings; details, specifications, letters,
instructions, etc. on the works.
He shall also be required to keep a day today record in the Works Diary of
the weather on the site.
1.35 Temporary Latrines and Ablutions

The Contractor shall provide the necessary temporary latrines, water closets
and ablutions for his staff and workmen to the requirements and satisfaction
of the Health Authorities and maintain the same in a thoroughly clean and
sanitary condition and pay all conservancy fees and connection charges
during the period of the Works and remove when no longer required and
make good all distributed surfaces.
1.36 Water for Works

The Contractor shall provide at his own risk and cost all water for use in
connection with the Works (including the work of Sub-Contractors whether
Nominated or otherwise). Where a mains supply is not available locally he will
be required to bring in water by tanker or other approved method and pay all
costs and fees in connection therewith. He shall also provide temporary
storage tanks and tubing, etc. as he may consider necessary and clear way
at completion.
All water shall be fresh, clear and pure, free from earthly vegetable or organic
matter, acid or alkaline substance, in solution or suspension.
1.37 Light and Power for the Works

The Contractor shall provide all artificial lighting and power for use on the
Works, including all Sub-Contractors and Specialists whether nominated or
otherwise, requirements and including all temporary connections, wiring,
fittings etc and clear away on completion. The Contractor shall pay all fees
and obtain all permits in connection therewith.
Before submitting his tender the Contractor must ascertain for himself
whether a supply will be available or not at commencement of or during the
course of the Works as no claim will be entertained due to failure by
UMEMEprovide such a supply.
1.38 Signboards
The Contractor shall provide, erect and clear away on completion a signboard
for the display of the General Contractor’s names which shall be of an
approved size and design with the Employers’ names painted thereon.
Particulars of all parties to the contract shall be given and words shall be
printed in a minimum size of 50 mm letters. No other signboard or advertising
signs shall be permitted without the permission of the Project Manager.

1.39 Protection of Works

The Contractor shall allow for covering up and protecting the Works during
inclement weather and provision of all temporary covers, gutters, down pipes
surface water drains, etc. as required.
1.40 Keeping and Delivering Site and Works Clean

He will also allow for carefully protecting all work including all Sub-
Contractors Work liable to injury and prove all necessary temporary casing,
linings, coverings to steps, floors, tiles, paving, walls, ceilings, fittings and
fixtures of all kinds to the complete satisfaction of the Project Manager and
finally clear all away on completion.
1.41 Contingencies
The Contractor shall allow for cleaning out drains, gullies, interceptors,
manholes, etc. Cleaning glass inside and out, cleaning metalwork and
woodwork, sweeping and scrubbing all floors pavings etc. or treating with
special finishes as described, cleaning all cisterns, sanitary fittings, etc,
testing all water supplies, cisterns and sanitary fittings and leaving drip dry,
oiling all door and window hinges, bolts and looks and removing all paint and
cement stains and clear and cart away all rubbish as it accumulates to a tip to
be provided by the Contractor and leave the whole of the site and Works
clean and tidy ready for occupation to the complete satisfaction of the Project
Manager.
The Contractor shall include in his Tender the Contingency Sum as directed
in the Particular Specification or Bills of Quantities which will be used as
directed by the Project Manager and deducted in whole or in part if not
required.

2.0 WORKS OF DEMOLITION AND ALTERATIONS
2.1 Demolition
All taking down and demolition is to be carried out without damage to the
remaining structures or the adjoining property. Where any such damage
occurs the Contractor shall reinstate and make good at his own expense
2.2 Obstruction of Public Road etc
The Contractor shall not obstruct the Public Thoroughfares or Private Rights
of Way without the approval of the Local authority and shall pay all their
charges and conform to all instructions issued by them.
2.3 Prevention of Dust and Fans
The Contractor shall thoroughly water the work during all demolition to
prevent any nuisance from dust, dirt, etc., and is to provide all necessary
protecting fans, barricades, dust sheets, tarpaulins etc to protect the new and
existing work, the public, the occupants and the workmen.
2.4 Removal of Rubbish

All items of taking down etc., shall be included for removing, basketting,
getting out and clearing away from site all debris and rubbish whether
specifically mentioned or not from the relevant floor levels.
2.5 Disposal of Rubbish

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for a shoot or spoil heap for
disposal of all materials arising from demolition works and he is to pay all
charges in connection therewith
2.6 Use of Suitable Material for Hardcore

The Contractor may use the broken brick and other approved material arising
from the pulling as hardcore filling under floors, paths etc., provided such
materials are suitably broken down and cleaned to the approval of the Project
Manager.
2.7 Dustproof Screens

The Contractor shall allow for providing and fixing temporary waterproof and
dustproof screens, coverings, etc. to all sections of the existing building,
which may be exposed by reason of the pulling down and shall efficiently
keep the premises watertight and dust free whilst building work is in progress.
2.8 Shoring
The Contractor’s price for shoring where described shall include for all
shoring, needling, strutting etc., to all walls, floors, roofs, etc., as required,
altering and adapting same as necessary and the Contractor shall be
responsible for the sufficiency and maintenance of the same and removal
when no longer required and making good all works disturbed at completion.

2.9 Building Openings

The Contractor’s price for building up openings in existing walls shall include
for all temporary strutting to heads, preparing jambs, oils and wedging and
pinning at heads.
2.10 Cutting Openings in Existing Walls

The Contractor’s prices for cutting openings etc., in external walls at various
floor levels and all other works necessitated shall be deemed to include for all
necessary scaffolding, ladders, etc.
Similarly, this shall equally apply to the Contractor’s prices for external
painting.
2.11 Existing Public Service Mains

The contractor is to allow for protecting supporting or diverting as required
any Public Service Mains encountered during the execution of the works or
he must allow for and pay all fees chargeable if this work is executed by the
Public Authorities concerned.
2.12 Government to Retain Ownership of Old Materials

Where materials as described “to set aside for re-use” they shall remain the
property of the Government and shall be carefully preserved by the
Contractor and loaded and carted to a store where directed by the Project
Manager, and the Contractor shall allow in his prices for this activity.
2.13 Materials to be Cleared Away

All old materials described to be “cleared away” shall become the property of
the Contractor and shall be removed from the site by him and he is to state in
the place provided any credit he is prepared to allow. The Government
reserves the right, however, to retain ownership in any of the materials arising
from the pulling down and the Contractor will be reimbursed at the credit
value he has allowed for those materials.
2.14 Definiton of “Make Out”and “Make Good”

The terms “make out” and “make good” shall be read as including all
necessary labour and new materials required to match in every respect the
existing surrounding work, unless the same are described as ‘measured
separately”.

3.0 EXCAVATION
3.1 Clearance of Site
Clearance of the site of the Works shall be done to the extent as directed by
the Project Manager but not otherwise. This shall include demolition and
removal of all obstruction, removal of rubbish, cutting down vegetation,
shrubs, bushes and trees and grubbing up stumps and roots and burning or
clearing away from site, as appropriate. Holes made in grubbing up stumps
and roots shall be filled in and rammed solid with approved material
deposited in layers not exceeding 150mm thick.
3.2 Trees and Bushesto be Preserved

Trees and bushes which are to be preserved shall be marked with paint by
the Project Manager’s Supervising Officer on site and the Contractor shall
carefully protect these as required until completion of the Works.
3.3 Felling Trees

All useable timber trees shall remain the property of the Government. Trees
shall be cut down as near to the ground as possible, leaves and branches
removed and burnt, and useful trunks cut into suitable lengths and removed
and placed in stocks on the site where directed.
3.4 Anthills
All anthills, nests, queen ants and grubs shall be removed as necessary, and
the ground sterilized either by lighting fires and burning for not less than 24
hours or use of an approved insecticide, and filling any holes excavated with
approved material,rammed solid in layers not exceeding 150 mm thick.
3.5 Removal of Vegetable Soil

The Contractor shall excavate over surface of site of roads, paths,
embankments, terraces, etc., and to a distance of not less than 3 m around
any building, and remove vegetation and top soil to a depth of not less than
150 mm below the average existing ground level jot to such other average
existing ground level or to such other depth as directed by the Project
Manager, Vegetable soil shall be removed to a spoil heap within the
boundary of the site or as otherwise directed and carefully preserved for
reuse in top soiling to embankments and areas of cut or fill.
3.6 Excavation to Reduce Level

The Contractor shall excavate over surface of site to reduce level and “get
out”. Formation level is deemed to be the underside or gravel/murram base
courses of roads, hard standings and the like. Grassed areas or unpaved
areas, are unless directed to the contrary to be reduced to 150 mm below
finished ground levels to allow for the replacing of top soil for grassing.

3.7 Excavation for Embankments

The Contractor shall excavate to reduce levels to form embankments where
required and “get out”. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings the face of
the embankment shall be finished to an even slope not greater than 2:5.
3.8 Excavation for Foundations

The Contractor shall excavate for basements, foundation, ducts, pier holes,
stanchion bases, etc., all to the widths and depths as shown on the drawings
or as directed by the Project Manager.
3.9 Steps in Foundations

Steps in foundations shall be provided in accordance with the drawings or the
Project Manager’s instructions.
3.10 Excess Excavations

The Contractor shall level or trim to falls and cross falls as indicated on the
drawings, ram and consolidate the surface of the ground and bottom of all
excavations to receive concrete foundations, beds, etc.
3.11 Bottoms of Excavations to be Approved

The bottom of all excavations and ground surfaces under foundations, beds
and the like shall be inspected and approved by the Project Manager before
concrete of hardcore is laid.
3.12 Soft Spots

Where pockets of soft or other unsuitable material are found to extend below
the approved foundation or formation level, the pockets shall be removed to
such extent and levels as directed by the Project Manager and filled up to the
underside of the adjacent foundations, with concrete mix ‘E’ as later
described in the case of concrete work or with approved excavated material
when under hardcore beds.
3.13 Excess Excavations

Should any excavation be made below the depths shown or required to
obtain a solid bottom, the Contractor shall fill up the excess excavation in the
same manner as described for Soft Spots - Clause 3.12.
3.14 Working Space

Where work carried out by other trades demand it, or when instructed by the
Project Manager, the Contractor shall excavate working space sufficient to
facilitate the proper carrying out of such work, i.e. vertical tanking, formwork
to ground beams, etc.

3.15 Excavation in Rock

The Contractor’s prices for all excavation work will be deemed to include for
excavations in any material other than solid rock.
3.16 Definition of Solid Rock

Solid rock shall mean any naturally occurring material found in ledges or
masses in its original position which can only be extracted by the use of
compressors or by blasting, and also solid boulders or detached pieces of
rock in size:-
3
(i) Exceeding 0.25 m in trenches.
3
(ii) Exceeding 1.25 m in general excavation
3.17 Determination of Rock Excavation

The Contractor shall inform the Project Manager as soon as solid rock is
exposed so that the Project Manager can inspect and determine that the
material is in accordance with the definition in Clause 3.16 above and then
instruct the Contractor to remove it or cause a redesign of the affected
foundation works as he sees fit.
3.18 Payment for Rock Excavation

The Contractor shall be paid extra for the removal of solid rock so defined at
the rates inserted by him in the Contract Documents or, in the absence of
such rates,by rates to be agreed with the Project Manager. The “extra” rates
for rock excavation shall include for excavating with compressors or for
blasting, if allowed, and the extra cost of leveling, trimming and disposal.
3.19 Blasting
Blasting shall be allowed only when expressly authorized by the Project
Manager.
If in his opinion it would be dangerous to persons or adjacent buildings to

blast or if blasting has been authorised and is being carried out in a reckless
or dangerous manner he may prohibit it and order the rock to be excavated
by other means.
The greatest care shall be taken by the contractor when blasting to ensure
that no injury be done to persons or any finished work. The shorts shall be
properly loaded and covers and lonely moderate charges shall be used and
where directed by the Project Manager the Contractor shall provide heavy
mesh blasting nets or blast mounds. Blasting shall be restricted to such times
as the Project Manager shall direct.
The Contractor shall make good at his own expense any damage resulting
from blasting operations irrespective of whether the Project Manager has
directed that special precautions be taken or not.
3.20 Returning, Filling and Ramming

The Contractor shall return and fill selected excavated material around
foundations, to backs of walls etc., up to formation level or as directed by the
Project Manager, in layers not exceeding 230 mm thick, ram, consolidate and
water it as required. No back filling shall be done until the foundation work

has been inspected and approved by the Project Manager.
3.21 Filling to Make-up Levels

Filling to make up levels under floors, terraces and the like shall be done
using selected excavated material. The material shall be wheeled from
wherever it is located on the site and filled in layers not exceeding 150 mm
thick each, watered as required and well rammed and consolidated up to the
required levels.
3.22 Borrow Pits

Where there is insufficient filling material arising from the excavations the
Contractor shall be required to obtain it from other sources to make up the
required quantity. The Contractor shall open up a suitable borrow pit,
excavate as necessary, transport the material to site and deposit and fill as
previously described.
3.23 Replacement of Vegetable Soil

The Contractor shall remove vegetable soil from spoil heaps and wheel and
deposit it over the area of excavated and filled areas around buildings
including sloping faces of embankments to a finished depth of not less than
150 mm or to such other depth as directed by the Project Manager.
Any surplus vegetable soil shall be deposited, spread and leveled on site
where directed. Under no circumstances is the contractor to sell, remove from
site or otherwise dispose of vegetable soil.
3.24 Disposal of Surplus Excavated Material

All surplus excavated material shall be wheeled, deposited, spread and
leveled on site where directed by the Project Manager, or where otherwise
expressly provided in these documents to be removed from the site to a tip to
be provided by the Contractor who is required to pay any fees and charges in
connection therewith.
3.25 Definition of “Get out”

The term “get out” shall be construed as meaning all basketting out, and any
re-excavation from spoil heaps which may be required in connection with
items of filling and disposal.
3.26 Planking and Strutting

The Contractor shall include for maintaining and upholding the sides of all
excavations by means of planking and strutting or such other method as he
deems necessary, including excavations next public roadways, filled areas
and existing hardcore or any other material. No claim for additional
excavation, concrete or other material required due to the Contractor’s failure
to observe this clause shall be allowed.

3.27 Keeping Excavations Free of Water

The Contractor shall keep the whole of the excavations free from water, slop
and mud arising from surface water, rain, drains, floodwater or any other
similar cause by baling pumping, temporary drains or otherwise until
completion of the Works. Where hidden underground springs are
encountered or where foundations extend below the level of the water table
which requires continuous pumping, the Contractor will, where this is properly
authorised in writing by the Project Manager be paid for this at rates to be
agreed for the use of such pumps.
3.28 Hardcore
The Contractor shall provide and lay hardcore beds under all concrete beds,,
pavings, etc., to the thickness as shown on the drawings.
Hardcore shall consist of approved hard dry broken brick rubble or crushed
stone to pass a 65mm ring, laid in layers not exceeding 150 mm thick and
each well watered, rammed and consolidated and leveled or finished to falls
as shown on the drawings, blinded with fine stuff to receive concrete or other
topping.
The Contractor shall form all sinking for ducts and thickenings in floor to the
dimensions as indicated on the drawings.
3.29 Temporary Retaining Boards

The Contractor shall supply and maintain all temporary retaining boards for
hardcore beds.
3.30 Anti-termite treatment

Pre - Construction Chemical Treatment In The Buildings
Scope:
This specification covers the general requirements for anti-termite
constructional measures, chemical treatment of soils for the protection of
buildings from attack by subterranean termites, chemicals to be used with
their minimum rates of application and procedure to be followed while the
building is under construction.
General:
The contractor shall furnish all tools, plants, instruments, qualified supervisory
personnel, labour, materials, any temporary works, consumables, and
everything necessary whether or not such items are specifically stated herein
for completion of the job in accordance with specification requirements.
All work shall be done in the order of progress required by Owner’s

construction programme. The contractor shall take all necessary precautions
to prevent any accident in connection with the performance of the work. On
final completion of all the work, the contractor shall leave the entire premises
within the site of his operation clean and free from all rubbish resulting from
his operation.
The owner reserves the right to inspect, check and direct any or all
operations at any stage of the work and to require unsatisfactory work to be
remedied at the contractor’s expense. No work shall be carried out under

unsuitable weather conditions viz. when raining or when the soil is wet due to
rain or sub-soil water.
Chemicals shall be brought to site of work is sealed original containers. The

materials shall be brought in, at a time, in adequate quantity to suffice for the
work. The materials shall be kept in cool and locked stores. The empties
shall not be removed from the work site till the relevant item of work has been
completed and permission granted by Owner / Engineer.
Chemicals available in concentration forms with concentration indicated on

the sealed containers only shall be used. Chemicals shall be diluted with
water in required quantity before use, using graduated containers to achieve
the desired percentage of concentration:
Examples : Aldrin 20 - 1 lt. is diluted to 40 lts. to

give 0.5% emulsion.
Aldrin 18 - 1 lt. is diluted to 35 lts. to

give 0.5% emulsion.
Chlordane 20 - 1 lt. is diluted to 20 lts.

to give 1.0% emulsion.
Pre - constructional chemical treatment:
Essential requirements:
Hand operated pressure pump with graduated containers shall be used to

ensure uniform spraying of the chemicals. Continuous check shall be kept to
ensure that the specified quantity of chemical is used for the required area
during the operation.
Condition of formation:
The treated soil barrier shall be complete and continuous under the whole of
the structure to be protected. All foundations shall be fully surrounded by and
in close contact with the barrier of treated soil. Each part of the area treated
shall receive the specified dosage of chemical.
Time of application:
Soil treatment shall start when the foundation trenches and pits are ready to
receive mass concrete in foundations. Casting of mass concrete shall start
when the chemical emulsion has been absorbed by the soil and the surface is
quite dry. Treatment shall not be carried out when it is raining or soil is wet
with rain or sub-soil water. The same applies to the earth surface within the
plinth before laying the sub-grade for the floor.
Disturbance:
The treated soil barriers shall not be disturbed after they are formed. If by
chance, treated soil barriers are disturbed immediate steps shall be taken to
restore the continuity and completeness of the barrier system.
Chemicals, method and rate of application:
A. Mound treatment:
Termite mounds within the plinth and contingent apron area shall be
destroyed by means of insecticides in the form of water suspension or

emulsion which shall be poured into the mounds at several places after
breaking open the earthen structure and making holes with crow bars. For a
mound volume of about one (1) cum, four (4) litres of an emulsion in water of
one of the following shall be used.
i. 0.25 % Aldrin
ii. 0.25% Heptachlor
iii. 0.5% Chlordane
B. Soil treatment:
Any one of the following chemical in water emulsion shall be applied

uniformity over the area to be treated.
CHEMICAL CONCENTRATION BY
WEIGHT %
Aldrin 0.5
Heptachlor 0.5
Chlordane 1.0
Treatment of column - pits, wall trenches and basement excavation:
a. The bottom surface and the sides (up to a height of about 300mm) of
the excavation made for column pits, wall trenches and basements
shall be treated with the chemical at the rate of 5 litres per Sq.M. of
the surface area.
b. After the column foundations and the retaining walls of the basement
come up, the backfill in immediate contact with the foundation
structure shall be treated at the rate of 15 litre / Sq.M. of the vertical
surface of the sub-structure for each side. If water is used for
ramming the earth-fill, the chemical treatment shall be carried out
after the ramming operation is done by rodding the earth at 150mm
centres close to the wall surface and spraying the chemical with the
above done. The earth shall be returned in layers and the treatment
shall be carried out in similar stages. The chemical emulsion shall be
directed towards the concrete or masonry surface of the columns and
wall so that the earth in contact with these surfaces is well treated
with the chemical.
c. In the case of RCC framed structures with columns and plinth beams
and RCC basements, with concrete mix 1:2:4 or richer, the treatment
shall start at the depth of 500 mm below ground level for columns
and plinth beams. From this depth the back-fill around the columns,
beams and RCC basement walls shall be treated at the rate of 15
litres / Sq.M. of vertical surface. The other details of treatment shall
be as laid down in clause (b) above.
Treatment of top surface of plinth filling:
The top surface of the filled earth within plinth beams / walls shall be treated
with chemical emulsion at the rate of 5 lts./Sq.M. of the surface before the
sand bed/subgrade is laid. Holes up to 50 to 70mm deep at 150mm centres
both ways shall be made with 12mm diameter crow-bar on the surface to
facilitate saturation of the soil with chemical emulsion.
Treatment of junction of wall and floor:
To achieve continuity of vertical chemical barrier to inner wall surfaces from

the ground level, small channel 30 x 30 mm shall be made at all the junctions

of wall and columns with the floor (before laying the subgrade) and rod holes
made in the channel up to ground level 150mm apart and the chemical
emulsion poured along the channel at the rate of 15 litres / Sq.M. of the
vertical wall or column surface so as to soak the soil right to the bottom. The
soil shall be tamped back into place after this operation.
Treatment of soil under apron along external perimeter of building
The top surface of the consolidated earth over which the apron is to be laid
shall be reacted with chemical emulsion at the rate of 5 litres / Sq.M. of the
surface before the apron is laid, by making rod holes 75 mm deep at 150mm
centres both ways.
These chemicals are usually brought to site in the form of emulsifiable

concentrates. The containers should be clearly labelled and should be stored
carefully so that children and pet cannot get at them. They shall be kept
securely closed. Particular care shall be taken to prevent skin contact with
concentration. Prolonged exposure to dilute emulsions shall also be avoided.
Workers shall wear clean clothing and wash thoroughly with soap and water,
especially before eating and smoking. In the event of severe contamination,
clothing shall be removed at once and the skin washed with soap and water.
If chemicals splash into eyes they shall be flushed with plenty of soap and
water and immediate medical attention shall be sought. The concentrates
are oil solutions and present a fire hazard owing to the use of petroleum
solvents. Flames shall not be allowed during mixing. Care shall be taken
in the application of chemicals to see that they are not allowed to contaminate
wells or springs which serve as source of drinking water.
Measurements:
The measurements shall be made in sq.m. on the basis of plinth area of the
building at ground floor only for all operations described above. Nothing extra
shall be measured.
Rate:
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in al the
operations described above including making holes and refilling and making
good the same.

4. 0 CONCRETE WORK
4.1 General Requirements

All concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with these specifications
except that in the case of reinforced concrete the provisions of B.S 8110-1:
1997: Structural Use of Concrete - Part 1 : Code of Practice for Design and
Construction shall apply in so far as they override, modify or supplement the
clauses contained herein. The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager
full details of all materials which he proposes to use for making concrete.
4.2 Cement
The cement shall, unless specifically stated to the contrary, be common
cement complying with the requirements of Uganda Standard US 310 – 1& 2:
2001. Where other cements are specified they shall comply with the
requirements of the relevant European Norms (EN) Standards.
All cement shall be obtained from manufacturers in Uganda. Where cement is

to be imported, prior approval of the Project Manager shall have to be
obtained.
The Contractor shall supply, when requested by the Project Manager, test
certificates relating to each type of cement used certifying that it complies
with the appropriate Uganda Standard.
Unless approval is given for bulk handling, all cement shall be transported
and delivered in sound and properly secured bags and stored in a dry,
weatherproof, well ventilated shed with a raised floor or in such a building as
is approved by the Project Manager.
Each delivery of cement in bags shall be stacked in one place. The bags shall
be closely stacked to reduce air circulation but shall not be stacked against
an outside wall. Where pallets are used, they shall be constructed so that the
bags are not damaged during handling and stacking. No stack of cement
bags shall exceed 3 m in height. Different types of cement in bags shall be
clearly distinguished by visible markings and shall be stored in separate
stacks. Cement in bags shall be used in the order in which it is delivered.
Bulk cement shall be stored in weatherproof silos, which shall bear a clear
indication of the type of cement contained in them. Different types of cement
shall not be mixed in the same silo.
Cement shall be delivered or stored on site in such quantities to ensure that

the concrete work on any section of the Works can be carried out without
interruption. Each consignment shall be kept separate and distinct.
Any cement that has been injuriously affected by dampness or any other
cause shall not be used and shall immediately be removed from the site.
Cement which has become hardened and lumpy shall be removed from site.
Cement which has been stored on site for longer than one month shall be
tested at the Central Materials Laboratory of the Ministry responsible for
Works or at the Uganda National Bureau of Standards Laboratories as
directed by the Project Manager.

4.3 Aggregate for Concrete

Aggregates for concrete shall consist of clean natural sands, gravel, crushed
stone or other material which have been approved for use by the Project
Manager and shall apply in respect of quality with the requirement of BS EN
12620 “Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural Sources for Concrete”.
Tests shall be made at frequent intervals or when called for to determine the
amount of impurities in the aggregates and if ordered by the Project Manager
fine aggregates shall be washed at the Contractor’s own expense.
BS EN 12620 requires that aggregates shall be hard, durable clean and free
from adherent coatings such as clay.
They shall not contain harmful materials such as iron pyrites, iron oxide,
mica, shale or similar laminar materials, or flaky or elongated particles, in
such a form or in sufficient quantity as to adversely affect the strength or
durability of the concrete or any materials which might attach reinforcement
where this is required.
The various sizes of particles of which an aggregate is composed shall be

uniformly distributed throughout the mass. The quantities of clay, silt and fine
dust shall not exceed:-
(i) Sand or crushed gravel sand, 3% by weight when using the test given
in BS 812 Clause 13
(ii) Crushed stone sand, 5% by weight when using the test given in BS 812
Clause 12.
(iii) Coarse aggregate, 1% by weight when using the test given in BS 812
Clause 13.
(iv) All in aggregate, 2% by weight when using the test given in BS 812
Clause 13.
A guide to the silt and clay content of sand and crushed gravel sand can be
obtained by the field settling test described in B.S. 812 Clause 14 when the
silt and clay content should not exceed 65 by volume.
4.4 Grading of Aggregates

The grading of aggregates shall be within the limits in the following tables:-
Table 4.4.1 Fine Aggregate
Percentage by weight passing B.S. Sieves

B.S.Sieve Grading Grading Grading Grading
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4
9 mm 100 100 100 100
4.5 mm 90-100 90-100 90-100 95-100
No. 7 60-75 75-100 85-100 95-1000
No. 14 30-70 55-90 75-100 80-100
No. 25 15-34 35-59 60-79 80-100
No. 52 5-20 10-30 15-40 15-50
No. 100 0-10* 0-10* 0-10* 0-15*
* For crushed stone sands the permissible limit is increased to 20%

A fine aggregate whose grading falls outside the limits of any particular
Grading Zone on sieves other than No. 25 by a total amount not exceeding
5% shall be regarded as being in that Grading Zone. The 5% can be split up,
for example, as 1% on each of three sieves and 2% on another or 4% on one
sieve and 1% on another, etc.
No tolerance is allowed for fine aggregate on the coarsest and finest limits of
grading in all four Grading Zones.
Grading Zone 4 material should not be used in reinforced concrete unless

tests have been made to ascertain the suitability of the proposed mix
proportions.
4.5 Sand
All sands for making mortar shall be clean well graded silicious sand of good,
sharp, hard quality equal to samples which shall be deposited with and
approved by the Project Manager. earth, loam, dust, salt, organic matter and
any other deleterious substances, sieved
4.6 Grading of Aggregates

Table 4.4.2 – Coarse Aggregates
Percentage by Weight Passing B.S. Sieves

Nominal Size of Graded Aggregate
B. S 19 mm 12 mm
38 mm to
Sieve to 5 to 5 64 mm 38 mm 19 mm 12 mm 9 mm
5 mm
mm mm
75 mm 100 - - 10 - - - -
64 mm - - - 85-100 100 - - -
38 mm 95-100 100 - 0-30 85-100 100 - -
19 mm 30-70 95-100 100 0-5 0-20 85-100 100 -
12 mm - - 90-100 - - - 85-100 100
9mm 10-35 22-55 40-85 - 0-5 0-20 0-45 85-100
5 mm 0.5 0-10 0-10 - - 0-5 0-10 0-20
No. 7 - - - - - - - 0-5
The use of All-in aggregate may, with the specific approval of the Project
Manager, be permitted in the case of mass concrete, unreinforced work etc.,
and where such approval is given the proportions of All-in aggregate to
cement shall so gauged as to give a mix equivalent to that using separate
aggregates.
The All-in aggregate shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 812 the
grading being in accordance with the following table

Table 4.4.3 – All-in Aggregates
Percentage by Weight Passing B.S. Sieve

B.S Sieve 38 mm Nominal
19mm Nominal Size
Size
78 mm 100 -
38 mm 95-100 100
19 mm 45-75 95-100
5 mm 25-45 30-50
No. 25 8-30 10-35
No. 100 0-6 0-6
4.7 Maximum Sizes of Coarse Aggregates
The maximum size of the largest size coarse aggregate shall not be larger
than a quarter of the least size of the member in which it is being used and at
least 6 mm less than the smallest space between reinforcing bars where the
member is reinforced.
4.8 Storage of Aggregates
Aggregates of different sizes shall be stored in separate bins on hard clean

floor free from contamination of any kind. Samples shall be supplied to the
Project Manager for testing prior to the Works being commenced.
Aggregates shall be kept in sufficient quantity to enable the work on any

section to be completed without interruption.
All aggregates shall be tested regularly as directed by the Project Manager,

and any material which is below standard or which has become contaminated
or adulterated in any way shall be immediately removed from the site.
Water for concrete mixing shall be from an approved source and shall be
clean and free from acids, vegetable matter and any other deleterious
material in solution or suspension. Potable water shall be suitable for
concrete preparation.
4.9 Concrete Mixes by Volume or Weight

The proportion for concrete mix sizes shall be specified either by:
a) Volume
b) Weight
Concrete mixes by volume will be permitted in the case of mass concrete

work, unreinforced foundations and beds and for small isolated structural
members such as lintels and isolated beams providing that in all cases the
Project Manager is satisfied that the required strengths are being obtained.
Weight batching shall be used for all other concrete work in reinforced
concrete ground beams, column bases, structural frames, floors, roofs,
staircases, retaining walls and the like.
4.10 Concrete Mixes

Concrete mixes shall be designed to satisfy the specified characteristic
strengths. The mean strength of the designed mix shall exceed the specified

values by twice the expected standard deviation so as to take into account

the inevitable variation.
Both fine and coarse aggregates shall be from natural sources and shall be
graded such as to produce a concrete of specified proportions which will work
readily into position without segregation and without excessive water content.
4.10.1 Concrete Slump Test
The slumps for concrete grades 15 – 30 N/mm2 should be between 25 -

50mm. (I.S.E Manual)
4.11 Design Mixes

The strengths attained for each mix shall be in accordance with those stated
in Table 4.12.1 as described later.
If, because of the nature of the aggregates available, it becomes impossible

to achieve the desired strength and workability, the Project Manager reserves
the right to vary or “design” the mix proportion in order that concrete of the
necessary quality will be produced.
The Contractor shall include for this and for a minimum increase of 10% in
the cement content of any specified mix, whether by volume or weight,
without extra charge.
4.12 Trial Mixes
When directed by the Project Manager, the Trial Contractor shall make trial
mixes for his approval mixes, before general manufacture of concrete
commences.
Trail mixes shall be made using the identical plant and compaction methods
which will be used in the works and deposited in suitable representative
formwork.
Careful measurements of the cement, aggregate and water: cement ratios,

slump and workability shall be made and the time of mixing noted for each
mix.
Six “preliminary” test cubes shall also be made for each mix. Three cubes
from each batch shall be tested for compressive strength at seven (7) days
and the remaining three at twenty eight (28) days. The density of all the
cubes shall be determined before the strength tests are carried out.
Mixes shall be made in such numbers as directed until the desired qualities
are obtained.
Every precaution shall be observed to ensure that the manufacture and

placing of concrete in the works is carried out in the same fashion as that
used in the manufacture of the selected trial mix.
The Project Manager may direct that fresh trial mixes be made should there
be any change in the source or grading of the aggregate, manner of making
and compacting, or other change from the trial mix adopted originally.

The crushing strength of “preliminary” test cubes taken from trial mixes, shall
at 28 days be not less than 25% more than that specified for the minimum
crushing strength of “Works” test cubes as later described, for the same
quality of concrete.
Concrete cubes shall be submitted to the Project Manager for “Preliminary”

and “Work” Cube Tests. The Contractor shall equip himself with accurately
made metal moulds for casting 100mm square concrete cubes.
The moulds and method of preparing such cubes shall be in accordance with
B.S 1881 “Method of Testing Concrete”.
Batches of six “Preliminary” cubes shall be taken from the trial mixes as
previously described. Six “Work” cubes shall be taken for testing from any
batch or class of concrete in use on the works as directed by the Project
Manager.
Three cubes shall be tested at 7 days and three at 28 days.
All concrete cubes when tested shall give the minimum compressive
strengths for the appropriate class of concrete shown in the following table:-
Table 4.12.1: Compressive strength and modulus of elasticity of

concrete (N/mm2)
Modulus
Characteristic
Characteristic of
Cube strength tensile
Grade compressive strength elasticity
(N/mm2) strength at 28
at 28 days (N/mm2) at 28 days
days (N/mm2)
(N/mm2)
28days 7days 28days 7days
15 15 12 18 14.4 1.1 25x103
20 20 16 24 19.2 1.3 27x103
25 25 20 30 24 1.5 29x103
30 30 24 36 28.8 1.7 32x103
40 40 32 48 38.4 21 35x103
50 50 40 60 48 2.5 37x103
Concrete test cubes shall be submitted to the Central Materials Laboratory,

Kampala, for testing and the Contractor shall carefully identify each cube and
provide all information relative thereto, e.g. contract number, mix proportions,
date cast, where the rest of the batch has been incorporated in the works and
the Contractor’s name and test cube reference number.
In the event that any cubes representative of concrete which has already
been incorporated in the work failing to give the required compressive
strength, the Project Manager reserves the right to instruct the contractor to
cut out and remove all work affected by these cubes and replace it entirely at
his own expense.
4.13 Mixing of Concrete

Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed to a uniform consistency in measured
batches in a mechanical mixer of capacity proportionate to the amount of
concrete required in any section of the works under construction. Mixing shall
continue for not less than two minutes after all the materials including water,
which shall be added last of all, have been passed into the drum and before

any portion of the batch is discharged but in all cases the actual shall conform
to that required for the selected trail mix.
The water content shall be carefully controlled and shall be added in sufficient
quantity to make up the amount found to be necessary in the trial mix under
no circumstances will the water; cement ratio be exceeded and any batch
which is mixed too wet shall be rejected. The entire contents of the mixer
drum shall be discharged before the succeeding batch is introduced into the
drum.
Mixers and or batching plant shall be properly maintained throughout the

contract and any mixer of plant which is faulty in any respect shall not be
used. Drums of all mixers shall revolve at a constant speed recommended by
the manufacturers. A mixer which has been standing idle for twenty minutes
after mixing the last batch shall be thoroughly washed and cleaned before
any fresh mix is made. Mixers shall be thoroughly cleaned at the finish of
each run of concrete mixing or at the end of each day. All mixing plant shall
be thoroughly cleaned if used for High Aluminium or other specialised cement
concretes after Common Cement concretes and vice-versa.
4.14 Hand Mixing

Hand mixing shall only be allowed with the express permission of the Project
Manager.
The mixing shall be done on a clean, watertight, non-absorbent platform. The

cement and fine aggregate shall be mixed dry until the mixture is thoroughly
blended and uniform in colour. The coarse aggregate shall then be added
and mixed in until it is uniformly distributed throughout the batch. The correct
quantity of water shall be added using a can with a rose nozzle and the
mixing continued until the entire batch of concrete appears to be
homogenous and has the desired consistency. Each batch of concrete shall
be turned over at least three times dry and three times wet.
The platform shall be emptied before a subsequent batch is mixed and

thoroughly cleaned if not in use for more than 20 minutes before the next
batch is prepared or if a different type of cement is used as previously
described.
For hand mixing the cement content of each mix shall be increased by 10%
over that required for machine mixing and this shall be done at the
Contractor’s own expense.
4.15 Transporting and Placing Concrete

Concrete shall be transported in a manner which will avoid any segregation,
loss consolidation or drying out of the consistent materials and placing in the
forms shall be completed before the initial set takes place. Concrete shall not
be dropped through a height greater than 2m. Chutes and pumps may be
used provided they shall be so arranged as to avoid segregation.
All equipment for the transporting and placing of concrete shall be constantly
cleaned and kept free of all coatings of hardened concrete or other
obstructions.
Concreting of any unit or section of the work shall be carried out in one
continuous operation and no interruption of the concrete will be allowed
without the approval of the Project Manager.

In no case shall more than 20 minutes elapse between mixing and placing of
any concrete in its final position.
4.16 Ready Mix Concrete

The term “Ready Mix” concrete is applied in cases where concrete is
obtained from a firm which specializes in the manufacture of concrete in bulk
at a central plant whence it is transported to the site in transit mixers which
keep it agitated until it is delivered. This term also applied to concrete in
which the aggregate and cement are batched dry at a central plant and fed
into the drum of a mixer mounted on a lorry in which it is transported to the
site. Water is carried in a special container and is measured and fed into the
drum and wet mixing started, either during the journey or when the mixer lorry
reaches the site.
This type of concrete will only be allowed on the specific instructions of the
Project Manager who will require a certificate with every batch of concrete
delivered giving the actual weights of aggregate, cement and water used so
that a guarantee is provided that the concrete is in accordance with the
Specifications.
4.17 Compaction of Concrete

After concrete has been placed in the forms it shall be compacted with
approved tools and in such a manner as to produce a dense homogenous
mass, free from segregation honeycombs and entrained air, filling all spaces
between and around forms and reinforcement without voids of any kinds.
Where vibrators are used they shall be of the immersion type, approved by
the Project Manager and have a frequency of not less than 5000 hertz (HZ).
Vibrators shall not be attached to or allowed to come into contact with
reinforcement or used in such a manner as to damage concrete in other parts
of the structure, which has taken its initial set. Care is also to be taken so that
concrete is not over vibrated or compacted and segregation taken place.
Partially set concrete shall not be disturbed in any way and the Contractor
shall ensure that it is not subjected to unnecessary loads, shocks or
vibrations from adjacent plant or vibrators in the vicinity nor allow his
workmen to walk on it or disturb it in any other way.
4.18 Construction Joints

Construction joints shall be made where shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Project Manager, but in either case they shall be so arranged
that their number is kept to the minimum.
Construction joints shall be formed at right angles to the axis of the member
concerned by the insertion of rigid stopping off forms.
Construction joints in slabs shall be vertical and in general, parallel to the

main reinforcement, but, when required at right angles to the main
reinforcement they shall be constructed in the middle of the span.
The upper surface of lifts of concrete in walls and columns shall be horizontal
and in the case of exposed finished work shall be so constructed so that they
cannot be seen.

Lifts in walls and columns shall not exceed a height of 1m unless approved
otherwise by the Project Manager.
Forms at construction joints shall be so made that they shall produce within
the thickness of the joint a suitably grooved or keyed surface to act as a bond
for the subsequent concrete.
As soon as the concrete is sufficiently set stop boards shall be removed and
the face hacked and wire brushed to form a key and washed. Before placing
of the adjacent concrete the surface of the joint is to be coated with a neat
cement grout and left ready to receive the new adjacent concrete which is to
be tightly packed up against its face.
Construction joints shall be located so as not to impair the strength of the

concrete. The position of construction joints and the size of the formwork
panels shall be so co-ordinated that where possible the line of any
construction joint coincides with the line of a formwork joint and that in any
case all construction joint lines and formwork joint lines appear as a regular
and uniform series. For all exposed horizontal joints and purposely inclined
joints, a uniform joint shall be formed with a batten of approved dimensions to
give a straight and neat joint line. Concrete placed to form the face of a
construction joint shall have all laitance removed and the large aggregate
exposed prior to the placing of fresh concrete. The laitance shall wherever
practicable be removed when the concrete has set but not hardened by
spraying the concrete surface with water under pressure or brushing with a
wire brush sufficient to remove the outer mortar skin and expose the large
aggregate without disturbing it. Where the laitance cannot be removed due
to hardening of the concrete, the whole of the concrete surface forming the
joint shall be treated by high pressure water j et, sand blasting, use of a
needle gun or a scaling hammer to remove the surface laitance.
The other alternative but effective method is:

• Apply retarder by brush on the concrete surface and wash it by water
jet. The laitance at top does not get set and is easily removed by
washing. Before concreting is resumed, all loose matter on the
existing concrete surface shall be removed by compressed air and
the surface slightly wetted, but excess water removed by soaking or
air jet (Never spray cement slurry).
Concrete shall not be allowed to run to a feather-edge and any vertical joints
shall be formed against a stop-end. If a kicker or stub-end is used it shall be
at least 70 mm high. Removal of laitance from vertical face, wetting etc. shall
be same as for horizontal joint as explained above. No concreting shall be
started until the positions and form of the construction joints (both horizontal
&vertical) are inspected and found in order.
4.19 Movement /Expansion Joints

Movement joints are defined as all joints intended to accommodate relative
movement between adjoining parts of a structure, special provision being
made where necessary for maintaining the water tightness of the joint. The
contractor shall pay due regard to the instructions of manufacturers of
proprietary jointing materials and shall, if required by the Engineer,
demonstrate that the jointing materials can be applied satisfactorily.

Fig: Expansion joint in concrete
As far as possible, jointing of waterstops on Site shall be confined to the

making of butt joints in straight runs. Where it is necessary for an intersection,
or change of direction, or any joint other than a butt joint in a straight run, to
be made on Site, a preliminary joint, intersection or change of direction piece
shall be made and submitted to such tests as the Engineer may require.
Flexible waterstops shall be fully supported in the formwork, free of nails and
clear of reinforcement and other fixtures. Any waterstops which after
installation is found to be damaged shall be removed and replaced.
Concreting in the vicinity of waterstops shall be carried out with care to
ensure that the waterstops do not bend or distort while the concrete is being
placed and compacted in position. The surface of set concrete in a
movement joint shall, where specified on the drawing, be painted two coats of
bituminous paint and new concrete shall be placed against it only when the
paint is dry. Expansion joints shall be formed by a separating strip of
approved preformed joint filler.
Caulking grooves shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. At all joints

where a caulking groove is formed, the groove shall be wire brushed and
loose material removed and blown out by compressed air immediately prior to
caulking. After the groove has dried, it shall be primed and caulked with
approved jointing compound. At all caulked joints, the face of the caulking
strip and 50 mm width of concrete on either side shall be painted with two
coats of paint having the same base as the caulking compound.
4.20 Protection of Concrete

Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from the sun, drying winds and
rain until it has properly set and shall be kept damp with hessian, sand,
polythene or other waterproof sheeting for not less than seven days after
laying. In the case of rapid hardening cements being employed this shall be
reduced to three days.
Concrete which has not been properly protected and is damaged or

adversely affected in any way whatsoever shall be carefully cut out and
replaced at the Contractor’s own expense.
4.21 Concrete Surface Finishes

The surface of all concrete foundation beds shall be finished to a level even
surface to receive the walling.
The upper surface of floors, roofs, landings etc. shall either be trowelled
smooth or where they are to be covered with screeds for other finishes shall
be floated while onset to a smooth even finish free of all projection and
irregularities either level or to falls as shown on the drawings.
The trowelling and floating shall be done in such a manner that the surface is
free of laitance or cement slurry. After the removal of formwork, all surfaces in

contact with same shall be drenched with water, and carefully rubbed down
with a carborundum block to remove fins and other irregularities. Any
honeycombing or other damaged surface shall be carefully filled up with neat
cement slurry and rubbed down to finish flush with the surrounding work.
Such work shall be prevented from drying too rapidly by the use of damp
sacking or similar means to ensure a good key between the concrete and the
grout.
When the concrete surfaces are to be left exposed, the required surface finish
shall be specifically stated in either the Particular Specification or the Bills of
Quantities.
No rubbing down, repairing of patching of concrete shall be carried out until

the surfaces have been inspected by the Project Manager.
4.22 Fair Face and Fine Face Finishes of Concrete

When exposed concrete is required to have a “Fair Faced Finish” it means
that it is to be finished to a perfectly plane smooth surface free from all
blemishes, irregularities, honeycombing, joint or grain marks.
The manner of obtaining this type of finish will be left to the discretion of the
Contractor but the Project Manager reserves the right to instruct the
Contractor to adopt an alternative method where he thinks the method in use
is unsatisfactory.
Where “Fine Face” concrete finish is specified, the exposed surfaces where
produced by formwork shall have all fins and other small protuberances
rubbed down but no pittances nor large fins or other protuberances will be
allowed. The face of the concrete shall be finished perfectly smooth and
even.
4.23 Form HoleChases

Form all holes, pockets, chases, etc. required for services and other fittings
as indicated on the drawings or otherwise by the use of liners, sleeves,
cardboard tubes, temporary boxings and timber fillets attached to the
framework.
Holes and chases shall not be cut in structural concrete after it has set except
on the specific instructions of the Project Manager.
4.24 Steel Reinforcement

Steel reinforcement shall conform to BS 4449, BS 4492 or BS 4483.
Mild steel reinforcement shall consist of plain round mild steel rods as
specified in BS 6722.
Twisted mild steel reinforcement shall be cold twisted mild steel

reinforcement as specified in BS 449.
Fabric reinforcement shall be hard drawn steel fabric reinforcement in

accordance with BS4483:2005 “Steel fabric for the reinforcement of
concrete”. The Stock size of standard meshes is 4.8m x 2.4m.
If a unit is larger than a stock sheet, then lapping will be necessary. Lapping
requirements for two sheets of mesh is covered by BS8110 cl 3.12.8.5. If the

lap occurs at the middle of a panel, then the minimum lap length for an ‘A’
mesh must include 4 welded cross wires. This infers a minimum lap length of
(3 @ 200 + 100) = 700mm. Care should be taken at laps since the overall
space required for several sheets could become excessive. If the quantity
merits it, consideration should be given to special sheets, (see below for
detailing rules.)
An alternative to lapping sheets of mesh may be to ‘lap’ using loose bars. In

this case the lap length will be determined by the standard ‘rules’ based on
bar diameters.
The normal edge detail for ‘A’ mesh sheets is as shown left. If the sheet is
cut then the overhang may be even higher, up to nearly 200mm. In these
cases, if this occurs at a face of the concrete, a loose edge-trimming bar
should be added to the end of the cross wires with (typically) 50mm
cover. The diameter of this trimming bar should be as the adjacent wire.
All steel reinforcement shall be of approved manufacture and shall be free

from loose rust, mill scale, oil and grease or any other material which may
impair the proper adhesion of the reinforcement and the concrete or cause
corrosion of the reinforcement and subsequent disintegration of the concrete
cover. If directed by the Project Manager, all the reinforcement shall be wire
brushed to remove such imperfections before concrete is poured around it.
The Contractor shall produce Certificates of Manufacture indicating that the

material complies with the requirement of the appropriate B.S. or UNBS
standards for the inspection of the Project Manager. Random samples from
any consignment may be taken for testing at the Central Materials Laboratory
of the Ministry responsible for Works and any material found to be brittle,
cracked or unsatisfactory in any way whatsoever shall be rejected and
removed from the site at once.
Reinforcement shall be stored on site in level tiers raised above the ground.
4.25 Bending Reinforcement

All steel reinforcement shall be bent cold and shaped as shown on the
drawings before placing in position and shall comply with the bending
dimensions and tolerance laid down in BS 8666 or BS 4466
An approved former shall be used to produce gradual and even bending and
no steel shall, once, bent, be straightened and rebent.

Bends made whilst the reinforcement is hot or welding either by gas or

electricity shall not be carried out without the prior approval of the Project
Manager.
4.26 Spacing of RC bars

The spacing of bars, amount of reinforcement and the type of fabric, mesh
size, disposition, etc. shall be in accordance with the drawings and bending
schedules.
4.27 Fixing and Assembly of Reinforcement

All reinforcement shall be accurately placed, fixed and maintained in the
positions shown on the drawings. Intersecting bars shall be securely wired
together with No. 16 gauge (1.626 mm) soft iron tying wired with the ends
twisted and turned into the body of the concrete. Binders, links and the like
shall make close contact with main reinforcement and shall be securely wired
to same.
When reinforcement is placed in horizontal of sloping layers whether in

beams, slabs or staircases, etc., the distance between each layer shall be
carefully maintained by the insertion of sufficient spacer bars to prevent either
movement or sagging of the main reinforcement in each layer.
4.28 Cover to Concrete

The concrete cover to all reinforcement shall be carefully maintained as
shown on the drawings and bending schedules within a tolerance of 3 mm
under or over.
Cover to underside of soffits may be obtained by the use of accurately made

cement mortar blocks.
4.29 Inspection of Reinforcement

No concrete shall be poured until the Project Manager has inspected and
approved the reinforcement.
All reinforcement shall be properly fixed in position and every precaution shall
be taken to ensure that no movement takes place whilst the concrete is being
poured and compacted and that it is properly surrounded by concrete.
Any rods which have worked loose during fixing shall be securely retied and
any small pieces of rood or fabric shall be removed from the forms before
pouring is commenced.
4.30 Formwork
The term formwork shall include for any material or mould required for
forming the concrete into the desired shape and upholding it until it is set,
together with all necessary temporary supports, stagings, bolts, nuts,
wedges, clamps, and other fixing, all cutting and waste and the cost of all
labour and material in the construction, erection and removal of such
formwork.
Formwork shall be of timber or other approved material and shall be of such

strength as will ensure complete rigidity throughout the placing, compaction,
vibration and setting of the concrete and so designed and constructed that it

can be easily removed without shock, vibration or damage to the finished

concrete.
All joints in forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of grout and in
timber forms, unless otherwise specified, they shall be tongued and grooved.
Timber boards for formwork shall be seasoned to 20% moisture content and
shall be in widths not exceeding 150 mm or narrower if the Project Manager
so directs.
The use of internal ties shall be avoided as far as possible, but, if used they
shall be reduced to the minimum, of metal and capable of easy removal
without damage to the face of the concrete. No part of any metal tie or spacer
remaining permanently embedded in the concrete shall be nearer the finished
surface of the concrete than the thickness of the general cover dimension as
shown on the drawings.
When vibrators are used, special care shall be taken to see that all bolts,
wedges, clamps, etc. are kept tight so that no distortion of the forms takes
place.
4.31 Formwork Non-Exposed Concrete

When the surface of the concrete is to be covered with some other finishing
material, the forms may be constructed of plain, but jointed sawn timber,
unless otherwise instructed by the Project Manager. The boards shall be
sufficiently thick to withstand the loading of the concreting operations without
deflection so that the finished surface cover specified is maintained.
4.32 Formwork for Exposed Concrete

When a particular type of finish is required to be produced by formwork on
exposed concrete surfaces this will be fully described in the Particular
Specifications orBills of Quantities, and the material to be used to achieve it
will be specified, i.e. plywood, hardboard, hessian, polythene paper, strips,
panels, etc.
When wrot formwork is required the boards shall be tongued and grooved
and wrot and free from all cracks and irregularities on the face in contact with
the concrete.
4.33 Preparation of Formwork before Concreting

Unless otherwise directed the inside faces of all formwork shall be coated
with lime wash or anapproved non-retarding mould oil. Care shall be taken to
keep reinforcement free of any coating material.
Temporary windows shall be cut in the sides of vertical surfaces of forms to

ensure that concrete is not poured from a height exceeding 1.5 m.
Forms shall be thoroughly scraped and cleaned down between each and
before subsequent uses.
Prior to depositing concrete, the forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and freed
from all sawdust shavings, mud, dust or other debris by hosing with clean
water and draining through temporary openings left for this purpose.

4.34 Approval of Formwork

All formwork shall be inspected and approved by the Project Manager before
pouring of concrete Forms is commenced, but such approval will not relieve
the contractor of his overall responsibility for the safety and efficiency of the
works. Details of special forms and systems of formwork i.e. self lifting or
sliding forms etc. shall be submitted to the Project Manager for his approval
before they are put into use.
4.35 Removal of Formwork

The removal or striking of formwork shall be carried out in such a manner that
the concrete will not be subjected to sudden shock or injury, nor shall it be
removed before the concrete is sufficiently set hardened.
The minimum time shall elapse between placing and compaction of the
concrete and the removal of the formwork for various parts of the structure is
indicated in the following table:-
Table 4.34.1: Minimum Times for Removing Formwork
Location Removal of Forms Only Removal of Props

Side of beams, Walls and
4 days -
columns
Soffit of Main Slabs 12 days 28 days
Soffit of Secondary Slabs 6 days 24 days
Soffit of Beams 12 days 28 days
The foregoing figures are given as a guide for normal cement concrete for
average conditions of setting and hardening. For vibrated concrete or
extreme climatic conditions or for special surface finishes the above times
may be varied on the instructions of the Project Manager.
Compliance with the requirements of the foregoing shall not relieve the
Contractor of his obligations and overall responsibility. Should the removal of
the formwork be found to have been carried out prematurely, any damage
caused thereby shall be made good entirely at the contractor’s own expense.
4.36. Composite Concrete/HollowClay Block Structures

Composite concrete/hollow clay block construction when specified for floors
and roofs shall consist of 305 x 305 mm hollow clay filler blocks placed end to
end in rows on formwork as described with an in-situ reinforced concrete rib
between each row and a concrete topping or cover over the blocks. The
overall thickness of the composite slab, thickness of the filler blocks and the
width of the ribs and details of reinforcement and concrete mixes in the ribs
and topping will be described in the Particular specification or bills of
Quantities.
All hollow clay filler blocks shall be well burnt, of even colour, uniform density
free from cracks, distortion and conforming in every respect with the
requirements of BS 3921 Part 2.
The hollow clay blocks shall be laid end to end in rows, care being taken that
the joints are close and that the specified width between rows is
maintained.Ends of rows of blocks shall be plugged with a stiff mixture of
cement and sand 1:3 before the inset concrete is placed.

The ribs and transverse reinforcement as specified is then to be fixed in

position, care being taken to ensure that the filler blocks in each row are not
displaced.
Concrete as specified is to be placed in the ribs and topping and compacted

as described, care again being taken to see that the reinforcement and filler
blocks are not displaced. The topping is to be leveled and smoothed over to
receive the finish as specified and carefully covered up and protected as
before described for solid reinforced concrete slabs.
Before the placing of the concrete ribs and topping is commenced the spaces
between the rows of blocks shall be thoroughly cleaned of any rubbish and
the clay blocks and formwork sprayed with clean water.
The contractor shall provide this construction only to the extent indicated on
the drawings, any other areas from where this work stops up to the outer
edges of the construction being made out with thickness equal to the
thickness of the composite slab.
The minimum time for removal of formwork given in Table 6 will apply for this
type of construction.
4.37 “Freespan” and “Maxspan” Suspended Structures

The burnt clay beam, rib and filler tiles for “Free span” and “Maxspan”
construction or their equivalent shall, be by approved manufacturers.
“Freespan” is a system of clay blocks, concrete and reinforcement assembled

into precast beams whilst “Maxspan” uses a system of clay ribs, and
reinforcement assembled into precast ribs with hollow filler blocks between
and inset concrete rib filling and topping.
All clay blocks shall be as previously specified and any which are cracked,
chipped, broken or distorted shall be rejected.
Concrete for filling beams, ribs and topping is to be Mix “C” 12 mm aggregate
as described.
Steel reinforcement shall be as previously specified bent or hooked at ends

required and accurately and securely positioned in the units.
All units shall bear on perimeter walls or supports a minimum of 115 mm.
The units shall be assembled for precasting on an even, clean concrete bed
or timber form provided with a camber of approximately 1/300 of the span.
The precasting of beams and ribs is to be carried out under cover. The units
shall be kept covered with wet hessian or other approved means and left to
cure for a minimum period of 14 days during which time the hessian etc. shall
be kept wet.
When the units are cured and ready for handling they shall be carefully
removed from the place where they were cast without undue shock or jarring
and transported and hoisted into position where required. Each unit must be
handled at each end to ensure that cracking does not take place. When fixed
in position the joints between adjacent beams shall not exceed 3 mm.

After placing in position, the ends of all hollow blocks and beams shall be
sealed with a stiff mixture of cement and sand (1:3).
Carefully cover up and protect the finished surfaces of all “Freespan” and
Maxspan” slabs as previously described for concrete work.
4.38 “Freespan” Units or Beams
The “Freespan” burnt clay blocks 305 mm wide and 30mm long shall be
closely assembled end to end in straight lines on the casting bed to form
beams of the required length. The required amount of reinforcement is then
placed in the channel, after which the blocks are soaked thoroughly with
water and filled with concrete, properly compacted as described.
After curing as before described the units shall be hoisted and fixed in
position side by side, the recessed side joints flushed up with cement and
sand (1:3) and the whole covered with a layer of fine concrete or cement and
sand (1:3) not less than 20 mm thick or as otherwise specified, finished to a
level even surface.
4.39 “Maxspan” Precast Rib and Filler Block Structures

The “Maxspan” clay rib channel blocks either 75 or 100 mm wide as specified
shall be assembled to form rib units as described for “Freespan” beams.
The rib channels are then thoroughly soaked with clean water and four 6 mm
diameter mild steel rods inserted into the prepared grooves in the blocks and
grouted in place with a stiff mixture of cement and sand (1:3). These units
can be precast one on top of the other up to a maximum of 10 in height.
After curing the ribs shall be hoisted and described of the diameters shown in
the fixed in position at the appropriate centers following table:-and propped
on the underside every 2 m. The hollow filler blocks of the specified size shall
be laid end to end between the rib units.
Reinforcement of the specified size is then laid in the rib channel and the
transverse distribution reinforcement placed in the topping. The whole of the
ribs and filler blocks shall be thoroughly soaked with clean water and the ribs
and topping filled up to the specified thickness with well compacted concrete
Mix “C” 12 mm aggregate all as previously described. Finish surface level
and even ready to receive screeds.
4.40 Concrete Lintels

Concrete in lintels to be (1:2:4) as previously described, well tamped around
reinforcing rods. The reinforcement and sizes of lintels shall be in accordance
with drawings for standard Lintels, copies of which can be obtained from the
Project Manager unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager.
Lintels may be cast in-situ or precast. When cast in-situ the general concrete
specifications already described shall apply except that the lintel may be built
upon after 7 days providing the soffit boards and propping are not removed.
Precast lintels shall be cast in accordance with the clauses governing precast
concrete as later described but they shall not be built on for a minimum of 14
days after casting or such other longer period as the Project Manager may
direct.

Provide to all buildings where shown on the drawings as an in-situ concrete

(1:2:3) ring beam 225 mm deep for the full thickness of the wall, cast in
alternate 6 m lengths, with suitable construction joints and reinforced with 4
No. 12 mm diameter twisted steel reinforcing rods with 6 mm diameter
stirrups at 300 mm centers.
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or other Contract Documents,
lintels shall be of the depths and bearings and reinforced with round mild
steel reinforcement as described of the diameters shown in the following
table:-

Table 4.39.1 – Concrete Lintels for Normal Spans and Loading
Diameter of Reinforcement
Clear span Bearing Each End
Depth (mm) in mm per 115 m thickness
(mm) (mm)
of wall
up to 610 115 100 1
610 to 1000 115 150 10
1000 to 1300 115 150 10
1300 to 1600 230 230 12
1600 to 1900 230 230 12
1900 to 2500 230 230 12
2200 to 2500 230 230 16
250 onwards As indicated on drawings
All reinforcement in lintelsshall be embedded in the concrete to have not

more than 40 mm cover on the soffit, and ends of bars shall be hooked.
Where shown cills shall be of rebated, splayed and throated precast concrete
to the sizes required and having an outer projection of not less than 40 mm
from the finished wall face. They shall be cast in suitable moulds and finished
fine on all exposed faces, free from all cracks, crazing, chipped or broken
arises, discolouration or other defects.
Reinforcement shall be provided where necessary for handling with a 25 mm

minimum cover.
Cills over 1.4 m Long shall be divided into even sections, and butt jointed with
joints not more that 1/8’ thick grouted up with cement mortar and neatly flush
pointed.
Clean cut throatings 12 mm deep shall be formed 25 mm back from the

finished outer edge of the cill.
Stoolings not less than 50 mm wide shall be formed on cills required to be

built in.
Cills to take metal windows shall have holes for fixing lugs formed during
casting to the required size, depth and positions.
All concrete not plastered shall be finished fair face unless otherwise stated.
Unless otherwise state precast concrete ventilators to be 300 mm or 225 mm
wide x 225 mm x 40 mm thick of approved pattern. The ventilators shall be
fixed double, one fixed flush with outer face of wall and having approved
copper mosquito gauze cut to size and fixed by tucking over top and bottom
edges of ventilator before building in, the other ventilator fixed flush with inner
face of wall and include for rendering around sides, top and bottom of
ventilator opening in cement and sand (1:4).
All concrete floors shall be in concrete (1:3:6) and have a minimum thickness
of 100 mm unless otherwise shown on drawings.
Entrance steps as required to suit ground and floor levels shall be formed in
concrete (1:3:6), with suitable foundations under as directed by the Project
Manager. Treads shall be not less than 300 mm wide and risers not more
than 175 mm high. All exposed surfaces shall be finished in cement and sand
(1:4) trowel led smooth with a wood float 20 mm thick on treads and 12 mm
thick on risers or finished with carborundum dust.

All suspended precast or in situ concrete shelves, pot slabs, etc., shall be
reinforced with B.R.C. Weld mesh No. 28 or 210 as ordered by the Project
Manager or other equal and approved fabric reinforcement. Where required
these shall be size 600 mm x 600 mm x 50 mm thick of vibrated (1:2:4)
concrete finished on top with a wood float, clean cut edges and free from all
cracks, chips or broken corners. The slabs shall be laid on a 75 mm
consolidated bed of sand or stone dust, laid to falls where necessary and
jointed and pointed in cement mortar (1:4). The jointing mortar to be worked
well down into the joints and the pointing to be key drawn and all excess
mortar cleaned off.
4.40 Precast Concrete

All precast concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with the
instructions of the Project Manager and as recommended by the Code of
Practice BS 8110 except that, where the Code differs with these
specifications, thesespecifications shall take precedence.
The concrete and reinforcement shall be as described elsewhere or as

indicated on the drawings.
The moulds for precast work shall be of stout timber or steel, strong, properly
made true to shape to produce the sections shown on the drawings, finished
perfectly true, without twist or deformation of any kind and having clean sharp
arises, grooves, sinkings, etc., as required.
When concrete is specified as with “Fair Face Finish” the moulds shall be
lined with a smooth surface free from all blemishes, irregularities,
honeycombing, joint or gain marks.
Where the concrete is described as “Finished Fine” the mouldsshall be made

of metal or are to have linings which will produce a smooth dense fine face to
the finished concrete free from all shutter marks, protuberances and pittances
and suitable to receive a painted surface direct.
Concrete shall be thoroughly tamped in thee moulds and if required by the

Project Manager shall be vibrated as described.
The precasting shall be carried out under an approved shade and shall
remain under same for a minimum period of seven days after which the
moulds may be removed and the units stored under shade for a further seven
days.
After this the units may be stacked in the open for not less than seven days
before fixing. Unless otherwise described, faces shall be left rough from the
sawn moulds.
For the whole of the period from casting of the units until the time they are put
into use they shall be covered with sacking or approved material which is to
be kept wet constantly.
All units shall be cast in convenient lengths for handling and the contractor
shall provide all necessary handling reinforcement whether specifically shown
on the drawings or not.
4.41 Concrete Apron

To all houses of Category D and above and where directed by the Project

Manager, the contractor shall provide a 50 mm C 15 concrete apron, 1 m

wide around the perimeter of the building, laid on a 100 mm bed of hardcore.
4.42 Attendance
Particular care shall be exercised by the contractor to ensure that all pipes,
ducts, drains, conduit, junction boxes, anti-static installations, etc are laid
before the concrete for the floor and roof slabs is poured, and the Contractor
will be held responsible for the cost of any additional cutting etc. and making
good which becomes necessary through his failure to make proper
arrangements for all sub-contractors work to be done in close cooperation
with his own.

5.0 WALLING
5.1 General Requirements
5.1.1 Cement
The cement used shall be as described in “Concrete Work”.
5.1.2 Lime
The lime shall be best quality hydrated lime from an approved source and
shall conform to BS EN 459-1:2001 or the equivalent UNBS Standard.
5.1.3 Sand
Sand for mortars shall be as described in “Concrete Works” except that it
shall be fine sand.
5.1.4 Mortars
The cement mortar shall consist of one part of cement to four parts of sand
by volume (1:4). The sand shall be measured in specifically prepared gauge
boxes and thoroughly mixed in an approved mechanical mixer or mixed dry
on clean and approved mixing platforms, with water added afterwards until all
parts are completely incorporated and brought to a proper consistency. The
use of retempering of wholly or partially set mortar will not be allowed.
The gauged mortar shall consist of one part of cement to two parts of lime to
nine parts of sand by volume (1: 2: 9).
In the case of gauged mortar, the sand and lime shall first be mixed into a
coarse mix before addition of cement. All mortar is to be thoroughly mixed to
a uniform consistency with only sufficient water to obtain a plastic condition
suitable for toweling. No mortar that has commenced to set is to be used or
knocked up again for reuse.
5.1.5 Protection
All walling shall be properly protected while the mortar is setting as the
Project Manager shall direct.
5.1.6. Setting Out

The Contractor shall provide proper setting out rods and set out on the same
all work showing opening, heights, cills and lintels and shall build the various
walls and piers to the thickness, widths and heights shown upon the
drawings. No part of the walling shall be carried up more than 900 mm higher
at one time than any other part and in such cases the joining shall be made in
long stops so as to prevent cracks arising and all walls shall be leveled round
at each floor and roof level.

5.2 Brick Walling
5.2.1 Bricks
Bricks shall be kiln burnt bricks from a local source, and samples shall be
submitted for the Project Manager’s approval. Bricks are to comply with BS
EN 772 and BS 6750 as regards size and tolerances, and shall be of good
shape, well burnt, of even colour, free from flaws, stones and unburnt lumps
and are to emit a clear ringing sound when struck one another. Brittle or
badly burnt bricks must not be used and broken bricks or bats may only be
used where required for bond. No brick shall absorb more than 20% of its dry
weight during 24 hours immersion in water.
Load bearing brickwork shall be constructed in solid bricks and internal non-
lead bearing walls where specified may be built in bricks having perforations.
Clay bricks for load-bearing construction shall be as manufactured by

Uganda Clays limited or any other approved source. The properties of the
bricks shall be as shown in Table 5.2.1.1
Bricks may also be used in non-load bearing construction as facing or in-fill

walling. The various classes of bricks are: -
(a) Non-facing plastered (NFP);

(b) Facing brick standard (FBS);
(c) Facing bricks aesthetic (FBA); and
(d) Engineering brick (EB)
Table 5.2.1.1: Physical Properties of Bricks
Class of Crushing Strength Average Weight

Water Absorption
Brick (N/mm2) (kg)
NFP 10 10 2.75
FBS 20 6.3 2.75
FBA 22 7.5 2.75
EB 25 7.9 3.00
5.2.2 Facing Bricks

The facing bricks unless otherwise described shall be bricks specially
selected from the common stack for evenness of size shape and colour.
Care is to be taken when selecting and stacking facing bricks to see that all
bricks with chipped or damaged faces or arises are rejected.
Facing bricks shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer and conform

with BS EN 772 and samples shall be submitted for the Project Manager’s
approval. Purpose made corner blocks and half blocks shall be used as
necessary at angles etc., and for purposes of bond.

5.2.3 Concrete Blocks

Concrete blocks shall be machine made, solid or hollow as specified, and
comply with BS 6073, work other than internal non-load bearing partitions
which may be of blocks in accordance with Type C.
Blocks shall be made with naturally occurring aggregates complying with BS

EN 1260 with a binder as listed in BS 4887 except that lime as a sole bind
agent will not be allowed.
The density of Type ‘A’ blocks shall be not less than 1500 kg/m3 and the
density of type C may be less than this providing it meets the due
requirements regarding strength.
The choice of a suitable mix to produce blocks of the required properties will
be left to the discretion of the Contractor but all blocks shall have
compressive strengths in accordance with the following Table:-
Table 5.2.3.1: Minimum Compressive Strength of Concrete Blocks
Minimum Compressive Strength

Block Average of 10 Blocks Individual Block
N/mm2 N/mm2
1 3.5 2.8
2 2.8 2.2
As a guide a mix consisting of one part cement, two parts of fine aggregate
grade 9mm down but free of fines and dust and seven parts of coarse sand
by volume (1:2:7) will produce a block of the required strength but this must
not be regarded as infallible and the contractor will be entirely responsible for
finding the most suitable mix consistent with the available aggregates which
will produce blocks of the requisite properties and strengths.
If suitable materials are not obtainable locally the Contractor shall obtain
them from such other sources as he carried out under shelter and after
casting the blocks shall be stacked under shelter to protect them from sun
and adverse weather. The blocks shall be properly cured by covering them
with sand or sacks and spraying daily for not less than 14 days.
All blocks must be left with good sharp edges. The standard face size of
blocks for use in the Works shall be 450 x 225 mm and these size blocks
shall be used wherever, practicable. Proper bonding shall be formed at
corners, round openings, cills, lintels, beams, etc., and similar positions and
the Contractor must make or cut blocks to all varying sizes required for these
purposes.
Should the Contractor obtain blocks from local manufacturers or suppliers he

shall be responsible for ensuring that the blocks are of such quality as to
meet the above loading requirements.
5.2.4 Fair-faced Blocks

Concrete blocks for fair faced walls shall have a perfectly smooth exposed
face free of all honeycombing, blemish or other irregularity.

5.2.5 Stone
Stone shall be obtained from a local source and samples shall be submitted
for the Project Manager's approval.
It is to be free from cracks, fissures, sand and clay holes and is to be dressed
to shape on the beds and faces as described in the Particular Specification or
as indicated on the Drawings.
5.2.6 Bond and Joints
All brickwork shall be built in English bond expect that half brick walls shall be
built in Stretcher bond.
All block work shall be properly bonded together and in such a manner that
no vertical joint in anyone course shall be within 225 mm of a similar joint in
the courses immediately above and below. Alternate courses of walling at all
angles and intersections shall be carried through the full thickness of the
adjoining walls.
All prepends, reveals, quoins and other angles of the walls shall be built
strictly true and square.
5.2.7 Cleaning Facework

All bricks and blocks shall be well wetted before use and tops of walls where
left off shall be well wetted before commencing building. All joints shall be
flushed up and grouted in solid as the work proceeds.
5.2.8 Plaster Key

Joints shall not exceed 9 mm or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
All faced brickwork and block work is to be kept clean and free of all mortar
droppings, splashes, smears, stains etc.
Include for hacking and raking out joints of all walls as required to receive
plaster, screeds, or other finishes.
5.2.9 Ant and Damp Proof Courses
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings the ant proof course shall consist
of a bed of cement and sand composed of one part cement to three parts
(1:3) by volume and not less than 30 mm thickness laid over the whole area
of walls and piers, finished to a smooth level surface with the edges pointed
flush with the faces of the walls. Before laying the ant proof course the top of
all walls shall be cleaned and well wetted, and after it is laid it shall be
carefully protected until firm and covered with damp soaking.
When the ant proof course is hard it shall be covered with a damp proof
course of Hessian based bituminous felt in accordance with BS 743 Part 2
unless otherwise described in the Particular Specification or Bills of
Quantities.
Before laying the damp proof course the ant proof course shall be cleaned
and brushed and any projections in the surface leveled off. The damp proof
course shall then be laid and bedded on a thin bed of cement mortar and

neatly pointed on the exposed edges. Joints in the running length shall be
made in the damp proof course by horizontal laps of not less than 225mm
and at intersections of walls the lap shall be equal to thickness of the
interacting wall or partition.
Damp proof course as described shall be laid under all internal walls where
these are built off the ground floor slab.
5.2.10 Provisions, Allocations for other works

The Contractor shall:
a) Do all necessary cutting and bonding up to other work and perform all
rough and fair cutting required. Leave or form all chases for edges of
concrete floors, roofs, staircases, landings, etc., and provide chases for
pipes conduit and the like and make good.
b) Rake out joint or form grooves for flashings, turn-ups etc., and the like as
required and point in cement mortar as described.
Where shown on the drawing, all walls shall be carried up to the underside of
the roof sheets and shall be splayed out on top edge to suit roof slope and
the corrugations or tiling flushed up solid in gauged mortar as described.
Level all wall plates, bed in gauged mortar and secure with 25 mm x 16
S.W.G. (1.63mm) galvanized hoop iron straps 900 mm long and 1250 mm
apart bedded in walls and bent around, drilled and spiked to plates.
Build in or cut and pin in cement mortar ends of cills, thresholds steps lintels
and the like and make good.
Leave or form holes for all pipes, conduit and services and make good.
Sills shall be bedded in cement mortar and jambs and heads bedded in
gauged mortar and pointed in cement mortar unless otherwise described or
Concrete lintels shall be provided with suitable plugs for the fixing of heads of
wood frames.
Flues shall be formed as shown on the drawings and parged with gauged
mortar not less than 20 mm thick and core on completion.
Rough render in gauged mortar not less than 12 mm thick to the faces of all
flues where passing through timber roof or floor spaces or where passing less
than 150 mm from the face of any timbers.
Carefully fill up all putlog holes as scaffolding is dismantled and where

required face up to match adjoining work.
Cut away for and attend upon as required and make good after all trades.
Screeds shall be brushed with a stiff bass broom to remove any surface dust
or debris before felt laying commences.

6. ROOFING
6.1 General
Roofing sheets shall generally be fixed in accordance with BS EN 501 except
where the contract drawings or documents expressly override or modify this
specification.
6.2 Steel Sheet

The galvanized corrugated steel roof sheets shall be generally in accordance
with BS 3083 having a steel sheet not less than 0.559 mm (24 S.W.G) thick
with a coating of zinc on both sides with a total weight of not less than 610
and not more than 763 grammas per square meter of steel surface area.
Sheets shall be laid with 150 mm end laps and side laps of one and half
corrugations on the side away from the prevailing wind otherwise lapping
shall be to the full extent indicated on the contract drawings or documents.
Laps shall be not less than 150 mm long.
When timber purling are employed sheets shall be securely fixed to same on
the crown of the corrugations at not less than 300 mm centers with 6 mm
diameter galvanized drive screws each not less than 62 mm long with head
and galvanized embossed curved washer under.
Sheets shall be fixed to steel purlins with 8 mm diameter galvanized mild

steel hook bolts of 50 mm longer in the shank than the depth of the steel
purling to which they are fixed each with nut and galvanized embossed
curved washer. The sheets shall be fixed at not less than 300 mm centers on
the crown of the corrugations.
Where sheets are required to be stitched together they shall be joined at not
less than 300 mm centers with 6 mm diameter and finished clean without
rags, burrs or damage to the surrounding zinc coating.
Ridges shall have a roll top and plain wings not less than 450 mm girth all in
galvanized steel sheet not less than 0.559 mm (24 S.W.G) thick and fixed in
similar manner to the sheeting.
At square abutments the last two corrugations of the corrugated iron sheets
next to walls shall be flattened and turned up against the wall and covered
with 24 S.W.G galvanised iron apron flashing.
Holes for bolts or screws shall be punched from the inside of the sheet and
shall be in the ridges of the corrugations as fixed and not in the holes.
Bat proofing shall be profiled fillers consisting of Polyethylene (PEL) or

Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer synthetic rubber (EPDM) material with
the following minimum requirements:-
• 25-50mm thick
• Density not less than 33Kgs/m3.
• Service temperature of -70 to +950C
• Water absorption of not more that 0.5% (28 days)
6.3 Aluminum Sheets

The aluminum corrugated roof sheets shall be in accordance with BS 6100 -

1.3.2 having a minimum thickness of 0.559 mm (24 S.W.G.)
The aluminum troughed roof sheets shall be in accordance with BS 6100 -

1.3.2 Type A or B as specified in the Contract Documents having a minimum
thickness of 0.9 mm ( 20 S.W.G.) and 1.2 mm ( 19 S.W.G.) respectively.
Sheets shall be lapped to the full extent indicated on the contract drawings or
documents.
Corrugated roof sheets shall be fixed to timber purlins and corrugated roof
sheets and troughed roofs sheets shall be fixed to steel purlins all as before
described for galvanized corrugated steel roof sheets unless otherwise
specified.
Troughed roof sheets shall be fixed to timber purlins on the crown of the
trough at not less than 300 m centers with 6 mm galvanized embossed
washer under to give not less than 50 mm penetration of the purlins to which
they are attached.
Sheets shall be stitched all as before described for galvanized corrugated

steel roof sheets.
All holes in sheets shall be neatly drilled or punched, of the required diameter
and finished clean without rages, burrs.
Ridges shall have a tool top and plain wings not less than 450 mm girth
having a minimum thickness of 0.71 m ( 22 S.W.G.) and fixed in a similar
manner to the iron sheeting. Laps shall be not less than 150 mm.
6.4 Roof Tiling

The roofing tiles shall be first quality local clay tiles of the type as specified in
the contract drawings and documents and shall be similar to those obtained
from a firm approved by the Project Manager.
All tiles shall be well and evenly burnt, uniform in shape, size and colour and
free from cracks, twists and other defects.
Samples shall be submitted to the Project Manager for his approval before
the work commences and all tiles used shall be of equal quality to the
approved sample.
Ridge and hip tiles shall be saddle back or half round tiles as indicated on the
contract drawings of similar quality and manufacture as the roofing tiles.
Tiles shall be carefully graded for size shape and colour upon delivery and
again before fixing.
All tiles shall be carefully stacked on edge in the site and rows of tiles shall be
separated with a layer of straw, elephant grass etc. between each to prevent
damage.
Any chipped, cracked or defective tiles shall not be used.
Nails, when required, shall be stout zinc nails not less than 36 mm long.
Mortar for bedding shall be gauged mortar as before described and if

required shall be tinted with an approved colouring compound to match the

tiling.
When required, tile battens shall be of sawn pressure impregnated structural

timber as described in Carpenter.

Tile battens shall be not less than 50 x 35 mm sectional area or as indicted

on the drawings and shall be accurately spaced at the specified gauge and
securely fixed at the intersection with each rafter with 75 mm stout round wire
nails.
All tiling is to be laid with the specified lap and when laid on battens the head
of each tile shall be securely double nailed to the battens in every alternate
course unless otherwise described.
An underlining of “Sisalkraft” orange label or other equal and approved

reinforced waterproof paper shall be provided under all tiling battens. The
paper shall be laid over the rafters with the length of the roll at right angles to
same. Laps at heads of adjacent sheets shall be laid over the rafters with the
length of the roll at right angles to same. Laps at heads of adjacent sheets
shall be not less than 75 mm and at the ends 300 mm . End laps shall be
made at a rafter. Sheets shall be lightly tacked in position to prevent
movement whilst tiling battens are being fixed.
Form all verges, eaves, valleys, hips etc. as described, do all cutting, replace
all broken or damaged tiles and leave all perfect and watertight on
completion.
6.5 Bituminous Felt Roofing

Roofing shall be of three layers of bituminous felt all of which must be of
Tropical Grade with a softening point temperature of not less than 1040 C,
and shall comply with BS 747 except where this is inconsistent with this
temperature requirement.
The three layers shall be of self finished Glass Fibre Felt weighing not less
than 18.1 kg/ 10 m 2.
Oxidized bitumen shall be used for bedding and bonding felt layers and shall
be applied hot and shall have a softening point temperature of not less than
104o C.
The first layer of felt shall be secured on all edges of the roof with hot bitumen
in strips 150 mm wide, the surfaces beneath these stripes being primed with
a cold cut-back bitumen. The main areas of the felt shall be spot stuck at
1800 mm intervals staggered and in very exposed situations this spacing
shall be reduced to 900 mm.
The upper layers shall be continuously bedded and bonded in hot bitumen
applied at the rate of 14.65 Kg/ 10 m2 and shall be laid with lapped joints at
all edges, side laps being not less than 50 mm and end laps not less than 75
mm wide, and each layer shall be laid breaking joint, the felt being laid in the
direction of the fall starting from the eaves.
The top layer where so described shall be surface dressed with light coloured
quartzite or marble mineral gauged 6 to 12 mm of rounded shape, samples of
which must be approved by the Architect, laid shoulder to should at the rate
of 16 Kg/ m2. Alternatively, and where so described instead of the described
in-situ surface finished or Glass Fibre Felt weighing not less than 27.2 Kg/ 10
m2 with a factory applied mineral surface dressing to a specification not
inferior to the above described in-situ dressing.

Built-up felt roofing shall not be laid under wet, damp or humid conditions and
the substructure and screeds shall have been allowed to set thoroughly and
dry out for at least seven days before felt laying is commenced and the
surface must be completely free from all moisture, dirt and dust.
The Contractor shall satisfy himself that the sub-structure and screeds are in
fit condition to receive the felt and that falls are adequate and not less than 1:
80. All flashings, turn-downs at edge, etc., shall be generally in accordance
with BS 8217.
Prices for built-up roofing shall include for all straight cutting and waste.
The contractor will be required to guarantee the whole of the bituminous felt
roofing against defective workmanship and materials and maintain as
required for a period of five years from the date of the Practical Completion of
the Works notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Contract
Conditions.
6.6 Roofing Shingles
Shingles roofing shall have two layers, bituminous felt water proofing layer
that complies with BS 747 and shingles that are placed on the bituminous felt.
Shingles shall comply with BS 5534.
6.7 Proprietary Roofing Systems

When Proprietary of Specialist roofing systems are required to be used as
specified in the contract documents they shall be carried out strictly in
accordance with the proprietors or specialist manufacturer’s instructions.
Under no circumstances will any deviation there from be allowed.
6.8 Roof Screeds

The lightweight concrete roof screeds shall be mixed strictly in accordance
with the specification of the manufacturers.
The surface of the concrete roof on which the screeds are to be laid shall be
perfectly dry before laying commences.
The screeds shall be laid to fall of not less than 1 in 80 to give falls and cross
falls as indicated on the drawings and the surface floated perfectly smooth
and free of all irregularities and projections to receive the felt roofing.
On completion of the screeds they shall be covered with a waterproof cover

to prevent too rapid drying or the reabsorption of rainwater before being
covered with felt.
Screeds shall be brushed with a stiff brass broom to remove any surface dust
or debris before felt laying commences.
6.9 Make Good

Carefully inspect all roofing works on completion and make good or replace
all defective materials and workmanship, clean out all eaves, gutters,
rainwater outlets, etc. and leave all perfectly sound and watertight.

7.0 CARPENTRY
7.1 Timber
Timber for carpentry work shall be well seasoned preservative treated timber
as later described, graded and free from defects in accordance with The
Timber (Export and Grading Rules 1967) and obtained from an approved
Uganda sawmill.
Hardwood shall be second or selected grade in accordance with the

“Hardwood Timber Grading”, and softwood shall be in accordance with the
Second Strength Grade of the “Softwood Strength Grading Rules”.
All timber shall be free of live borer, rot and decay, brittle heart and
compression failure and loose unsound or dead knots.
All timber shall be grade marked as specified in the Grading Rules and
certificates of Grading shall be produced for verification by the Project
Manager.
In as much as is practicable, timber shall be purchased immediately after the

contract is signed to enable it to be adequately seasoned before required for
use.
The timber referred to aboveshall be referred to in the Particular Specification

or Bills of Quantities as “Carpentry Timber as described” and may consist of
any of the following timbers listed in Table 7.1.1 below

Table 7.1.1 – Carpentry Timber
HARDWOODS
BOTANICAL NAME TRADE AND LOCAL NAME
Symphonia globulifera Muyanja, Munyeya
Piptadeniastrum africanum Dahoma, Muwere
Mululu, Mubakampungu,
Chrysophilum spp. Munyamata
Muhumbulya, Mulyanyonyi
Drypetes spp. Mushabarara
Carapa grandiflora Mujogo, Mutongana
Celtis spp. Lufogo, African Celtis
Akasinsa, Namamuka,
Fagara spp.
Mukomakoma
Croton spp. E. Satinwood, Munyene
Musine, Mutundu, Muhote

Trichilia spendida
Sekoba, Sesambya
Pterygota mildbraedii Mukoko
Eucalyptus gandis Eucalyptus, Kalitunsi
Grevillea robusta Australina Silky Oak
Markhamia platycalyx Musaribya
Newtonia buchananii Muchenche, Mpewere
Albizia (All species except A

Nongo, Murongo, Mulera
Coriaria)
Funtumia spp. Musanda, Nkago, Wild Rubber
Aningeria spp. Osan, Mutoke
Bosquiea phoberos Mugwi, Katomatoma
Maesopsis eminii Musizi
Antiaris toxicaria Durundu, Muhehere
SOFTWOODS
Podocarpus spp. Podo
Pinus spp. Pine

7.2 Timber for Special Structures

Timbers for designed structural work requiring timber of high strength and
quality will be specified by name in the Particular Specification or the Bills of
Quantities, and in accordance with the Uganda Code for Structural Design
7.3 Preventive Treatment for Timber

All timber for carpentry work shall be vacuum pressure treated with Celcure
or Tamalith or other approved medium, toxic to termites, cryptotermes and
other timber pests. All cut ends of timber so impregnated shall be treated with
two coats of “B” crystals or other approved method.
A “charge sheet” giving details of treatment shall be supplied to the Project

Manager if he so directs.
Pressure treatment shall be carried out by a specialist firm with approved

equipment.
7.4 Seasoning
Timber shall be seasoned after preservative treatment has been carried out
to a moisture content as shown in table 7.4.1 below.
Table 7.4.1: Moisture content of timber for various positions in

building
Moisture Content
Moisture Content of
of Timber in its
Position Timber at Time of
Permanent
Erection%
Position%
Rafters, battens, trusses 15 22
Floor joists 15 22
T and G flooring 12-14 15-22
After delivery to site, timber shall be carefully stacked to ensure free

circulation of air throughout the stack and covered with a waterproof cover to
prevent excessive drying by the sun or reabsorption of rainwater.
7.5 Samples and Testing

The Project Manager may select any samples of timber he may require for
the purpose of testing i.e. strength, moisture content penetration of
preservative, identification of species etc.
Samples for testing shall consist of cross sections not exceeding 50 mm thick
out at least 500 mm from the end of the piece. They shall be packed in
polythene bags with the ends tightly tied, labeled and delivered either to the
Government Chemist the Chief Materials Engineer, Central Materials
Laboratory of the Ministry responsible for Works or any approved laboratory
as directed.
7.6 Sawn Timber

All timber, except as specified elsewhere, shall be die square clean sawn as
left from the saw and shall hold the full dimensions specified.

7.7 Wrot Timber

The term “wrot” shall mean finished to a perfectly smooth finish to receive
paint or other surface treatment. Pieces which have been machine planed
shall be finely smoothed by hand plane and glass paper or sanding machines
to remove all planning machine or other marks.
3 mm reduction of specified size will be allowed in respect of each wrot face

except in members 25 mm thick or less or where described as finished size
“finished” when the members shall hold the full size stated.
7.8 Workmanship
All carpentry work shall be executed by skilled workmen, with workmanship of
the best quality, accurately set out in strict accordance with the drawings and
be framed together and securely fixed in the best possible manner with
properly made joints; all brads, nails and screws etc., shall be provided as
necessary, directed and approved, and the Contractor’s prices shall allow for
all the foregoing.
7.9 Jointing
All timber shall be as long as possible and practicable to eliminate joints.
Where joints are unavoidable surfaces shall be in good contact over the
whole area of the joint before fastenings are applied.
Scarfed joint shall be of a length not less than twice the greatest dimension of
the timber member and shall be bolted if required. Whenever practicable
scarfed joints shall be placed at a point of support in order to obtain maximum
strength.
No nails, screws or bolts shall be placed in any split end. If splitting is likely,
or is encountered in the course of the work, holes for nails shall beprebored
at diameter not exceeding 4/5th of the diameter of the nails. Clenched nails
must be bent at right angles to the grain.
Lead holes shall be bored for all screws. When the use of bolts is specified
the holes shall be bored form both sides of the timber and shall be of the
diameter D + D/16, where D is the diameter of the bolt. Nuts must be brought
up tight but care is to be taken to avoid crushing of the timber under the
washer.
A tolerance of 1 mm will be allowed in positioning of bolt holes.
7.10 Connectors
When trusses are required to be bolted together with timber connectors, the
single or double sided toothed type connectors shall be used, in accordance
with relevant standard or as directed by the Project Manager on Connectors
for Timber.

7.11 Nails and Bolts
All nails, bolts and metal fastenings shall be of mild steel, free of all rust and
defects and of approved manufacture.
7.12 Roofs
The roofs shall be constructed in accordance with the details and scantlings
shown on drawings. All ironwork necessary at joints, etc., is to be fitted and
bolts, nuts and washers provided and fixed as required. Trusses shall be
hoisted into position at the spacings shown and such temporary struttings as
may be required shall be provided. Purlins shall be of the size and intervals
shown. Raftersshall be cut and splayed as shown on the drawings. Plates
shall, so far as possible, be in one length between points of change of
direction. Joints between continuous lengths or at changes of direction and
intersections shall be halved.
7.13 Ends of Timber

The ends of all cut timbers, whether exposed, built in or otherwise shall be
painted with two coats of “Wykamol” or other equal and approved to prevent
rot and entry of borers.
7.14 Fixing Slips and Plugs

The Contractor shall provide and fix all necessary hardwood plugs and fixing
slips to walls and dovetailed blocks costs into concrete soffits, etc., for the
purpose of providing fixings for joinery and other Trades.
All hardwood fixings shall be clean and dry and dipped in “Wykamol” or other
approved wood preservative before fixing.
Where work is described as “plugged” it shall be fixed with nails to treated

hardwood plugs inserted into the brick or block work joints. Plugs shall be of
dry hardwood with the end cut on the twist, dipped in “Wykamol” or other
approved wood preservation and tightly driven into the raked out joint in the
wall.
Where work is described as “plugged and screwed” it shall be fixed with steel
screws unless otherwise specified to cylindrical fibre or polyvinyl plastic plugs
of approved manufacture let into holes of suitable size drilled in the walls.
When the wall is of such a material that it is impossible to drill neat round
holes they shall be packed with a suitable plastic plugging compound such as
“Rawplastic” or “Philplug” or other similar approved as instructed by the
manufacturers.
Plugs shall be inserted in walls to provide fixings not more than 750 mm apart
horizontally. The number of plugs at each fixing point will depend on the
width, height and thickness of the material to be fixed but a minimum of two
will be required with an additional one for each 150 mm width or height in
excess of the first 150 mm.
7.15 Insect Damage

All timber brought on to the site shall be free of live borer beetle or other
insect infestation and it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to see that
it remains free of infestation until the end of the maintenance period.

If upon inspection any timber is found to have been attacked, the Contractor
shall be required to execute at his own expense all necessary remedial
measures to eradicate it, including the removal and replacement of all
infected timber and such other measures as he is directed to take by the
Project Manager.
7.16 Cleaning
The Contractor shall remove and destroy all cut ends, shavings and other
wood waste from all parts of the building and the site generally both whilst the
work is in progress and at its completion.

8.0 JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY
8.1 Timber
Timber for joinery work shall be well seasoned preservative treated timber all
as described in Clause 7.1 “Carpentry” with the following exceptions:-
Hardwood shall be First or Prime Grade in accordance with the “Hardwood

Timber Grading” and softwood shall be in accordance with the First
Appearance Grade of the “Softwood Appearance Grading Rules”.
Table 8.2.2: Hardwoods for High Class Joinery Work
BOTANICAL NAMES TRADE AND LOCAL NAME
Albizia coriaria Mugavu, Musisi, Murongo
Fagara spp. E.A. Satinwood, Munyenye
Chlorophora excelsa Iroko, Muvule
Fagaropsis angolense Mafu, Muyinja, Mumara
Entandro phragma
Cyclindricum Sapele, Muyovu
E. Utile Utile, Mufumbi
Lavoa spp. Nkoba, Mukusu
Entandrophragma Engolense Godu Nohor, Mukusu
Guarea cedrata Scented guarea
Khaya spp. African Mohogany Munyama
8.2 Species of Timber for Joinery Works

The timber referred to in the previous Clause will be referred to in the
Particular Specification or Bills of Quantities as “Joinery Timber as described”
and may consist of any of the following timbers:-

Table 8.2.2 - Hardwoods for High Class Joinery Work
Botanical Name Trade and Local Name
Symphonia globulifera Nuyanja, Munyeya
Piptadeniastrum africanum Dahoma, Muwere
Mululu, Mubakampungu, Munyamata

Chrysophilum spp.
Muhumbulya, Mulyanyonyi.
Drypetes spp. Mushabarara
Carapa grandiflora Mujogo, Mutongana
Celtis spp. Lufogo, African Celtis
Fagara spp. Akasinsa, Namamuka, Mukomakoma
Croton spp, E. Satinwood, Muynene,
Musine, Mutundu, Muhote

Trichilia spendida
Sekoba, Sesambya
Pterygota mildbraedii Mukoko
Eucalyptus gandis Eucalyptus, Kalitunsi
Grevillea robusta Australian Silky Oak
Markhamia platycalyx Musaribya
Newtonia buchananii Muchenche, Mpewere
Albizia (All species except A Coriaria) Nongo, Murongo, Mulera
Futumia spp. Nusanda, Nkago, Wild Rubber
Aningeria spp. Osan, Mutoke
Bosquiea phoberos Mugwi, Katomatoma
Maesopsis eminii Musizi
Antiaris toxicaria Durundu, Muhehere

8.3 Preventive Treatment

Preservative treatment of all timber for joinery work shall be carried out in
accordance with Clause 7.3 “Carpentry”.
8.4 Seasoning
Timber shall be seasoned after preservation treatment has been carried out
to moisture content as described with Clause 7.4 “Carpentry”.
Seasoned timber shall be stored inside an enclosed building until required for
use.
8.5 Samples for Testing

The Project Manager may select samples for testing all as described in
Clause 7.5 “Carpentry”.
8.6 All Joinery to be Wrot

All joinery timber shall, unless specifically so described, be wrot within the
definition given in Clause 7.6 “Carpentry”
8.7 Selected Timber for Polish

When timber is to be lacquered, varnished or polished this will be specifically
described in the Particular Specification or Bills of Quantities as “hardwood/
softwood selected and kept clean for polish”.
Such timbers shall be carefully selected and matched for uniformity,

symmetry and evenness of both grain and colour.
8.8 Plywood
Plywood shall comply with BS 6566, Parts 1 -8 – Plywood manufactured from
Tropical Hardwoods, of the first grade. Plywood for external use shall be
weatherproof resin bonded, Bonding W.B.P. Quality.
The Project Manager may require samples for testing in accordance with the
provisions in the relevant B.S or Uganda Standard and the Contractor shall
supply these and he will be reimbursed with the cost as previously described.
8.9 Block Boards

Block boards shall comply with BS 8701 and shall be of the first grade.
Blackboard for external use shall be weatherproof resin bonded, Bonding
W.B.P. quality. Tests may be called for as previously described.
8.10 Wood Chipboards

Chipboard shall comply with BS 5268 and unless otherwise specified the
faces shall be filled and finished to receive paint. Tests may be called for as
previously described in BS EN 181104 .

8.11 Veneers
When veneering of blackboards, chipboards, etc. is required, it shall be
carried out in an approved manner. The sheets of veneer in adjacent panels
shall be carefully matched for uniformity of colour and symmetry in the
direction of the grain, laid with tight edges and secured with approved
adhesives under pressure to the base.
8.12 Adhesives
Organic or casein glues in accordance with BS EN 12765 may be used for all
non-load bearing internal work or work where the moisture content will never
exceed 15%.
For external work or when the moisture content is likely to exceed 15% only
resin type adhesives in accordance with BS EN 12765 shall be used.
8.13 Nails and Screws

Nails shall be as described in “Carpentry”. Screws shall, unless otherwise
specified, be steel screws in accordance with US.194-1 or BS 1210 “Wood
Screws”.
Unless elsewhere described, nails shall be of length equal to two and a half
times the length of the material which is being fastened and screws shall be
not less than No. 8 gauge and of a length not less than twice the thickness of
the timber being fixed.
8.14 Workmanship
The Joinery work shall be carried out by skilled workmen and in an approved
manner exactly in accordance with the Project Manager’s detail drawings.
The joiner shall carry out all necessary mortises, tenons, rebates, grooves,
notching, tongues and housings and all other labours necessary for correct
jointing. He shall also provide all tongues, dowels, metal plates, screws, nails
and other fastenings that may be required for the proper carrying out of the
work.
The joiner shall carry out all works necessary for the proper construction of all
frames, linings, panels, etc. and their support and fixing in the building. All
joinery work shall be arranged, jointed and fixed to allow for minimum
shrinkage and damage either to its strength or appearance.
Joinery work shall be commenced as soon as practicable and all frames and
components shall be loosely framed and assembled, but they shall not be
finally glued, pinned and wedged until they are required for fixing on site.
Where joints shall be commenced as soon as practicable and all frames and
components shall be loosely framed and assembled, but they shall not be
finally glued, pinned and wedged until they are required for fixing on site.
8.15 Joints
Where joints are required even though not specifically indicated on the
drawings, they shall be the recognized form of joint for such positions and

shall be made in accordance with BS 1186- 2 and BS 1186– 3.

All nails shall be punched and stopped with linseed oil putty.
Loose joints shall be made where provision for shrinkage is required e.g.
tongued and grooved in fill or paneling.
Glued joints shall be made when the joint has to be sealed or when shrinkage
or other movement in the boards, etc. can be discounted. In glued joints all
surfaces in contact shall be sawn or wrot and shall be perfectly clean and free
from dirt, dust, sawdust, oil and any other contaminating matter likely to
impair the strength of the joint. All joints shall be properly cramped until the
wedges and pins are driven or subjected to adequate pressure which shall be
maintained until the glue has set.
All glues shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8.16. Moulding
All mouldings shall be accurately worked in accordance with the details and
unless otherwise specified shall be worked on the solid.
8.17. Fixing or Building Frames

All frames for normal joinery construction shall be built-in as the adjoining
walling or masonry is carried out.
Frames which are to receive polish or other clear finish previously referred to
shall be carefully stored until the openings to receive them are completed and
all plastering or other wet trades are finished and then “built-in”
8.18 Fixing Beads etc

Except as otherwise described all beads, fillets and small mouldings,
architraves and skirtings which are not required to be removed shall be fixed
without stout round or oval pins, brads or nails.
When specifically stated, work shall be fixed with steel or brass screws with
the heads let in and pelleted with matching wood pellets.
All glazing beads for doors and opening lights and beads for securing
mosquito gauze to all types of frames shall be fixed with brass cups and
screws.
8.19 Scribing
All skirtings, cover fillets, architraves etc. shall be accurately scribed to fit to
the contours of any adjacent irregular surfaces to form a close butt joint.
8.20 Grounds
Provide and fix where indicated on the drawings, particular specification or
bills of quantities all necessary sawn grounds to receive skirtings, linings and
other “built-in” fittings, etc.

8.21 Flush Doors

Flush doors unless specifically otherwise described, shall consist of
hardwood skeleton framing 75 mm wide to all stiles top and bottom rails, 50
mm wide horizontal intermediate rails not more than 150 mm apart, with
suitable blocks to receive mortise locks on each long edge and covered on
both sides with 6 mm plywood finished for paint and approved hardwood
lipping 30 mm thick on each vertical edge.
All flush doors unless otherwise described shall be 45 mm finished thickness

and shall be properly framed and put together in accordance with the
requirements of BS 459.
External quality flush doors where so described shall be as described above

except that the plywood shall be external quality bonding W.B.P. plywood as
previously described and all adhesives used shall be of the resin type.
All flush doors shall be perfectly plane on both faces free of all waves, ripples
and distortion of any kind. Any door which after the application of paint or
polish shows any of these defects shall be removed
8.22 Priming
All joinery work which is prepared for painting shall be knotted and primed as
soon as it is prepared and ready for incorporating in the building. The backs
of all frames, linings, skirting boards, bottom edges of doors and sashes etc.,
and other timber likely to come into contact with plaster or masonry shall be
similarly primed.
Priming shall consist of one coat of priming paint in accordance with BS

2523.
Touch up priming coat of all members as necessary before finally

incorporating in the Works.
8.23 Polish or Clear Finishes

Where Joinery is to be polished or varnished it shall be given the first coat of
the selected treatment as soon as it is ready for incorporating into the Works.
8.24. Inspection
Facilities shall be given to the Project Manager to inspect work in the course
of fabrication in the Contractor’s Workshop.
8.25. Storage and Delivery

All completed joinery shall be carefully stored in an enclosed building until it is
required for use and shall not be prematurely brought on the site.
All joinery in transit shall be carefully protected from damage and kept under
a waterproof cover.

8.26 Protection of Joinery

All joinery likely to be damaged after being fixed in position shall be
adequately cased up and protected by the Contractor until completion of the
Works.
8.27 Ironmongery
All ironmongery is to be as specified in the Particular Specification or Bills of
Quantities with regards to manufacture and finish.
All ironmongery shall be carefully stored, sorted, assembled and fixed in the
best manner with matching screws, and shall be left oiled if required and in
perfect working order.
All keys shall be stamped with an identity number corresponding to its lock
and if directed by the Project Manager it shall have a stamped brass
identification tag attached to it by means of a steel split ring.
All ironmongery shall be removed before painting work is carried out and after
completion it shall be refixed, adjusted, cleared and left in full working order.
All damaged or defective ironmongery shall be replaced at the Contractor’s

own expense.
8.28 Dowels
The feet of all door frames or other vertical posts or timbers shown on the
drawings shall be firmly anchored to the floor with a 9 mm diameter mild steel
dowel 100 mm long let into the frame, etc., and the floor for equal amounts.
Dowels shall be bedded to the frame in red or white lead.
8.29. Mosquito Gauze

Where indicated on the drawings mosquito gauze shall be brass or copper
gauze not less than 0.559 mm (24 S.W.G) x 20 mesh.
8.30. Making Good

Should any joiners work bend, shrink or warp before the end of the
Maintenance period such work shall be removed and replaced entirely at the
Contractors own expense together with any other work disturbed in
consequence thereof to the entire satisfaction of the Project Manager.

9.0 METAL WORK
9.1 Materials generally

(i) All materials shall be the best of their respective kinds, free from defects,
and all work shall be carried out in the most workmanlike manner and
strictly as directed by the Project Manager.
(ii) The materials in all stages of transportation, handling and piling shall be
kept clean and injury from breaking, bending and distortion prevented.
9.2 Structural Steel
Structural steel shall comply with BS 4-1: 1993 Steel of Non-British origin
shall comply with the tests enumerated in BS 159: 1992 and samples shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for this purpose and for his approval.
All structural steelwork shall be fabricated in accordance with BS 449-2:1969

– The use of Structural Steel in Building.
9.3 Welding
Welding of steel shall be carried out strictly in accordance with BS 5950 –
General requirements and/or DD ENV 1090 Eurocode.
9.4 Bolts
All bolts shall be of the best quality mild steel of lengths and weights
approved by the Project Manager. Bolts shall project at least two threads
through nuts and all bolts passing through timber shall have washers under
heads and nuts.
9.5 Metal Windows and Doors

All metal windows and doors shall unless otherwise specifically described be
of the domestic type in accordance with BS EN 990: 1996 – Steel Windows
generally for Domestic and Similar Buildings.
Windows generally shall be Standard Metal Windows of the type and layout
shown on the drawings, constructed from sections rolled from best quality
mild steel. Corners shall be electrically welded and glazing bars shall be
locked at points of intersection and machine tenoned to frames. All welds
shall be ground flush and all frames and casements shall be square and free
from deformity of any kind.
9.6 Hanging
All casements shall open as indicted on the drawings and shall be fitted with
projecting hinges with bronze or gun – metal pins horizontal pivot hung
windows shall be fitted with bronze friction centers. All fittings shall be of
bronze or gun-metal.

9.7 Fittings
All side hung windows shall be fitted with double notched wedge plate
casement handle and peg casement stay not less in length than three
quarters of the width of the opening light and suitable retaining pin welded to
the frame.
Horizontally hung windows shall be fitted with a peg casement stay as above
described but pivoted windows shall be fitted with spring loaded catches with
either ring handle for pole operation of where specifically so described, gears
for remote control operation.
Doors shall be hung on heavy pattern projecting type hinges with bronze of
gun – metal pins and fitted with a three lever mortise lock of “Union” of other
equal approved manufacture with two keys and bronze handles to each. One
leaf of folding doors shall be fitted with two 150 mm bronze concealed bolts.
9.8 Glazing Clips

All sections shall be slotted or drilled to receive glazing clips.
9.9 Fixing Lugs and Screws

Adequate mild steel fixing lugs and screws shall be provided at not more than
450 mm centers at jambs, heads or cills and where these are less than 450
mm in length they shall be fitted with not less than one lug per member. Lugs
shall be of the adjustable type for building into walls with slotted holes to
allow vertical adjustment of the fixing screws.
Frames shall be screwed either to the fixing lugs or direct to wood frames
with suitable screws.
Frames fixed direct to masonry brickwork shall be fully bedded in gauged

mortar and neatly pointed all round externally in an approved waterproof
mastic compound. Frames screwed into wood sub-frames shall be bedded in
approved waterproof mastic compound before screwing in position and the
surplus mastic neatly dressed off and pointed on both sides.
9.10. Composite Windows

Composite windows and doors shall be provided as shown in the contract
documents and shall include for all necessary coupling mullions, transoms
and cills etc. as indicated.
All mullions and transoms shall be bedded in approved mastic.
9.11. Protective Finish

All metal windows shall be given one coat of approved red oxide paint at the
works. The metal shall be thoroughly cleaned before the paint is applied.
After delivery to the site the paint coat shall be touched up with similar paint
as required before the application of subsequent coats.

9.12 Fly Screens

Where fly screens are indicated on the drawings unless specifically otherwise
shown these shall be manufactured in accordance with the shop drawings
provided by the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager..
The frames, opening lights and mullions shall be manufactured from good
quality mild steel all properly framed and welded together.
Where plate mullions and transoms are required these are to consist of 1.626
mm thick sheet 112 mm girth with one edge bent, drilled and set screwed to
the window and the other edge drilled and set screwed to the metal angle
frame of the fly screen.
Opening lights shall be provided with one pair of brass hinges and two brass
turnbuckles to each and filled in with 20 mesh x 10.274 m (32 S.W.G) brass
gauge screwed with mild steel beads fixed to the inside of the angle frame.
All fly screen frames shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared at the
manufacturer’s works and painted with one coat of approved red oxide paint.

10.0 PAVING
10.1 Cement
All cement shall be as described in Clause 4.2 “Cement”.
10.2 Sand
Sand for paving shall be clean well graded sand in accordance with BS 1199:
and BS 1200, ans shall be washed if required.
10.3. Granolithic Coarse Aggregate

Coarse aggregate for granolithic paving shall be clean properly graded
quartzite chippings finely crushed to pass a 6 mm mesh and down but free
from dust and organic matter.
10.4. Water
Water shall be as previously described.
10.5. Granolithic paving

The mix for granolithic paving concrete shall consist of one part cement, one
and a quarter parts sand and two and a half parts coarse aggregate as
described by volume (1 : 1¼ : 2 ½ ).
If the coarse aggregate grading approaches the upper limit of 20% passing a
4.5 mm sieve the proportion of sand should be reduced accordingly.
The provisions of “Concrete” regarding batching and mixing shall apply to

granolithic concrete and in all cases the water content shall be kept as low as
possible consistent with obtaining full compaction.
The paving may be laid:
i. monolithic with the concrete base under i.e. within 3 hours of the base
being laid, or
ii. as separate construction i.e. after the concrete base under has been
allowed to dry and attain its full strength.
The special conditions applying to laying, thickness and size of bays for each
method are fully described hereafter.
All paving shall be thoroughly compacted without segregation or excessive

laitance.
After placing, leveling and compaction the topping shall be trowelled at least
three times at intervals during the next 6-10 hours so as to produce a
uniform, dense and hard surface with as much coarse aggregate just below
the surface as possible. During the second subsequent trowellings any
laitance shall be removed. The final trowelling should be at such a time that
considerable pressure is required to make an impression on the surface.
Under no circumstances should cement be sprinkled on the surface and
trowelled in to absorb surplus water.

As soon as the surface has been finished it shall be shaded from the sun and
breeze to prevent rapid drying. Immediately the surface has hardened
sufficiently it shall be covered for at least seven days with damp sand or
hessian, building paper, plastic etc., and shall be kept completely and
continually damp. After the curing period it shall be allowed to dry out slowly.
10.6. Granolithic Paving (Separate Construction)

The area of bays shall be determined by the layout, the structure and the
method of construction to be adopted. The position of construction joints,
movement joints and day work joints in the base shall be carefully planned in
relation to the layout as such joints will necessitate corresponding joints in the
paving. The paving to be laid in areas not exceeding 15 sq. metres or in
panels the length of which shall not exceed 1½ times their width. Plastic or
ebonite strip as described shall be used to define the joints in the paving and
over all bans and load bearing walls.
The base shall be thoroughly hacked shortly before the paving is to be laid to
provide a good bond. All laitance shall be removed to expose the coarse
aggregate and all dust and dirt cleaned out. The base shall be thoroughly
wetted but all excess water removed before grouting. If the paving is to be
laid less than 24 hours after the base, preparation may be done by wire
brushing.
Before paving is placed a thin layer of grout consisting of cement and water
mixed to the consistency of thick cream shall be brushed into the surface of
the base. The grout shall be followed immediately by the paving as previously
described.
The paving, when fully compacted, shall be not less than 36 mm + 6 mm and
service pipes or conduit shall not be laid in it.
10.7 Granolithic Paving (Monolithic)

Where the thickness of base and paving is 150 mm or greater the area of
individual slabs shall not exceed 30 sq. metres.
When the thickness of base and paving is between 100 mm and 150 mm the
area of slabs shall not exceed 15 sq. metres.
The area and shape of slabs will depend on the layout of the building but
shapes approaching square shall be preferred and in no case shall the longer
dimension exceed 8 metres. Plastic or ebonite strip as described shall be
used to define the joints in the paving and over all beams and load bearing
walls.
The paving, when fully compacted, shall be average 19 mm thick with a

minimum thickness of 12 mm.
10.8 Chemical Surface Treatment

Integral hardeners or surface treatments where specified shall be used strictly
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

10.9 Screeds
Screeds for in-situ terrazzo and other tile pavings shall consist of cement and
sand (1:3) and shall be laid in a similar manner as described for granolithic
paving (monolithic or separate) to the specified thickness and finished with
wood float or steel trowel to suit the type of finish as specified in the Particular
Specification or Bills of Quantities.
10.10. Terrazzo Paving

The materials used and method of laying is to be in accordance with BS
8204.
The terrazzo paving is to be of an approved colour as selected by the Project

Manager and composed of two parts of white or coloured marble chips to one
part tinted white cement laid rolled and trowelled to a dense even surface and
rubbed down at completion to a grit finished surface free from holes and
blemishes.
Terrazzo paving shall not be less than 15 mm finished thickness and laid in
panels 1000 x 1000 mm maximum or to patterns as indicated on the
drawings and divided by ebonite or coloured plastic strips securely anchored
into the screed and having their top edges finished flush with the surrounding
paving.
The paving is to be laid on a cement and sand screed as described of the

thickness indicated (but not less than 19 mm) and is to be finally ground and
polished to the approval of the Project Manager. The concrete sub-floor shall
be thoroughly cleaned and free from dust, grease and other foreign materials
and coated with cement slurry before the laying of screeds and paving.
10.11 Concrete and Quarry Tile Paving

Concrete floor tiles and fittings shall comply in all respects with BS 1197-2
and samples shall be submitted to the Project Manager for testing and
approval.
Quarry floors tiles and fittings shall comply in all respects with BS 6431 and
samples shall be submitted to the Project Manager for testing and approval.
All tiles shall be well soaked in water before use.
Tiles shall be laid to the patterns indicated on the drawings with either close
butt joints or wide joints as required.
All tiles shall be laid on a prepared cement and sand screed and bedded and
jointed in cement mortar (1:3) as before described and pointed as indicated
on the drawings.
10.12 Cork Tile Paving

Cork tile paving shall be carried out by an approved specialist firm and shall
consist of medium density cork tiles each size 305 x 305 x 6 mm thick with
tongued and grooved edges laid with close butt continuous joints in both
directions and bedded in an approved adhesive.
Cork tiles shall be of a natural colour approved by the Project Manager.

The tiles shall be laid on a clean dry cement and sand (1:3) screed as before
described and after laying shall be surfaced and sealed with three coats of
approved polyurethane lacquer buffed down between coats.
10.13 Flexible P.V.C Floor Tiling

Flexible P.V.C. floor tiling shall be carried out by an approved specialist firm
and shall consist of tiles in accordance with B.S. 3261 of approved
manufacture and colour to the sizes and thickness as indicated in the
Drawings, Particular Specification or Bills of Quantities. The tiles shall be laid
to the patterns as indicated (if any) on the drawings with close butt joints and
bedded in approved mastic on a clean, dry cement and sand (1:3) screed as
before described with a stool trowelled finish.
On completion, any surplus mastic which may have squeezed out of the
joints shall be removed, the tiles cleaned with an approved cleaner and two
coats of approved P.V.C. tile sealer applied.
10.14 Dividing Strips

Dividing strips shall be black ebonite or plastic of approved colour to the sizes
and positions as indicated on the drawings, Particular Specification or Bills of
Quantities. The strips shall extend to the full depth of the pavings in which
they are inserted and in the case of terrazzo work shall be let into the screed
under for a depth of not less than 6 mm.
10.15 Cover up and Protection of Paving

The Contractor shall cover up and protect all pavings and finishes as required
to assist slow and even drying and to prevent damage by traffic. Remove all
such coverings and leave the work clean and perfect at completion.

11.0 WALL AND CEILING FINISHES
11.1 Cement
All cement shall be as previously described in concrete works.
11.2. Lime
The lime for plastering shall comply with BS EN 459-1 or US 61and US 155
for non-hydraulic lime and be as rich as obtainable and to the approval of the
Project Manager. It must be freshly burned and shall be slaked at least one
month before being used by drenching with water, well broken up and mixed
and the wet mixture shall be passed through a sieve of 10 meshes to 100
square mm. Lime putty shall consist of freshly slaked lime as above
described, saturated with water until semi-fluid and passed through a fine
sieve, it shall then be allowed to stand until superfluous water has evaporated
and it has become of the consistency of thick paste, in no case for a shorter
period than one month before using, during which time it must be kept damp
and clean and no portion of it allowed to become dry.
Alternatively, approved hydrated lime with average 70% Calcium Oxide CaO
content may be used soaked to a putty at least 24 hours before use.
11.3. Sand
The sand for plaster work shall be in accordance with BS 1199 and BS 1200:
It shall be clean and well graded to a suitable fineness in accordance with the
nature of the plaster and the finish to be obtained.
11.4 Plastering Generally

Where walls are to be rendered or plastered, the joints shall be raked out 12
mm deep and brushed clean to afford a key and joints and walls shall be
sprayed with clean water before rendering or plastering. Concrete surfaces
shall be hacked to form key in addition.
All surfaces to be plastered must be scored for a key and brushed clean and
well wetted before each coat is applied.
All materials shall be properly mixed either by hand or by machine.
Hand mixing shall be carried out on a clean properly prepared platform which
shall be thoroughly scraped and cleaned between batches.
Machine mixers shall be thoroughly cleaned out between each batch.
No batch of mixture shall be used after the initial set of the cement has taken
place and no material shall be allowed to stand and be subsequently
“knocked” up for reuse.
All cement plaster shall be kept continually damp in the interval between
application of coats and for seven days after application of the final coat.
All arrises and angles shall be clean and sharp except where the Drawings
indicate otherwise.
The Contractor shall include for filling plaster into chases and working around
pipes, conduits, switch boxes and outlets, into rebates, up to metal window

frames etc. and the like and for all making good.
11.5 Internal Plastering

The internal plastering is to be applied in three coats and to be 16mm
minimum thickness as follows:-
a) 1stCoat – Cement and sand (1: 5 by volume), allowed to dry out

thoroughly and well scratched to afford a key for the second coat.
b) 2ndCoat – Cement and sand (1: 5 by volume), 6mm thick, finished true
and level with a wood float.
c) 3rdCoat – Cement Slurry or if lime is to be used, It shall be neat lime, plus

10% cement, not less than 2mm thick, applied as soon as the second
coat can stand trowelling and finished smooth with a steel trowel.
Plastering on expanded metal lathing is to have a preliminary or pricking-up

coat in addition.
The setting coat of plaster shall not be applied until all conduits, pipes and the
like have been fixed and until all air bricks etc., have been fixed and all
chases and cuttings in the walls have been performed and made good.
11.6 External Rendering

External rendering is to consist of one part cement and five parts sand by
volume (1: 5).
One coat work is to have a minimum finished thickness of 12 mm and two

coats work 19 mm.
Unless otherwise described rendering is to be floated smooth with a wood

float.
11.7 Tyrolean Finish Rendering

Tyrolean finish rendering shall consist of a base coat of one part cement and
five parts sand (1:5) by volume and a finishing coat of one part cement to four
parts (1:4) of fine stone chippings 9mm and down applied to the base coat by
means of an approved machine to a total finished thickness of not less than
20 mm.
The base coat shall be floated to a smooth even surface and liberally
scratched to form a key.
11.8. Expanded Metal Lathing

Expanded metal lathing for plastering shall be in accordance with BS 1369
and unless otherwise described in the Particular Specification or Bills of
Quantities shall have a stoved black asphalt paint finish.

The lathing shall be 9 mm mesh x 24 S.W.G (0.559mm). Lathing shall be not

less than 25 mm at the sides and end laps which shall be wired together at
not more than 75 mm centres with stout iron tying wire. The cut ends of all
tying wires shall be bent back through the lathing.
Lathing shall be fixed with the long way of the mesh across the supports and
shall be fixed to same with stout galvanized staples at not more than 300 mm
centres.
11.9. Wall Tiling

Wall tiles shall comply with BS 6431 Glazed Ceramic tiles and Tile Fittings for
Internal Walls.
All tiles shall be of the size, colour and quality as described in the Particular
Specification of Bills of Quantities and shall be perfectly true to shape and
free of all blemishes and flaws.
Samples shall be submitted to the Project Manager for approval.
All wall tiling shall be fixed on a perfectly plane vertical screed of cement and
sand (1: 3).
Tiling shall be bedded on the prepared screed in a slurry of cement and sand
(1: 4) or in an approved tile adhesive. The surface of each tile shall finish
flush with the adjacent tiles. Joints shall be continuous straight joints both
horizontally and vertically not exceeding 3 mm wide and shall be flushed up
with white cement. Spacers shall be used to ensure that the correct joint
width is maintained.
All cutting shall be kept to a minimum and the tiling shall be set out so that
only the largest possible pieces of cut tiles are used.
Purpose made tiles with round on one edge shall be fixed to all vertical
external angles and to the top edge of dadoes and the wall face over.
11.10 Expanded Polystyrene Tiles

Expanded polystyrene tiles shall be in accordance with BS 2552.
Tiles shall be to thickness and sizes as indicated in the Drawings, Particular

Specification or bills of Quantities.
All tiles shall be chamfered on all edges, close butt jointed with continuous
straight joints in both directions and either nailed to timber bearers with
approved panel pins with the heads neatly punched in or glued on all edges
either to timber bearers or to plaster or concrete soffits with an approved
adhesive.
All tiling shall be properly set out so that all cut tiles to border on all sides of a
room are of equal width.

Special Note:-
Under no circumstances are these tiles to be painted, decorated or subjected
to any surface treatment of any kind. Therefore great care must be exercised
during handling and fixing to see that they are kept perfectly clean.
11.11 Insulation Board

Insulation board shall be in accordance with BS EN 120/ 310/ 317/ 319/ 320/
322/ 323/ 324/ 325 / 382/ 022
Sheets shall be set out to provide evenly balanced borders on all edges and
shall be fixed to timber ceiling bearers spaced at 600 mm centers in both
directions with stout galvanized gimp pins along each at 150 mm centers with
their heads punched in and stopped. Joints between sheets shall be 3 mm
wide.
Timber cornices shall be provided at the junction of all walls and ceilings as
indicated on the drawings. Cornice members shall be plunged to the wall, not
to the ceiling boards.
11.12 Flat Sheets

Sheets shall be butt jointed and secured to timber bearers at minimum 400
mm centers with 30 mm long stout galvanized flat headed nails not more than
300 mm apart.
All holes shall be drilled (not punched) not less than 12 mm from the edge of
the sheet and all nails shall be driven home so that the head finishes flush
with the sheet.
Sheets to ceiling shall be set out in the same manner as described for
Insulation Board.
11.13 Make Good

The Contractor shall cut out and make good all cracks, blisters and other
defects and leave the whole of the plasterwork perfect on completion. When
making good defects the plaster shall be cut out cleanly as directed, with the
edges undercut to form a good key with the surrounding work, and the new
material shall finish flush with the adjacent plaster.
Tiled and sheeted surfaces shall be left perfectly clean on completion.

12.0 GLASS WORKS
12-1 Glass
All glass shall comply with BS EN 12758 and shall be free from spots,
bubbles, waves and all other defects. Samples of glass shall be submitted to
the Project Manager for approval.
Unless otherwise described in the Particular Specification or Bills of

Quantities, sheet glass shall be ordinary glazing quality and polished plate
glass shall be glazing quality. The nominal thickness of glass is to be as
described in the Contract Documents.
12.2 Putty
The putty used in glazing in wood frames is to be whiting ground with linseed
oil. That used for metal frames to be composed of whiting, linseed oil and
gold size in accordance with current BS 544.
12.3 Glazing
Panes shall be cut with 1.5 mm clearance all round.
Generally glaze all windows with glass carefully puttied and fully back puttied,
where glazing is to wood the glass must be sprigged. Carefully trim off all
superfluous putty.
Glazing clips are not necessary for small panes of metal windows but should
be used for the no-glazing bar types. Where no glazing bars are used the
weight of the glass should be thrown on the lower hinge corner by means of
small wood edges placed between the glass and the metal frame.
12.4 Bedding Strips

All glazing to wood doors or where otherwise directed shall be bedded in
wash leather or other approved plastic shock absorbing material. The
bedding material shall be cut to fit exactly the rebate line of the frame and it
shall be secured with wood or metal beads fixed with cups and screws.
12.5 Cleaning on Completion

Remove all broken, scratched or cracked panes and replace with new to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager. Clean inside and out with an approved
cleaner. On no account shall windows be cleaned by scraping with glass.

13.0 PAINTING
13.1 Workmanship
All paintings work shall be carried out by skilled tradesmen and finished in a
manner in accordance with the best acceptable trade practice.
13.2 Sub-letting Work

The work shall not be sub-let to a specialist firm without the written approval
of the Project Manager.
13.3 Materials
All materials shall be the best of their respective kinds and shall be in
accordance with their respective current Uganda Standard.
13.4 Paint
All paints, including cement paint, oil paints, emulsion paint and oil bound
distemper shall be ready mixed and obtained, unless specifically instructed to
the contrary, from approved local manufacturers, and they shall be delivered
to the site in sealed cans and shall be thoroughly mixed and applied in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
13.5 Linseed Oil

The linseed oil to be refined linseed oil, boiled or raw.
13.6 Knotting
The knotting is to be in accordance with BS 1336
13.7 Wax Polish

The wax polish shall be furniture polish of an approved brand.
13.8 Lacquer Treatment

Lacquer shall be an approved catalytic polyurethane lacquer and used strictly
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
13.9 Generally
The Contractor shall arrange his programme of work so that all other trades
are completed and away from the area to be painted before painting is
commenced.The Contractor shall remove all concrete and mortar droppings
and the like from all work to be decorated and remove all stains therefrom to
obtain s uniform colourof the surface .
All materials to be applied externally shall be of exterior quality and/ or

recommended by the manufacturers for external use.
Unless specially instructed by the directions and approved by the Project

Manager, no paints, distemper etc., shall be used as supplied by the
manufacturers and direct from the tins.

If required by the Project Manager the Contractor shall provide samples of

paints and other decorative materials with containers which shall be
forwarded to the Chief Materials Engineer, Central Materials Laboratory of
the Ministry responsible for Worksor other approved laboratory for testing.
The priming, undercoats and finishing coats shall each be of different tints
and the priming and undercoat shall be the correct brands and tints to suit the
respective finishing coats, in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions.
All finishing coats shall be of colours and tints selected by the Project
Manager.
Each coat shall be properly dry and in the case of oil or enamel paints shall
be well rubbed down with fine glass paper before the next coat is applied.
The paintwork shall be finished smooth and free from brush marks.
Colour cards of all paints, etc., shall be submitted to and samples prepared
for approval of the Project Manager before laying on, and such samples,
when approved, shall become the standard for the work.
All paints, emulsion paints, and distempers shall be applied by means of a

brush or spray gun or rollers of an approved type, where so agreed by the
Project Manager.
No painting is to be done in wet weather or on surfaces which are not

thoroughly dry.
13.10 Preparation
All surfaces to be painted shall be entirely free from all dirt, grease and dust.
(i) Plaster
Areas of defective plaster shall be cut out and made good with similar
plaster finished smooth.
Large cracks shall be cut out, under cut and filled with plaster finished
smooth and flush. Small cracks and holes shall be filled with an approved
hard filler.
Plastered surfaces to be painted with oil paint shall be treated with one
coat of alkali resistant primer.
(ii) Metal
All rust and loose scale is to be removed by means of wire brushing or

scraping.
All bare metal is to be primed with a primer conforming to BS 2523 and

all bare patches of works priming shall be touched up and brought
forward.
Coated surfaces, such as stack pipes shall be thoroughly brushed down

and painted with one coat of knotting.
Galvanised surfaces to be washed down, after drying shall be coated

with an approved solution approved by the Project Manager.

(iii) Woodwork
All woodwork shall be rubbed down, all knots covered with a thick coat of
good shellac knotting, given one coat of approved ready-mixed
proprietary wood primer and all cracks, nail holes, defects and uneven
surfaces etc., stopped and faced up with hard stopping rubbed down
flush.
(iv) Insulation or Fibre Boards
All holes shall be stopped with an approved plaster compound rubbed

down flush and all surfaces treated with one coat of thinned paint or
emulsion paint as specified.
13.11 Preparation of Existing surfaces

The preparation of existing surfaces shall comprise the following activities:
(i) Plaster, Insulation Board and remove all loose flaking wash down, rub
down, paint fill in holes and cracks with an approved filler including
cutting out cracks in old plasterwork, bring forward bare patches.
(ii) Metal - Wash down, rub down, thoroughly scrape down as necessary to
remove all loose and flaking paint and rust and prime and bring forward
bare patches.
(iii) Woodwork - Wash down, rub down remove all loose and flaking paints fill
in cracks and holes etc. with an approved filler and knot and prime and
bring forward bare patches. Alternatively where specified completely
remove paint by burning off or other approved means, rub down, fill in
cracks and holes etc. with an approved filler and knot and prime as
described for new woodwork.
13.12 Backs of Frames

Prime backs of all timber frames, skirtings and the like in contact with
masonry or plaster with one coat of approved ready mixed proprietary wood
priming paint before fixing.
13.13 Remove Ironmongery

Metal fittings and fastenings etc., are not to be fixed until painting is
completed. Where they have been fixed, they shall be removed and stored
until painting is completed and then carefully cleaned and refixed in position.
Lugs to metal windows and door handles shall be painted before glazing.
13.14 Cover up and Protect

Before painting is commenced, floors must be washed and the buildings
thoroughly cleaned out and every precaution taken to keep down dust.
The Contractor shall provide covers to all gauze screens and sashes and
elsewhere as may be required to prevent marking and staining by paint.

13.15 Cleaning up
Replace any cracked or broken glass. Remove and replace any gauze
screens which may be stained with paint. Remove all other paint splashes,
spots and stains and clean out and leave the buildings to the requirements
and satisfaction of the Project Manager.

14.0FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, pumpsand

ACCESSORIES
14.1 Fire extinguisher cabinets

All fixed recessed and semi-recessed hose reel cabinets and/or surface-
mounted cabinets have a heavy gauge, steel or aluminum box and shall be
located installed in accordance with BS EN 671-1.
14.2 Fire extinguishers

Fixed fire extinguishing installations and equipment on premises shall be
located and installed in accordance with BS EN 671-1. Portable fire
extinguishing shall be in accordance with BS 5306-3.
14.3 Accessories
All accessories, fire blankets and brackets shall meet the requirements of
02/121662, 02/121663, 02/121665, 02/121667, 02/121668, 02/121669,
02/121670 and 02/121672.
14.4 Pumps
Fire Hosereel pumps shall consist of a duplicate set of end-suction centrifugal
pumps, each pump rated for 2.27 litres per second flow producing a minimum
head to all hosereels of 25 metres and one number diesel engine driven
centrifugal pump, pressure vessel, valves and accessories.
Each pump shall be supplied complete with an electric motor, base plate,
anti-vibration mountings, gate valve on suction port and ate plus non-return
valve on the discharge port.
The common suction pipe to the duplicate pumps set shall be fitted with an
in-line strainer to BS 5154, generally as Crane type D 287 and foot valve
strainer.
The fire hosereel pump shall be controlled by a pressure switch and tank to
maintain the required minimum pressure head.
Pumps motors contactors, neon run-fail lamps, duty/stand-by automatic

change-over switch and local isolator for the fire hosereels installation to be
supplied and installed under this item shall be housed in a proprietary control
panel. A bypass shall be constructed for the pumps.

14.5 Hosereel Installation

i) Pipes and Pipe Fittings
Pipes shall be galvanised steel tubing to BS 1387:1967 Class C with pipe threads
to BS 21.
Pipe Fittings shall be Wrought steel seamless pipe fitting to BS 1740 Part 1: 1971.
ii) Valves
Non-return Valves: lift type with bonze body and composition disk conforming to BS
5154 and generally as Crane type DM 118.
Gate Valves shall be bronze body and solid wedge disk having non-rising stem and
wheel confirming to BS 5154 and generally as Crane type DM 160.\
iii) Hosereels
Hosereels shall be recessed, swinging, automatic type with 30 metres long x 25mm
diameter hose and nylon spray/jet/shut-off nozzle conforming with BS 3169:1981
Each hosereel shall be fitted with a screw down bronze globe valve to the
requirements of BS 5154 on the inlet to the reel.

15. EXTERNAL WORKS
15.1 Standards
The requirements of the following British Standards shall be observed:-
British Standards
a). B.S. 1621 Bitumen Macadam (with crushed rock or slag

aggregate)
b). B.S. 340 Precast concrete kerbs, channels, edgings and

quadrants
c) B.S. 368 Precast concrete flags
d) B.S. 4428 General landscape operations (excluding hard

surfaces)
e) B.S. 3882 Recommendations and classifications for top soil
f) B.S. 3936 Nursery stock
g) B.S. 3998 Recommendations of treework
h) NOTE Preambles to precending trades where applicable

shall apply equally to the work contained herein
15.2 Generally
15.2.1 Standard specification
In case where no particular specification or standard is given for any

article or material to be used in the Contract, the relevant
Specification of the British Standards institution or other relevant
standard shall apply unless otherwise stated.
15.2.2 Submission of samples
As soon as possible after the Contract has been awarded, the

Contractor shall submit to the Architect a list of the suppliers from
whom he proposes to purchase the materials necessary for the
execution of the works. Each supplier must be willing to admit the
Architect, or his representative to this premises during ordinary
working hours for the purpose of obtaining samples of the materials
in question. Alternatively, if desired by the Architect, the Contractor
shall deliver the samples of materials to be used as aggregates, shall
be taken and tested in accordance with the provisions of
British Standard 812: Sampling and Testing of Mineral Aggregates,
sands and Fillers. Subsequent supplies shall conform, within the
specified tolerances, to the quality of approved samples.
The information regarding the names of the suppliers may be

submitted at different times, as may be convenient, but no source of
supply shall be changed without the Architect’s prior approval.

Samples of materials approved will be retained at the Architect’s

office until the completion of the Contract. Samples may test to
destruction.
All materials delivered to site must be at least equal in all respects to

approved samples.
15.2.3 Manufacturer’s Certificates
The Contractor shall, whenever required obtain from the

manufacturer and submit to the Architect, certificates showing that
tests of materials have been carried out in accordance with the
requirements of the relevant British Standards, or other approved
Standards, or with the requirements of this Specification.
No payment will be made in respect of any costs incurred by the

Contractor or by the manufacturers in connection with tests required
by this clause or for supplying test certificates in respect thereof.
15.2.4 Rejected materials
Should any materials or articles manufactured on or off the site be,

in the of the judgement Architect, of inferior quality, or damaged in
any way as to make it unsuited for the work, then such materials or
articles shall not be used on the works and shall be removed and
replaced, all at the Contractor’s expense and in each case as the
Architect shall decide and direct.
15.2.5 Building stone
All building stone shall be capable of withstanding when wet a

crushing stress of 1.4kg/sq.mm. The source shall be approved by
the Architect and stone supplied there shall be free from
magadi,overburden, mudstone, cracks sandholes, veins
laminations or other imperfections. The stone shall be chisel-dressed
into true rectangular blocks, with each surface even and at right
angles to all adjoining surfaces, to the size specified. For exposed
stonework the maximum permissible variation of any of the specified
dimensions shall be 6mm provided that cut stone, supplied as rock
face stone may be hammer dressed on one face only, or on the
face and one end, if in other respects it conforms with this
specification. Stone shorter than 75mm will not be accepted.
Unless the Architect allows otherwise the Contractor shall at his own
expense provide and dress for 100mm cubes of stone for testing.
The stone shall be sound when tested in accordance with B.S. 1438:
madia for Biological percolating filters, Appendix B, (sodium
sulphate soundness test) except that:
a). The treatment shall be repeated for 10 cycles only ; and
b). The second criterion of failure shall be amended to allow for

a loss of weight of not more than 20% of its original weight.
15.2.6 Stone dust
Stone dust for blinding shall be blacktrap screened to the following

grading:-

a). Passing 10mm sieve 100%
b) Passing No. 4 sieve 85% - 100%
c) Passing No. 100 sieve 5% - 25%
15.3 Site Clearance and Earthworks

15.3.1 Levels to be agreed in advance
Prior to any site clearance, the Contractor shall satisfy himself that
the existing ground levels as indicated on the Drawings or schedules
of longitudinal or cross section levels are correct. Should the
Contractor wish to dispute any levels he shall submit to the Architect
a schedule of the position of the levels considered to be in error and
a set of revised levels. The existing ground relevant to the disputed
levels shall not be disturbed before the Architect‘s decision as to the
correct levels is given. If the Contractor fails to take the requisite
levels, the ground levels shown on the Drawings and sections or as
determined by the Architect shall be taken as correct.
15.3.2 Clearing
Prior to commencement of any earthworks, the Contractor shall clear

the area of the Site indicated on the Drawings, unless otherwise
directed by the Architect. He shall also, at times required or
approved by the Architect, clear the site over the area of stockpiles,
road junctions, lines of ditches or drains and such areas as the
Architect may require.
All surface objects and all trees, hedges, scrub, undergrowth,

stumps and tree roots, not designated to remain, shall be cleared
and/or grubbed.
Materials and debris which cannot be burnt shall be carted to tips

provided by the Contractor or otherwise disposed of to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
15.3.3 Removal of topsoil roots and grass
Topsoil, roots and grass shall be stripped in a separate operation

from clearing.
Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, topsoil, roots and grass

shall not be stripped over the full area of the site, but only over the
area affected by the earthworks.
15.3.4 Dust
The Contractor shall implement measures to control dust, by

periodically spraying the works with water.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions against the

growth on the site of weeds and shall remove them as necessary
throughout the period of works and maintenance.
15.3.5 Earthworks limits
The Contractor shall restrict his workings to the limits described in the
Contract, unless otherwise approved by the Architect.

15.3.6 Definitions
Fill-material : “Fill-material” shall mean material deposited in

accordance
specifications from any of the classes specified in
clause W.9 in order to build up an earthworks
construction to formation level as shown on the
Drawings or as ordered by the Architect.
Spoil-material : “Spoil-material” shall mean material deposited in

accordance with these specifications from any of
the classes specified in clause W.9 and which,
being obtained from “cut” is unsuitable surplus to
the requirements of the works.
Sub-grade : “Sub-grade” shall mean the upper layer(s) of

material, either insitu or infill. Where there is no
improved sub-grade, the top of the sub-grade is
at formation level. When an improved sub-grade
is placed, the top of the improved sub-grade is
then considered as the formation level. In this
section, unless otherwise specified, “sub-grade”
shall mean the upper 300mm of earthworks
(compacted thickness), either in-situ or infill.
Improved : “Improved sub-grade” shall mean the layer(s) of

sub- grade selected infill
material, the top of which is at formation level,
placed where the natural in-situ or fill-material is,
in the opinion of the Architect,
unsuitable for the direct support of the pavement.
The material for sub-grade shall be obtained from
borrow areas. The thickness of an improved
sub-grade shall be at least 150mm.
15.3.7 Classification of excavated material
Excavation will be paid for separately for the following three classes
of material:-
a). Class 1 : Hard material (or rock) : This class shall

include all material which, in the opinion of
the Architect, either:-
i) requires blasting for its removal or,

ii) requires the use of metal wedges and sledge
hammers for its removal, or
iii) requires the use of compressed air drilling
for its removal or,
iv) is such that, when worked with a tractor of
at least 200kw (270 flywheel h.p.), fitted with
a rearmounted heavy-duty hydraulic single
tune of 100mm maximum width, the tine
penetrates to a depth less than 75mm.
b). Individual boulder greater than 1C.M. in volume shall be

included in this class when their nature and size are such that,
in the opinion of the Architect they cannot be removed without
recourse to one of the above methods.

c). Where a portion of excavation contains 50% or more by

volume of boulders of this order, such portion shall be
considered as class 1 material throughout.
d) Class 11 :Medium-hard material (or rippable) : This class

shall include all material such as consolidated gravel,
weathered or stratified rock, stones or boulders less than 1
C.M. in volume, which, in the opinion of the Architect:-
i) Can be extracted without recourse to the methods

specified for class 1 material, but
ii) requires ripping for its removal, or
iii) in confined spaces, requires hand-excavation using
compressor tools for its removal.
e) Provided all reasonable steps have been take to the

satisfaction of the Architect, to facilitate the removal of
the material by other methods.
f) Class 111: Normal Material: This class shall include all

material which does not require recourse to the methods for
class 1 and 11 materials.
15.3.8 Excavation
Over excavation: Any excess excavation shall be made good at the

Contractor’s own expense by backfilling with approved “base”
material, deposited and compacted as specified.
Where slopes in rock are excavated in excess the tolerance specified

shall be reinstated in class 25 reinforced concrete all suitably bolted
to the rock face as directed by the Architect at the Contractor’s own
expense.
Excavation below embarkments and below formation level: where

any material below the natural ground level under embarkments or
below formation level in cuttings is required to be excavated, it shall
be removed to such depth and over such areas as shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Architect. The resultant excavation
shall be backfilled with an approved material deposited and
compacted as specified for the forming of embarkments and sub-
grade.
If, after the removal of material as specified in the above paragraph,

the Contractor allows the material exposed to reach a condition
where compaction of back-filling is impracticable, he shall make
good at his own expense, either by additional excavation and
backfilling or by other measures.
15.3.9 Stockpile areas
The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Architect to the sitting
of the stockpiling areas.
No material shall be stockpiled without the consent of the Architect.

The Contractor shall give the Architect at least 24 hours notice of his
intention to stockpile. Stockpile areas shall be chosen and prepared
and all stockpile material shall be deposited in such a way as to

facilitate subsequent measurement of stockpile volume and in all

instances shall be to the satisfaction of the Architect.
15.3.10 Construction of embankments and fills
General: All embankments and fills shall be formed and completed

to the correct lines, slopes, widths and levels shown on the Drawings.
Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the Architect, shoulders

and beam shall be constructed as part of the earthworks operation
and paid for as such.
Unless otherwise specified, where an embankment of less than 1m

below formation level is to be made, topsoil and all vegetable matter
shall be removed from the surface upon which the embankment is to
be placed and the cleared surface shall be completely broken up by
ploughing or scarifying to a minimum depth of 150mm. This area
shall then be compacted to a dry density of at least 95% MDD
(Standard Compaction).
Unsuitable material: Embankments and fills shall be constructed only

of material approved by the Architect, obtained from the excavations
of cuttings, ditches and borrow-areas.
Materials with high swelling characteristics or high organic matter

content and any other undesirable material shall not be used, unless
specifically directed by the Architect. Unsuitable material shall
include:-
a) All material containing more than 5% by weight, of organic
matter (such as topsoil, material from swamps, peat,
loggs, stumps and perishable material)
b) All material with a swell of more than 3% (such as black cotton

soil).
c) All clay of liquid limit exceeding 80 or plasticity index exceeding

50.
d) Materials having moisture content greater than the maximum

permitted for such materials.
15.3.11 Rock-fill: “Rock-fill” shall consist predominantly of class 1 material

of such size that the material can be placed only in layers of
compacted thickness exceeding 300mm.
Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, stones and boulders

greater than 0.2 C.M. in volume (average size: 600mm) shall not be
used for the construction of embankments and fills.
Selection of materials for the upper layers: The Architect may

direct the certain materials to be excluded from the sub-grade (see
clause W.15) or from the upper layers of fill. He may also direct that
other materials be set apart or obtained from borrow and used only
for these layers. The Contractor shall then comply with the
Architect’s directions and shall allow in his rates for such
selection of materials.
Rock-fill shall not be placed less than 600mm below formation level.

15.3.12 Laying of Compaction: Where material other rock-fill is used for

the construction of embankments and fills, it shall be placed in
layers of compacted thickness not exceeding 300mm, unless
otherwise directed by the Architect. The layers shall be parallel to
the top of sub-grade level and cross-section.
Unless otherwise specified, the layers of fill material shall be

compacted throughout to a dry density of at least 95% MDD
(Standard Compaction), except for the upper 300mm (sub-grade)
which shall be compacted to a dry density of at least 100% MDD
(Standard Compaction).
The moisture contents of the material shall be adjusted so that the

above minimum compactions are obtained. Unless otherwise
accepted by the Architect, the moisture contents at the time of
compaction shall not exceed 105% of the optimum moisture content
(Standard Compaction). Where water needs to be added, it shall be
applied in an even manner and the rate of application shall be such
that no transverse or longitudinal flow occurs.
Where rock is used a filling, the rock shall be placed in the bottom of
the embankment or as directed by the Architect. The largest
portions of rock shall be placed in layers of maximum compacted
thickness of 1m. The interstices shall be filled with spalls and finer
material approved by the Architect. The whole layer shall be
material approved method, until the interstices are completely filled
and until the specified compaction is obtained.
15.3.13 Drainage of works
All cuttings and embankments shall be kept free of standing water

and drained during the whole of the construction.
Should water accumulate on any part of the earthwork either during

construction or after construction the Contractor shall remove and
replace at his own expense any material, which in the opinion of the
Architect, has been adversely affected.
The Contractor shall so order his construction programme that the

construction of culverts and drains does not lag behind the
earthworks. Well in advance of commencing the earth-moving
operations over swampy or waterlogged areas, the Contractor shall
cut drains and ditches and carry out any other works as necessary
to assist in draining the ground.
All drains and ditches shall be maintained in proper working order

throughout the duration of the Contract.
The Contractor shall allow in his rates for draining the earthworks
satisfactorily at all stages during the construction and arrange his
methods and order of working accordingly.
He shall provide within the site where necessary temporary water-

courses, ditches drains, pumping or other means of maintaining the
earthworks free from standing water. Water discharged from the
site shall not be run into a road but be carried direct to an approved
sewer, ditch or river through troughs, shutes or pipes.

Such provision shall include carrying out the work of forming the
cuttings and embankments in such a manner that their surfaces
have at all times a sufficient minimum crossfall and, where
practicable, a sufficient longitudinal gradient to enable them to shed
water and prevent ponding.
In pumping out excavations and in any lowering of the water table

the Contractor shall pay due regard to the stability of all structures.
15.3.14 Side ditches
Side ditches, considered as earthworks and measured and paid for

as such, shall be shaped by excavating to the lines, slope and
widths shown upon the Drawings and finished off so that the sub-
grade levels and Camber or super-elevation of the of the sub-grade
level and cross fall of the shoulders and slope and invert levels of
the side ditches are everywhere in accordance with the Drawings or
as directed by the Architect.
15.3.15 Sub-grade and improved sub-grade
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Architect, materials

forming the direct support of the pavement shall comply with the
following requirements:-
a) CBR (100% BS - 4 days soak) : Minimum 5%
b) Swell (100% BS - 4 days soak) : Maximum 2%
c) Organic matter (percentage by weight : maximum 3%
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, material unsuitable for the

direct support of the pavement occurs in cuttings, the Contractor
shall excavate it to the depths and widths directed and replace it
with selected fill material to form an improved subgrade. The work
will be paid for at the appropriate rates of “spoil” and “fill” and no
additional payment will be made.
15.3.16 Laying and compaction:
The maximum compacted thickness which shall be laid, processed

and compacted at one time shall be 300mm.
The layer shall be clarified, water shall be uniformly mixed in or the

material allowed to dry out to the correct moisture content.
The upper 300mm of the earthworks (that is to the sub grade) shall
be compacted to a dry density of at least 100% MDD (Standard
Compaction) in cuttings where there is no improved sub grade and
everywhere in fills and embankments.
In cuttings where an improved subgrade is to be placed, the upper

150mm of the subgrade prior to the placing of the improved
subgrade layer(s), shall be compacted to at least 100% MDD
(Standard Compaction), unless otherwise specified.
All improved subgrade shall be compacted to a dry density at least

100% MDD (Standard Compaction) for its full depth.

The moisture content shall be adjusted in order that the above

minimum Compactions are obtained. Unless otherwise accepted by
the Engineer, the moisture content at the time of compaction shall
not exceed 105% of the optimum Moisture Content (BS).
Top of subgrade (including improved subgrade) : During the above

process, the surface of each subgrade layer shall be graded to
level, parallel to the crossfall and camber and profile shown upon
the Drawings or directed by the Engineer and to the Tolerance
specified.
The subgrade shall be cleaned of all foreign matter and way

potholes, loose material ruts, corrugations, depressions or other
defects which have appeared in the subgrade layer, due to
improper drainage, traffic or any other cause, shall be corrected. If
directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall scarify, grade and
recompact the subgrade to line, level and specification at his
expense.
No work above the subgrade shall be executed until the subgrade

has been inspection and approved by the Engineer.
15.4 Construction of Sub-Base and Bases

15.4.1 General
The term “gravel” used throughout this section shall be deemed to

include; lateritic gravel, Quartizitic gravel, some forms of weathered
rock, soft stone, coral rag and conglomerate.
A “grade” base will be made up of one of these natural gravels, or

of sand or clay sand, or of a combination of these materials, without
the addition of any stabilizing agent.
15.4.2 Material requirements
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer, the material

shall comply with the following requirements:-
California bearing ratio:
a) The material for base shall have CBR of least 80.
b) The material for sub-base shall have a CBR of at least 30.
c) Unless otherwise specified, the CBR shall be measured at a dry

density corresponding to 95% MDD (heavy compaction) and after
4 days.
18.4.3 Requirements for gravel:
In addition to the CBR requirements, the gravel material shall comply

with the following specification:-
Gravel for Base Sub-base
Plasticity Index - Maximum 15 25

Loss Angels value - Maximum 30 70
Aggregate Crushing value - Maximum 35 75

Grading:
The grading curve of the material, after processing

compaction shall be a smooth curve within either of the
following envelopes, as applicable:-
Sieve Size Percentage by weight

passing
(mm) Base Sub-grade
80 - 100
63 - 95 - 100
50 100 90 - 100
40 95 - 100 85 - 100
28 80 - 100 72 - 100
20 60 - 100 55 - 100
10 35 - 90 30 - 100
5 20 - 75 18 - 85
2 12 - 50 10 - 65
1 10 - 40 8 - 52
0.425 7 - 33 7 - 43
0.075 4 - 20 4 - 35
Clayey Sand:
In addition to the CBR requirement, the clayey sand for sub-base

shall comply with the following specification:-
Percentage passing 2mm Sieve: Maximum 95
Percentage passing 0.075 mm Sieve Maximum 10 - Maximum 30
Uniformity coefficient: Minimum 5
Plasticity Index Minimum 5- Maximum 20
15.4.4 Setting Out Sub-base to line and level
The Contractor shall set out the road line and level at intervals of not
more than 25 metres or such lesser intervals on horizontal and
vertical curves as the Engineer may require, and sufficient to ensure
that the levels of the sub-base are constructed within the specified
tolerances and the minimum thickness ordered for the course.
Reference pegs shall be provided clear off the road and at right
angles to it from which the centre-line or level can be re-established
at any time. These shall be maintained so long as they are needed
by the Engineer to check the work.
All setting out shall be agreed by the Engineer before any sub-clause
or base course work is commenced.

15.4.5 Laying and compacting natural material sub-base and base
The sub-base and base material shall be deposited in such quantity

and spread in a uniform layer across the full width required, so that
the final compacted thickness is nowhere less than shown upon the
Drawings or ordered by the Engineer.
The compacted thickness of any layer laid, processed and

compacted at one time shall not exceed 200mm and where a greater
compacted thickness is required, the material shall be laid and
processed in two or more layers.
The material shall be broken down so that the maximum size of any
particle is not greater than specified. This may require a grid-cleator
sheep-foot roller or a pulverizer and the Contractor shall allow for
such processing in his rates.
Any oversize material which cannot be broken down to the required

size shall be removed and disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
The layer shall then be scarified and water shall be uniformly mixed
in, as directed by the Engineer. It shall be graded, Compacted to a
dry density of at least 95% MDD (Heavy Compacted) and graded to
final level.
The moisture content shall be adjusted so that the above minimum

Compaction is obtained. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer,
the moisture content at the time of compaction shall be between 80
and 105% of the optimum Moisture Content (Heavy Compaction).
15.4.6 Tolerances
The Sub-base and base shall be constructed within the tolerance

specified.
15.4.7 Surface levels of flexible pavement course and concrete

pavement
The level of any point on the surface of each of the pavement course
of the carriageway, the true level as specified, shall on completion
of compaction, conform to that shown on the Drawings within the
tolerances stated in column 3 of the following table.
Compliance with the requirement shall be checked, in respect of the

surface of each course, either by levelling in relation to a survey
Datum using pegs or pins, or if raised or flush kerbs or concrete
marginal haunches, concrete form, rails or bankettes have been
laid, by use of a template or stretched line, using a datum the top
surface of the levelling device after the profile or level of the latter
have been approved by the Engineer.All longitudinal profile devices
shall be laid true to line and level each within a tolerance of +/- 3mm
the tolerance in level being measured over 8 metres. If this tolerance
is exceeded the level and alignment shall be corrected, if necessary,
by lifting and relaying or resetting.
In case of the base course and wearing course of flexible surfacing,

and the surface of concrete pavements, the finished surface, in
addition to conforming to the limits of tolerance from the true surface
levels as specified above, shall when tested with a 3 metre straight
edge placed parallel to the center line of the road, have no

depression greater than the appropriate one stated in the following

table:-
Measurements of level of tolerances shall be made while the material

is still warm and rectification where necessary, carried out
immediately; otherwise the Engineer may require the whole area
involved to be removed to the full depth of the layer and
reconstructed with fresh material.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tolerance from Maximum Depression tested
Surface true surface level with 3m straight edge placed
on the surface parallel to
the center line of
carriageway
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sub-grade +0-50mm -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15.5 Drive Ways and Parking Areas

15.5.1 Excavations
Excavations to areas to receive bitumen macadam or other road or

paved finish shall be carried out in a manner ensuring that
excavations plant and vehicles do not cause shear failure more than
250mm in the sub-grade. Wheel loads and tyre pressures shall be
limited and work shall be interruption to let the sub-grade dry out as
necessary to avoid such sub-grade failure.
If shear failure more than 250mm deep occurs in the sub-grade, the
soil affected shall be excavated and replaced by soil filling as
described.
If the soil develops highly elastic conditions as excavation

approaches formation level, excavations shall be interrupted until the
excess pore consequently disappears.
Before any further work is executed the formation level must be

inspected and approved by the Engineer.
15.5.2 Compaction
The sub-grade shall be compacted by a smooth-wheeled roller of 8 to

10 tonnes weight or vibrating roller of minimum 1,300kg., or other
approved plant. The number of coverages shall be at least 10 and
there shall be a 50% overlap of successive coverages. If so
instructed by the Engineer, water shall be added during compaction
to obtain optimum water content. Filling shall be compacted as
above but in maximum 200mm deep layers.
15.5.3 Sub-grade surface finish
The surface of the sub-grade shall be finished to the levels, falls and
crossfalls shown on the Drawings within the following tolerances:-
i.) The level shall not be above and not more than 50mm below
the level shown on the Drawings.

ii.) The falls shall be within 10% of the falls shown on the
Drawings.
iii.) The smoothness shall be such that departures from a 3

meter straight edge laid in any direction shall not exceed
50mm and there shall be no ponding of water.
15.5.4 Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate for the base shall be crushed stone or rock

confirming to the following requirements:-
15.5.5 Sub-base
The material for use in the sub-base shall consist of crusher dust as
described, or other approved material. It shall be placed in one layer
of such thickness that when compacted it shall attain the finished
thickness shown on the Drawings. The material shall be watered as
necessary and compacted as described. The sub-base material shall
have a CBR value (soaked) for not less than 25.
15.5.6 Base
The material for use in the basecourse shall consist of one layer of
course aggregate as described of which the interstices are filled with
fine material consisting either of crusher dust or a mixture of crusher
fines. The proportions of crusher dust and crusher fines in the fine
material shall be such as to obtain the maximum density of base
course when compacted.
The procedure for construction shall be as follows: The course

aggregate shall be placed in a layer of such thickness so as to obtain
the required thickness after compaction. It shall then be compacted
lightly until the Engineer is satisfied that a layer true to shape and
level has been obtained. The fine material shall then be spread over
the layer by hand mechanical means. The application of fine material
shall be made gradually in successive layers not exceeding 25mm in
thickness and each be worked into the voids in the coarse aggregate
before the application of the succeeding layer. The fine material shall
be laid as described and brushed into the course aggregate and
rolled and consolidated by an approved vibrating roller feed to the
bottom of the layer.
Final compaction shall be by an 8-10 tonnes smooth-wheeled roller

until there is no visible movement under the action of the roller and
until the required tolerances are achieved. Water may be applied
during final compaction subject to the Engineer’s approval.
Compaction shall in any case achieve 100% maximum dry density in

accordance with B.S. 1377.
15.5.7 Quarry waste
Quarry waste shall mean material to the same specification as

crusher dust, except as follows:- ii). The material may have up to
35% of stones not larger than 38mm provided that the material
passing the 5mm sieve is within the limits specified.

Quarry waste shall be clean and completely free from earth, organic
or other foreign matter.
i). The plasticity index taken on material passing the No. 36

sieve shall not exceed 16%
15.5.8 Basecourse finish
The surface of the base course shall be finished to the levels, falls
and crossfalls shown on the Drawings subject to the following.
i.) The level shall be within + or - 12mm of the levels shown on

the Drawings.
ii.) The falls shall be within 19% of the falls shown on the
Drawings.
iii.) The smoothness shall be such that departures from a 3

metre straight edge laid in any direction shall not exceed
12mm..
The surface of the basecourse shall be inspected and approved by

the Engineer before bitumen paving is commenced.
Immediately before applying the priming coat, the surface of the

basecourse shall be brushed free from dust and loose stones. The
material for the priming coat shall be a cutback of M.C.O. grade or
other approved.
Approximately 30 minutes before applying the priming coat the

surface of the basecourse should be made slightly damp by use of a
water spray.
The priming coat shall be applied at a temperature of 100-150

degrees Fahrenheit at a rate of 0.60 litres per square meter.
After application of the primer graded premix of 30mm to 40mm

compacted thickness shall be used, with a seal coat.
15.5.9 Bitumen macadam surfacing
A single course open graded premix of 30mm to 40mm compacted

thickness shall be used, with a seal coat.
Course aggregate shall be crushed blacktrap with particles having a

cubicle shape to the Engineer’s approval and shall be washed free
from dust.
The Coarse aggregate gradings shall be:-
Sieve Size Percentage passing
19 mm 100
13 mm 60 - 100
10 mm 45 - 70
6 mm 30 - 50
4 mm 25 - 40
8 mm 15 - 25
200 mm 2- 5

The binder shall be shellmac MC/RC2 or other approved.

The percentage by weight of binder shall be 4.5%. Mixing
shall be in an approved mixer and mixing shall proceed until
the stone is evenly coated with binder. The temperature (at
mixing) shall be within the following range:-
Aggregate
Binder
Mixing Temperature 50o 95o F 125o -
150o F
The laying temperature shall be not less than 20o F below the
mixing temperature.
The mix shall be spread evenly over the primed surface and
shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling with a minimum of 6
passes. A smooth-wheeled roller of not less than 5 tonnes
weight and with rear wheel loading of 0.25 kg per square
millimeter width shall be used.
15.5.10 Rolling
Any longitudinal joints shall be rolled first, after which rolling shall
start longitudinally at the side and proceed towards the center of the
carpet. Each pass of the roller shall overlap the preceding one by at
least one half width of the rear wheel. Alternate passes of the roller
shall be of varying length. Immediately following initial compaction,
the surface shall be checked with a straight edge to ensure that it
meets the surface finish requirements. Minor variations shall be
corrected by rolling, but major imperfections shall be compacted by
adding or taking away mix while it is still workable.
15.5.11 Surface finish
The surface of the bitumen macadam shall be finished to the levels,

contours and slopes shown on the Drawings with the following
tolerances:-
i). The level shall be within + or - 6mm. of the level shown on the
drawings.
ii). The gradient shall be within 10% of the gradient shown on the
drawings.
iii). The smoothness shall be such that departures from a 3 metre

straight edge laid in any direction shall not exceed 6mm.
15.5.12 Seal coat
The seal coat shall consist of precoated fines consisting of crushed

blackstrap stone graded from 3mm to dust, or coarse sand. The
binder shall consist of 4.5% by weight of MC/RC2. The seal coat
shall be spread and brushed into the macadam surface at the rate of

180 square metres per tonne and compacted by rolling as for the
macadam.

PART 2
BUILDING SANITATION

1.0 PLUMBING
1.1 Statutory Requirements

All plumbing work, pipework and sanitary installations shall be carried out in
accordance with the Regulations of the National Water and Sewerage Corporation or
other Local Water Authority. Where no such Authority exists, then such work shall be
carried out in accordance with the directions of the Project Manager.
1.2 Galvanised Steel Pipes and Fittings
Galvanised Steel Pipes shall comply with BS 1387 Class ‘B’ except where the Water
Authority requires otherwise.
Fittings shall be galvanized malleable iron to BS 143 and BS 1256.
All pipes and fittings shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer.
Galvanised steel water tubes shall have screwed and socketted joints put together
with ties and red leads and fixed to walls with approved patter clips spaced at not
more than 1750 mm apart. Made-bends shall be formed cold and shall wherever
possible be used in preference to elbows. Elbows shall be of the round kind where
possible unless otherwise specified, pipes shall be fixed in chases in walls. Where
pipes are required to be fixed to the wall surfaces, they shall be fixed with approved
holder-bats 25 mm clear of the finished wall surface.
1.3 PPR pipes and fittings

The PPR pipes and fittings shall be produced from polypropylene Random type PN25
material or equivalent which has high molecular weight and excellent creep
resistance.
The installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendation with
provision for expansion, including all necessary fittings and accessories. The pipe
shall be tested at 15 bars for one hour, immediately after the preliminary test, the
main test shall be carried out at 10bars for 24 Hours. There shall be no leakage of
any kind not even in the form of moisture in either of the tests. The installation must
be perfectly tight.

1.4 Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Vent Pipes

Coated cast iron soil waste and vent pipes and fittings shall be of a medium
quality to comply with BS 416 with ears cast on and shall be obtained from an
approved manufacturer.
Pipes shall have spigot and socketted joints with a tarred hempen gasket
rammed down the sockets and lead wool well caulked in, and shall be fixed to
walls with clout rose-headed nails and 38 mm gas barrel distance pieces and
hardwood plugs built into the wall. All junctions and bends on exposed cast
iron soil and waste pipes shall be fitted with access doors and screwed
inspection eyes. The top end of all vent pipes shall be fitted with a galvanized
domical wire grating covered with 32 S.W.G. x 20 Mesh copper wire mosquito
gauze.
1.4.1 uP.V.C. Soil Systems

u. P.V.C soil pipe and fittings shall be supplied and fixed as indicated on the
drawings and Schedules.
The pipes and fittings shall comply in all respects to British Standard 4514
and shall where appropriate bear the British Standard Kite Mark as Terrain
Manufacture or equal and approved.
1.5 Tubing Generally

All pipes shall whenever possible be located in such a manner as to minimize
risk of mechanical damage and shall be readily accessible for inspection and
repair, but shall nevertheless not appear unsightly.
All waste pipes shall be fitted with sweep-tees with screwed cleaning caps at
each change of direction. All services shall be connected to sanitary fittings,
tanks, etc. with approved union connectors. The exposed ends of all overflow
pipes shall be mosquito-proofed by means of 32 S.W.G x 20 mesh copper
wire gauze, tightly bound on with stout wire.
1.6 Water Service and Distribution Pipework

Service pipes shall be laid from the stop-valves at the boundary of the site to
a storage tank; stop-valves being inserted in all positions as required by the
Project Manager and all pipe work inside the building shall be securely fixed
in position.
1.7 Branches to Drinking Water Draw-off Taps

Branches to drinking water draw-off taps shall be taken directly from the
service pipe to drinking water draw off points in the building.
1.8. Delivery Pipes

Delivery on distribution pipes shall be fitted with stop valves and shall be
taken from the storage cistern to feed draw-off taps over baths, lavatory
basins, water closet flushing cisterns, etc. and the hot water system.

1.9 Running, Jointing and Fixing Pipes

Branches taken from vertical services and delivery pipes shall have a slight
rise or fall as the case may require for the release of air to cisterns or taps
and to enable the system to be drained. Pipe runs shall be set out to avoid
traps and air locks.
Cold water piping shall not run in close proximity to hot water services. Where
this cannot be avoided then both hot and cold water pipes shall be lagged.
1.10 Stops, Taps and Ball Valves

Stop-valves shall be provided and fixed on the service pipes at the entry to
the buildings, at entry to water storage cisterns and on the delivery pipes
close to water storage cisterns. Bib-taps shall be provided to the direction and
approval of the Project Manager and shall be marked ‘hot’ and ‘cold’
All ball valves shall comply with BS 1212 and all copper float balls shall
comply with BS 1968. Brass taps and valves shall comply with BS 1010- 2.
1.11 Storage Cisterns

Storage tanks or cisterns shall be provided where shown. All storage cisterns
shall be provided with galvanized mild-steel covers with rim turned down not
less than 50 mm. The covers shall exclude entry of dust, debris, mosquitoes
and vermin.
Storage cisterns shall have overflow pipes the cross section area of which
shall not be less than 50% in excess of that of the supply pipe and shall be
fixed at a height of not less than 25 mm above top water level, but below ball-
valve inlet and shall be arranged to discharge externally. The outlet end of
the overflow pipes shall be fitted with 32 S.W.G. x 20 mesh copper wire
gauze of other approved material to prevent entry of mosquitoes and vermin.
Ball valves shall be provided and fixed to cisterns at a distance not less than
50 mm above the top of the overflow pipe.
There shall be uPVC tanks 4NO. of 5,000L capacities complete with

provisions for overflow, mains supply, connection float valve.
1.12. Testing of Water Mains and Services

The service pipe from the Water Authority’s main to the storage tank and all
other terminal points inside the building shall be tested at a hydraulic
pressure of not less than twice the working pressure in the WaterAuthority’s
main and the same pressure shall be maintained without drop and without
further pumping for a period of not less than thirty minutes. The down service
pipes from the storage tanks to the various fittings shall be tested throughout
to a pressure specified by the Water Authority.
1.13 Sanitary Fittings General

All sanitary fittings shall be made of hard, smooth, non-absorbent and in
corrodible material conforming to the latest Uganda Standards or BS.
All fittings shall be fitted with traps with approved seals and where the trap is
not an integral part of the fitting, a separate trap shall be connected between

the fitting and the pipe. Separate traps shall be made of cast iron, galvanized
iron lead, brass or copper and shall have a minimum seal of 35 mm and shall
be fitted with a screwed cleaning-eye.
1.14 Water Closets

All water-closet suits shall be of approved material and shall comprise a
flushing cistern and a pan are made to work together as a system and shall
not be made up of pans and cisterns unsuitably selected.
Water closet pans shall be fixed to floors with large-gauge gunmetal screws
and approved proprietary wall plugs. The brackets for water-waste preventer
cistern shall be built into walls or secured with screws and approved
proprietary wall plugs, and where cisterns are supported by lugs these shall
be fixed by screws and proprietary wall plugs.
Water-waste preventers for high-level suites shall be set with the top of each
cistern 2.15m above floor level.
1.15 Urinals
Urinals shall consist of glazed fireclay urinals, stalls, slab or bowl types. Slab
or stall types shall not be less than 1.1m high and shall be fitted immediately
above the edge of a glazed half round channel not less than 100 mm internal
diameter and laid to a fall of not less than 1 in 40. such channel shall
discharge into a salt-glazed ware or virtuous enameled trap with a water seal
of not less than 50 mm in depth. Traps shall have an internal diameter of not
less than 50 mm for a single stall or bowl and not less than 75 mm for a
range of stalls or bowls.
Channel shall be provided with approved lead traps with removable cast
gunmetal domical gratings.
1.16 Baths, Lavatory Basins and Sinks

Baths, lavatory basins, sinks etc shall be of approved material and shall be
provided complete with all fittings and accessories.
Lavatory basins or sinks shall be supported on suitable brackets which shall

be built 115 mm into walls or fixed with heavy screws and approved
proprietary wall plugs.

2.0 DRAIN LAYING
2.1 Drainage & Sanitation Rules

All drainage work is to be carried out in accordance with the Uganda Code for
Sanitary Installations in Buildings
2.2 Excavation
Excavation shall be made for manholes, lines of pipe and other works to the
depth as shown on the Drawings, or as shall be required by the Project
Manager or as necessary to permit proper execution of the work, should
there be erroneous over-excavation to levels below those required for drains,
foundations or other works, refilling and making up of levels shall be carried
out in concrete of approved mix and no other material shall be used for this
purpose.
All excavations shall be kept clear of water or mud by approved means. Sides
of excavations shall be adequately supported by timbering or other means
approved by the Project Manager.
2.3 Laying Lines of Pipes

The Contractor shall provide and fix properly painted sight rails which will be
checked by the Project Manager before any pipes are laid, and there shall be
no fewer than three sights rails in position at one time on every length of pipe
under construction.
Boning rods shall be provided and wooden pegs driven into the bottom of the
trench at required intervals, the top of each peg being set at the exact level of
the proposed invert of the pipe. The alignment and level of each pipe laid
must be tested by inserting the shoe of the boning rod.
2.4 Materials
The quality and description of all materials and appliances including pipes,
cement, etc. used for construction or repair of any drain shall be approved by
the Local Authority or the Project Manager.
2.5 Size of Pipe and Fall

Drains shall be of adequate internal diameters and shall be laid with falls that
ensure a self-cleansing velocity viz (a velocity of flow of 0.76 m per second
when the pipe is 25% full).
2.6 Minimum Cover to Pipes

Drains shall, whenever possible, have sufficient cover which shall, excepting
cast iron and steel pipes, comply with the following table:-
Location Minimum Cover (mm)

Streets 110
Carriage drives or yards used by light traffic 800
Elsewhere than mentioned above 500

2.7 Minimum Cover to Pipes other then cast Iron and Steel
Where in case of pipes other than cast iron and steel it is not possible to have
the minimum cover such drains shall be entirely encased in concrete mix 1: 3:
6 not less than 150 mm in thickness all round the drain pipe.
2.8 Foundation for Drains

Drain pipes shall be laid with their barrels on a good, even, solid bed, free of
irregularities. If so required by the Local Authority or the Project Manager,
drain pipes shall be laid on an even bed of concrete or supported upon
concrete piers spaced at approved intervals.
(a) Pipes shall under no circumstances be laid supported by their sockets

but a hole shall be cut in the bed to allow the socket to hang. Such
socket holes shall be filled solid with earth or concrete after testing the
pipes.
(b) Pipes shall not be laid on temporarysupports pending casting a concrete

bed or filling the pipe. If a concrete bed is required, it shall be placed
before the pipe is laid and where such pipe is laid on or in green
concrete, such concrete shall be sufficiently firm not to allow any
movement of the pipe.
(c) If drain pipes of any material other thancast iron or steel are to be laid on
made or unstable ground, such drain pipes shall be laid on beds of
concrete mix 1: 3: 6 not less than 150 mm thick and thedrain pipes shall
be haunched with concrete mix 1: 3: 6 for the full width of the bed and to
the crown of the pipe.
(d) Where cast iron or steel drain pipes are to be laid on made or unstable
ground, such drain pipes shall be supported on concrete (mix 1: 3: 6)
bed not less than 500 mm wide by 150 mm thick and where necessary
the bed shall be reinforced adequately. In case of pipes laid over and
above ground surface, they shall be supported on concrete, steel or
other approved piers spaced at not less than 2.75 m ( 8’0”) centers on
concretefoundations.
The piers shall have for securing the pipes, a cast iron, steel or other
approved plate fixed on top and an inverted ‘U’ steel strap loosely around the
pipe and with both ends firmly fixed into the top of the pier rollers and an
expansion joint shall be used.
2.9. Drain Junctions

Every branch drain or tributary drain shall, at the point of junction join the rain
drain obliquely in the direction of the flow of the main drain and at half
channel eight above the main channel. All bends and turnings shall be
uniformly curved and any alteration in the size of the drain shall be properly
tapered and of good shape.
2.10. Provision of Inspection Chambers

Appropriate inspection chambers shall be provided:
a) at every point in a drain where two or more branch drains converge;
b) at every point in a drain where there shall occur any angle, bend,
deviation from a direct alignment, change in gradient, difference in level

or alteration in size; provided that pipe bends shall be allowed without

inspection chambers for the connection of soil pipes, gullies, soil waste
fittings to a drain, if such bends are surrounded by not less than 100 mm
thick concrete mix 1: 3: 6
c) at such points that no part of a drain shall be more than 15.25 m distant
from the center of an inspection chamber without a rodding eye.
Provided that no connection or bend shall exceed 6 m in length measured

from a gully trap, soil-pipe or soil-fitting, or the center of an inspection
chamber without a rodding eye.
Provided further that in sewers exceeds 150 mm in diameter it shall be

permissible to provide inspection chamber of manholes at such points that no
part of such sewer shall be more than 75 m distant in the length of such
sewer from the center of an inspection chamber or manhole.
2.11 Construction and sizes of Inspection Chambers

Every inspection chamber shall be of such internal dimensions as the
authority shall require, save that the finished internal horizontal dimension of
inspection chambers shall be governed by the number of inlets and that of
any event the minimum internal dimensions of these chambers shall be:-
Internal Dimensions
Depth of invert
Length Width
(i) up to 0.5 0.5m 0.5m
(ii) 0.5 m – 1.0m 0.6m 0.5m
(iii) 1.0 m – 1.5m 1.1m 0.6m
(iv) over 1.5m 1.1 m 0.8m
2.12. Inspection Chambers in Buildings

Inspection chambers located in buildings shall be built in walls not less than
225 mm thick rendered in cement and sand (1: 3) trowelled smooth and
finished not less than 20 mm thick internally. The cover shall be of the double
cover screw down type on rubber or other watertight and airtight seating and
shall be made and maintained watertight and airtight.
2.13 Inspection Chamber Covers

Every inspection chamber of manhole shall be fitted with a strong, movable
airtight cast iron manhole cover and frame of fine quality metal and of
adequate size and approved design and construction, fixed not lower than the
surface of the adjoining ground or floor and so that surface or rain water
cannot course over it.
2.14 Channels and Benching in Inspection Chambers

Branch drains shall discharge into the main channel by means of splay
channel bends. A drain pipe whether it branch or main, shall not project
inside the walls of an inspection chamber by more than 50 mm.
Channels shall be of salt-glazed or glazed fireclay ware or other approved

material of half-round or three-quarter cross section as may be required to
prevent riding or splashing. In-situ channels shall have the same cross-
section and shall be finished in cement mortar (1: 3) trowelled smooth. Sides

of channels in every inspection chamber shall be brought up vertically to a

height not less than the diameter of the drain pipes and in any event
sufficiently high to prevent riding or splashing from branch drains.
Benching shall be in concrete mix (1: 3: 6) and channels at an angle not less
o o
than 20 and not more than 30 from the horizontal and rendered with cement
mortar (1: 3) not less than 15 mm thick, trowelled smooth.
2.15 Deep Inspection Chamber of Means of Access

Deep chamber shall be provided with adequate vertical shafts, not less than
2
675 m and shall be provided with step-irons firmly built in the walls at vertical
intervals of 300 mm and staggered at 190 mm center to center.
2.16 Ventilation
A drain shall be properly ventilated with at least one ventilating pipe not less
than 100 mm diameter in case of the main drain and in the case of a branch
drain, not less than the diameter of the branch drain itself. The ventilating
pipe shall be immediately connected to the branch drain pipe. The vent pipe
shall be located as near as practicable to the building and shall be brought to
such a height so as to effectually prevent any escape of foul air from the drain
into the building in the vicinity thereof. The top end of the ventilating pipe shall
not be less than 1 m above the eaves level of any adjoining roof and not less
than 1.5 m above the top of any opening into a building within an
unobstructed distance of 6m horizontally.
The end of ventilating pipes shall be adequately covered with an approved

copper or aluminum mosquito wire gauze securely fixed on.
2.17 Soil Pipe Materials

Soil or vent pipes shall be constructed of cast iron, Plastic or other equal and
approved materials complying with the relevant BS or US.
(i) wherever a soil or vent pipe is located it shall be permanently and easily
accessible for inspection and maintenance.
(ii) No soil or vent pipe shall pass through any habitable room unless
enclosed in a duct constructed in such manner and of such material as
shall be approved by the authority.
(iii) If any soil or vent pipe is fixed in a chase or duct movable access covers
shall be provided in such a chase or duct at all inspection points in the
soil or vent pipe.
(iv) Any soil or vent pipe inside a building shall be of cast iron or other
approved material and shall have airtight socket joints.
(v) Soil or vent pipes shall not be encased in the thickness of solid walls.
(vi) Soil pipes shall be circular and of an internal diameter of not less than
100 mm and shall be continued up without diminution in diameter and
without any bend or angle being formed in such soil pipe to such a
height and in such a position as is required under these rules.
(vii) Inspection eyes shall be provided at all bends and junctions in soil pipes.
No right-angled junctions shall be made in soil pipes and branch soil
pipes shall join others obliquely in the direction of flow. All bends and
turnings shall be truly curved and shall not reduce the internal diameter
of the pipes.

2.18 Anti-Siphonage to Soil Pipes

Soil pipes receiving discharge from more than one soil- water fitting shall
have the following provisions:-
(i) Traps of the soil-water fittings shall be ventilated by an anti-siphon pipe

which shall have an internal diameter of not less than 50 mm and shall
be connected to the arm of the soil-pipe at a point within 750 mm from
the highest point of the trap on the side of the water seal nearest to the
soil pipe.
(ii) Anti-siphon pipes shall either have open ends as high as the top of the
soil-pipe OR be carried into soil pipes at points above the highest
connections to the same soil-pipes.
(iii) Anti-siphon pipes shall be of cast iron, plastic or other equal and
approved materials complying with the relevant BS for the main soil-
pipe and shall be jointed appropriately.
2.19 Channels or Open Drains

(I) Channels or open drains for theconveyance of foul water shall be semi-
circular in cross-section and of salt-glazed vitreous enameled clay ware
and masonry lined with cement and sand (1: 3), 15 mm thick trowelled
smooth. All channels shall be in concrete (1: 3: 6) not less in width than
150 mm greater than the finished width of the channels and not less
than 100 mm in thickness. Where such channel is greater in depth than
the radius the side and top shall be of glazed tiles or rendered with
cement mortar (1: 3) not less than 15 mm thick trowelled smooth.
(II) Channels or Open Drains
The permitted length of channels shall be as follows:-
(a) an external channel for the conveyance of waste-water only to an

external gully trap, shall not exceed 2m.
(b) A channel or open drain for the conveyance of foul water from
premises used or to be used as from a slaughter house, stable,
cowshed, or other places of like nature to an external gully trap,
shall not exceed 2 m in length.
(c) Internal channels shall be permitted only in premises described
here below and can be of unlimited length :-
(i) premises mentioned in paragraph (6) above.

(ii) Laundries or rooms used forablutionary purposes provided
they are not within a dwelling.
(iii) Ice factories or aerated waterfactories.
(iv) Laboratories as long as suchchannels do not connect two or
more rooms and do not receive the discharge from any waste
water fitting other than from a sink used or used solely for
laboratory purposes.
(v) Institutional kitchens or other premises approved by the
authority for the reception and disposal of floor washings.

2.20. Waste-Pipes and Waste Water Fittings

(a) Waste-pipes and overflow pipes shall be made of cast iron, wrought
iron, copper, plastic or other material approved by the Authority.
Waste pipes and over flow pipes more than 1.25 m long shall be fixed
o
at angles not greater than 70 from the horizontal without antisiphonage
measures being provided.
(b) Waste pipes shall be properly trapped by of an efficient siphon trap,

located as near as practicable to the point of which such waste-pipe or
over-flow pipe is attached to the waste-water fitting.
Under special circumstances untrapped waste pipe may be and shall

not exceed 2 m in length. Such untrapped waste pipe shall discharge
externally into an open channel not less than 600 mm in length.
(c) Waste-pipes shall have internal diameters of not less than 40 mm save
in case of a lavatory basin waste-pipe which can be 35mm internal
diameter. Waste-pipes which receive the discharge of more than one
waste water fitting shall have internal diameters of not less than 50
mm. However waste-pipes receiving the discharge from not more than
two lavatory basins may be of 40 mm internal diameter.
(d) Waste-pipes shall be taken through external walls at the nearest

practicable points and shall discharge over open channels or trapped
gullies. Waste-pipes shall discharge at heights of not more than 75
mm above the invert level of channels or above the trapped gullies as
to minimize splashing.
(e) Waste-pipes not exceeding 3.65 m in length shall be vented from a

point as near to the traps as possible and such venting shall be
contrived as per the provisions for anti-siphon pipes.
(f) No right-angled branch joints shall be made in waste-pipes. Every

branch waste pipes shall joint another waste-pipe obliquely in the
direction of the flow of such waste pipe and all bends and turnings shall
be truly curved. Whenever required, adequate and satisfactory means
of access shall be provided at junctions or bends in waste-pipes.
2.21 Rain Water Pipes
Rain water down pipes shall be solely for disposal of rainwater from the roof
buildings and shall not be used for the purpose of carrying soil-waste, waste-
water or be used as a ventilating pipe, anti-siphon pipe to any drain, soil pipe
or waste-pipe.
2.22 Overflow Pipes

Overflow pipes from any water storage cisterns, flushing cisterns or water-
waste preventers shall not be connected to drains, soil-pipes, waste drain
pipe, ventilating pipes or soil-water fittings. Overflow pipes shall discharge
into external open air and whenever possible in a conspicuous position.
Overflow pipes shall be protectedagainst the ingress of mosquitoes, insects
and other vermin.

2.23 Requirement of Gully Traps
Gully traps shall whenever possible provided in suitable positions outside the
building to receive effluent foul or waste water prior to connecting to the drain
pipe. Gully traps shall be:-
(a) Of good glazed stoneware, cast iron, pitch fibre or other approved
material.
(b) Provided with a water seal of not less than 65 mm in depth and an outlet
of not less than 100 mm diameter.
(c) Wall and securely fixed in a concrete (mix 1:3:6) surrounding not less
than 100 mm thick shall be cast iron, mild steel and with the top finished
protected against the ingress of surface or storm with a solid Kerb,
smooth on the inside, at least 100 mm high above the adjoining ground
level to prevent the ingress of surface or storm water.
(d) Fitted with a cast iron, steel, concrete or other approved movable grating
or cover.
2.24. Provision of Grease Traps
Whenever liquid waste of a fatty character is to be discharged into a drain or

sewer, an approved grease trap shall be provided at a point preceding in-let
of the drain or sewer. The grease trap shall be fitted with a cast iron, zinc,
galvanized iron or other approved tray or of such an approved character
perforated or of a sieve for the liquid to filler through prior to discharge into
the drain or sewer.
2.25. Septic Tanks and Cesspool Biological Filters

Septic tanks, cesspools and other works for the treatment, reception or
disposal of sewage shall :-
(a) not be constructed under any buildings or nor within 3 m of any

building or plot boundary; nor within 30.5 m of any well, spring or
stream of water used or likely to be used , by man for drinking or
domestic purposes or for manufacturing drinks. Nor be constructed in
such a position so as to render any such water liable to pollution.
(b) Be constructed in such a manner and in such a position as to afford
means of access thereto for the purpose of cleaning the same and
removing the contents thereof.
(c) Be provided with sufficient cover and be so protected as to prevent any
nuisance from emanating therefrom and prevent the breeding of
mosquitoes in connection therewith.

3.0. SUBTERRANEAN STORM AND SURFACE WATER DRAINAGE
3.1 Site
The drainage of sites and roofs of buildings shall comply with the following:-
(a) The sub-soil of the site of the building shall, where the depress of the site
renders it necessary, be effectively drained by means of earthenware field pipes
or other suitable pipes properly laid to a suitable outfall, or other manner which
the authority may require.
(b) The roof of the building shall be so constructed as to drain effectively to suitable
and sufficient gutters on trough, unless a splash apron in concrete or other
approved impervious material sufficient to protect the foundations of buildings is
provided.
Where gutters or troughs are used they shall be connected to a sufficient

number of downpipes constructed so as to carry away all water from the roof
without causing dampness to any part of the walls or foundations of buildings
and shall cause such water to be carried off in a manner approved by the
Authority.
(c) Provision shall be made for carrying off any surface water of a building when
desirable and in a manner approved by the Authority.
(d) Rain water pipes or trunks for the purpose of conveying any water from a roof
shall not be connected to discharge directly into a closed drain but shall be
caused to discharge directly into the open air, into an open channel, pavement
drain or over a properly trapped gully, or into such gully above the level of the
water in the trap thereof.
3.2 Roof
Eaves gutters and downpipes shall be of galvanized iron, steel, cast iron, or other
equally suitable materials approved by the Authority and shall conform in all respects
to the relevant BS or US Specification. In an as much as is practicable, a rain water
harvesting system shall be installed on buildings to conserve the rain water and
control floods. The design and particular specifications shall be provided in the
contract documents, where rain water harvesting system has been provided for.
3.3. Surface water

All eaves gutters shall be borne and supported by approved brackets not more than
1m apart, and shall be properly aligned so as to provide continuous and even fall to
the point of discharge. Discharge or outlet points shall be spaced at not more than
9.15 m center to center.
3.4. Drains, Sewers and channels for surface or storm water

Materials for the construction of drains, sewers and channels for the surface or storm
water drainage shall conform to the specification in the Building Byelaws. Sewers and
drains shall be laid to suitable falls, complying wherever practicable with the following
requirements:
Diameter of pipe (mm) 100 125 150 175 225 300

Minimum Fall 1:50 1:60 1:75 1:120 1:150 1:200
3.5 Silt Traps and Grills or Gratings

Before even inlet to a storm water sewer an approved silt trap shall be provided.
Metal or other approved grills or gratings shall be provided in every system of drains
and channels for stormwater to retain all solid matter at a point as near as practicable
to where such system connects with the public sewer. All stormwater shall pass
through such grill or gratings which shall be easily accessible for cleaning and if
necessary shall be built in conjunction with an inspection chamber.

PART 3
ELECTRICAL SERVICES

1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 General Electrical Requirements specified in this technical specification are in
addition to the requirements of the General Conditions of the Contract and specific
requirements set to the particular project in the Specification and Bill of Quantities.
1.2 The supply, erection, installation, testing and commissioning of the complete Low
Voltage (400/230V) supply network electrical installation services and street lights
as shown on drawings, schedules and described in the Specification and Bill of
Quantities for each work shall be understood as included.
1.3 The procurements, installations and other works described in this specification and
other related design documents are for manufacture, testing, supply, delivery to
site, execution, demonstrating, commissioning and maintaining of the specified
system to complete and fully operational condition.
1.4 Any work whether shown or not on the drawings and/or described in this
specification but which can reasonably be inferred as necessary for the completion
of installations and proper operation of the systems will also form part of the extent
of the contract.
1.5 Workmanship and the method of installation shall conform to IEE Wiring
Regulation Sixteenth Edition and Uganda Code for Electrical Installations and
Equipment in Buildings. All work shall be performed by skilled tradesmen to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager. Any work that does not conform to the best
standard practice will be removed and reinstated at the contractor’s expense.
1.6 Permits, Certificates or Licenses must be held by all tradesmen for the type of
work in which they are involved and such Permits, Certificates or Licenses exist
under Government Legislation.
1.7 The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the works on site with
other trades. The Contractor shall plan the installation before the work is
commenced and he shall ensure correct installation to the design intent during the
course of construction. Any work which has to be re-done due to negligence in this
respect shall not constitute an extra to the contract.
1.8 The Contractor shall produce and submit shop drawings for the inspection of the
Project Manager prior to any installations as required in the General conditions of
the contract.
1.9 Copies of all shop drawings shall be submitted to the Project Manager for
approval. Thereafter the contractor shall submit copies of approved working
drawings.
1.10The form (transparencies/paper copies) and number of sets of shop drawings to be

submitted to the Project Manager shall be as specified in the General Conditions
of the Contract.
1.11The Contractor shall prepare and submit complete ‘as-installed’ drawings of all
installations for the inspections of the Project Manager. All ‘as-installed’ drawings
have to be approved by the Project Manager.
1.12The form (transparencies/paper copies/diskettes) and number of sets of final

approved ‘as-installed’ drawings to be submitted to the Client shall be as specified
in the General conditions of the Contract.
1.13After completion and the preliminary handing over of the systems, the Contractor
shall supply to the Project Manager complete relevant operation, maintenance and
data manuals and instructions of all systems and equipment in English.

1.14 The Contractor shall be responsible for the work, materials and equipment
provided/executed under the contract. The Contractor shall guarantee that all
materials and equipment of the systems are suitable and of sufficient capacity to
meet the specified performance requirements set for them in the related design
documents. The Guarantee and Maintenance period shall be as stated in the
Particular or Special Conditions of Contract.
1.15 Electrical materials shall be stored in locked rooms or containers in their original
packing. Light fixtures, sockets, switches, boards and the like shall be stacked on
shelving, ensuring that no damage is likely to occur by stacking one over the other.
Different materials shall be stacked at different locations.
1.16 The Contractor shall comply with all statutory requirements and regulations issued
by any Uganda Authority within whose area of jurisdiction the project site is
located.

2.0 ELECTRICAL WORK

The scope of the electrical work to be carried out by the Contractor shall be stated in the
contract documents and shall generally comprise the following :
2.1 Complete installation of all cable routes including cable trays, raceways and
ladders, trunking and all necessary conduits for surface and flush mounted
installations and cabling of 400/ 230V networks.
2.2 Complete installation of Main Distribution Board (MDB), all Sub Main Distribution
Boards (SMDBs), Final Distribution Boards (FDBs) and motor control centers
(MCCs).
2.3 Complete installation of earthing and lightning protection systems.
2.4 Complete installation of all luminaires including normal luminaires as well as self-
contained emergency luminaires.
2.5 Complete installation of diesel generating system where required.

3.0 RELATED BUILDER’S WORK

3.1 All builder’s work including concrete foundations and support structures necessary
and required for the electrical equipment and service shall be provided whether
such works are shown in full details on the design drawings or not.
3.2 The Contractor shall provide reinforced concrete foundations for all floor mounted
equipment and machinery in accordance with requirements and instructions of the
equipment manufacturer.
3.3 The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager fully dimensioned builder’s
work drawings showing all foundations, bases, and holes required and the overall
sizes and masses of the plant concerned.
3.4 The Contractor shall provide necessary concrete foundations and supports for
items requiring supports, such as hangers for conduits, cable trays, etc. Support
structures shall be constructed of steel of adequate strength, bolted or welded
together and painted with two coats of lead primer. Unless otherwise specified,
welding of supports to the building structure steelworks is not permitted.
3.5 All methods of anchoring and fastening to building structure shall be detailed and
submitted to the Project Manager for approval prior to any such installations.
3.6 Foundations shall be designed to fit the shape of the complete base and shall
conform to the contour designated by the manufacturers. All necessary anchor
bolts, washers, templates, etc. shall be furnished complete and bolts shall be built
into foundations with properly sized sleeves.
3.7 Vibration isolation units shall be provided to minimize the intensity of vibration and
noise to the building structure as specified.

4.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS/SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR

EQUIPMENT
4.1 All materials and equipment shall be capable for continuous and prolonged
operation in the prevailing climatic conditions of UGANDA. When selecting
materials and equipment, the effect of sunshine, thunderstorms and the
impurities within the air shall be taken into account.
4.2 Particular attention is to be paid to the effects of high or low altitude. Low
density of air decreases insulating and heat transfer capacities of all electrical
equipment. Consult manufacturers of all materials and equipment to obtain
valid de-rating factors.

5.0 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY

5.1 All electrical equipment, accessories and fittings shall be designed and
manufactured to operate continuously in the electricity supply system of Licensed
Service Provider mains supply or emergency supply from the stand-by diesel
generating set having the following characteristics:
a) Voltage 400/230 volts

b) Phase, PME (Protective Multiple Earth) system
c) Frequency 50 Hz
d) Neutral Solidly earthed

6.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

6.1 The whole of the Electrical works shall be carried out in compliance with:
a) Uganda Code for Electrical Installations and Equipment in Buildings.

b) The latest Regulation issued by the Electricity Regulatory Authority;
c) The relevant Regulation of BS 7671:1992 and Amendment No.1,1994
(AMD 8536)
“Requirements for Electrical Installations” (IEE wiring Regulations 16th
Edition);
d) IEC publication 60364 -Electrical Installations of Buildings Part 7-712:
Particular requirements for special installations of Solar Photovoltaic (PV)
power supply systems;
e) And the latest relevant recommendations of the International Electro-
technical commission (IEC) and other approved national standards.
6.2 Except where otherwise indicated in the specification, the contract works and
all manufactured items shall comply with the relevant BS or US as appropriate.
In each case the latest edition of such specifications shall apply. Should it be
necessary to order equipment covered by other National or International
Standards, the approval of the Project Manager must be obtained, in writing,
before completing the tender documents.
6.3 The Contractor shall submit for the Project Manager’s evaluation standards,
catalogues, manuals and drawings of all proposed materials and equipment to
present the proposed equipment. The contractor shall also, prior to any
procurement, obtain the Project Manager’s approval for any departures and
deviations from the final design drawings and specifications.
6.4 Where standards to which equipment and material must comply are cited,
equipment and materials meeting other approved standards may be accepted.
Where materials, appliances and fittings, patented or otherwise, are prescribed,
or the names of manufacturers are given, the intent is only to establish the
quality and required services. Substitutes of equal quality to that specified shall
be accepted subject to prior approval by the Project Manager. Such proposal
by the contractor shall be accompanied with sufficient evidence and
comparison table to demonstrate that, the required critical parameters are of
equivalent standard.
6.5 No order shall be placed by the Contractor for major equipment unless written
approval of the Project Manager has been obtained.
6.6 All materials shall be new, meet the requirements set for them in this
specification and in the General Conditions of the Contract and they shall be
approved according to the contract regulations.
6.7 Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall obtain similar types of
electrical equipment from the same manufacturer wherever practicable. The
components within any equipment shall as far as possible be produced and
assembled by the same manufacturer.
6.8 The Project Manager has the right to reject material or equipment which does
not comply with requirement of the specification. In such case the Contractor
shall provide other materials or equipment that comply with the specification.
6.9 All electrical equipment shall be provided with suitable means of suppressing
radio frequency interference fully in accordance with various requirements
stipulated in relevant international standards. Especially for rotating equipment
and for dimmer systems shall be provided further radio interference
suppression confirming these equipment will in no way cause interference with
the radio communication or any other telecommunication, extra low voltage or

control system.

7.0 POWER INTAKE-UNDERGROUND AND OVERHEAD

7.1 Underground cable ducts for incoming power supply cables and telephone service
cables to buildings, shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor. It shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the underground duct is installed
correctly according to each party’s requirements, and to the purpose. The
Contractor shall liaise closely with Uganda Electricity Distribution type. Ends shall
be carefully trimmed of all Company and Telephone Distribution burrs. Joints shall
be made using adhesive Company to ensure that their requirements supplied or
recommended by the conduit are fully satisfied. It shall be the Contractor’s
manufacturer. responsibility to ensure that adequate information concerning easy
bends, directions or runs, etc., is given before work commences.
7.2 Overhead suspended cables shall be mounted 9.1 Underground cables shall be
PVC insulated, so that the lowest point is at least 2.7m above ground level. The
cables shall be held in position by suitable brackets and strain relief to prevent
mechanical wear and stress of electrical connections. Cables for outdoor exposed
usage, shall be fully UV-resistant.
7.3 Pre-cast concrete and PVC pipes shall comply with BS 3505 BS 5481
respectively.
7.4 Manholes shall be in pre-cast concrete C-20 quality, brick or Class A hollow block-
work as indicated and detailed on the drawings. The manholes shall be laid on a
minimum concrete bed of 150mm, C-20 concrete. Manholes other than pre-cast
concrete shall be rendered internally and externally with two coats of cement
mortar. Joints of pre-cast concrete manholes shall be flush pointed. Manholes
covers shall be in cast iron cover and frames or C-25 pre-cast concrete as detailed
on drawings.

8.0 CONDUITS FOR INTERNAL WIRE DRAWING

8.1 All metal conduits shall be medium gauge and shall be laid in straight and
symmetricallines. The end of all conduits shall be carefully reamed to remove
all burrs and sharp edges after the screw threads have been cut. The ends of
the conduits shall be butt welded solidly in all couplings and where conduits
terminate in switch fuses, fuse boards, adaptable boxes etc., they shall be
connected thereto by means of smooth bore male brass brushes, compression
washers and sockets.
8.2 All bends shall be made on site to suit site conditions and not more than two
right angle bends shall be permitted without the interposition of a draw box. No
tees, elbows or bends will be permitted, unless specifically mentioned in the
specification or on the drawings.
8.3 All PVC conduits shall be of high impact PVC type. Ends shall be carefully
trimmed of all burrs. Joints shall be made using adhesive supplied or
recommended by the conduit manufacturer.

9.0 CABLES (SINGLE AND MULTI-CORE) AND

CONDUCTORS
9.1 Underground cables shall be PVC insulated, PVC bedded, steel wire unarmoured-
armoured and PVC served overall. Unless, specifically indicated otherwise, all
cables shall have multi-strand copper conductors.
9.2 Cables shall be in accordance with Uganda Code for Electrical Installations and
Equipment in Buildings.and shall be of approved manufacture in accordance with
BS 6004,6007&6346 or other appropriate BS,IEC or manufacturer’s standard and
specification and the current carrying capacity of the conductors shall be according
to Uganda Code for Electrical Installations and Equipment in Buildingsand the
relevant tables in the IEE Wiring Regulations 16th edition.
9.3 All internal wiring shall be in PVC insulated cables and /or conductors and colour
identification shall be in accordance with the relevant Clause of Uganda Code for
Electrical Installations and Equipment in Buildings.
9.4 Underground cables shall be at least 0.6m below the surface and be indicated with
markers (coloured plastic tape, minimum 50mm wide or lining with bricks or slates,
0.2m above the cable).
9.5 Before cables are laid, the bottom of the trench shall be evenly graded and cleared
of loose stones and shall then be covered with 50mm layer of sand or sieved earth
which shall have been pressed through sieve with a maximum mesh of 13mm.
9.6 The cables shall be carefully laid in the bed without dragging and they shall then
be covered with fine sand or sieved earth in such quantity as to ensure a cover of
75mm after tamping.
9.7 The warning tape shall be coloured yellow/black stripes and bear the following
legend in block black capitals, at regular intervals: “Caution-Electric Cable Below”
It shall be laid at a depth 200mm below final grade.
9.8 Concrete marker posts shall be erected at intervals of 25m and at changes of
directions of cable trenches and throughout the length of cable route. A plate shall
be fixed to the post stating “Buried Cables” and their position marked on the final
“As Installed” drawings.
9.9 Adequate number of ducts shall be provided at points of entry into buildings.
These shall be in form of easy sweep ends, having a bending radius appropriate
to the size of the largest cable but in any case not less than 10 times a cable
diameter.
9.10 After installation and the final tests, all cable ducts will be sealed using fine
resistant materials to the satisfaction of the Project Manager, to prevent ingress
into buildings of water, vermin termites etc.

9.0 MAIN AND SUB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

10.1 The Contractor shall supply and install distribution boards in the positions
indicated on the drawings. All main, sub-main distribution boards shall be
complete with isolator or fused switch as applicable and shall confirm to BS EN
60439. Distribution boards shall be in accordance with Uganda Code for
Electrical Installations and Equipment in Buildings. The Contractor shall submit
detailed drawings of the proposed panel layout for approval of the Project
Manager.
10.2 The distribution boards shall be complete with all necessary earth bonding,
gland-plates, cable entries, fixing brackets and supports for the cables
specified and the locations indicated.
10.3 Distribution boards shall be of the type fully enclosed sheet steel or PVC
cabinets with hinged cover and protection class shall not be less than IP 43.
Each compartment shall be a one standard panel section having the number of
pitch units as detailed in the drawings. Boards shall consist of approved single
double and triple pole moulded -case and/or miniature circuit breakers. The
current rating and type of each panel shall be indicated on the appropriate
distribution boards diagram.
10.4 Consumer units shall comply with BS EN 60439 and shall be provided with an
internal circuit designation chart. These shall be securely fixed ,and equipped
with Perspex or similar covers and shall have space for each outgoing circuit to
give clear identification. Unprotected paper labels will not be accepted.
10.5 Main switchboards and control panels shall be equipped with voltmeter,
ammeter selection switches and indicating lamps. All instruments and
protective relays shall be flush mounted and effectively sealed against ingress
of moisture, dust and insects.
10.6 Moulded-case circuit breakers shall comply with BS EN 60947-2.They shall

have the voltage and current ratings, rated duty, rated short-circuit breaking
capacity and rated short-time withstand current as indicated.
10.7 Miniature circuit-breakers shall comply with BS EN 60898 and shall have the
voltage and current ratings and category of duty and be of the type as
indicated.
10.8 Contactors shall comply with BS EN 60947-4-1 and be electromagnetic

suitable for the control arrangement as indicated.
10.9 The design and arrangement of the panel shall be such as to permit the ready
addition or replacement of incoming and outgoing cables. There shall also be
ready access to any component requiring maintenance including all bolted or
clamped connection.
10.10 Un-used reserve pitch units shall be fitted with moulded plastic cover strips. Full
facilities shall be provided within the panels for the fitting of future additional
circuit breakers. The circuits fed from the distribution board shall be marked on
a card fixed to the inside of the lid. This card must indicate without ambiguity
the location of all the outlets fed form each distribution way and the size of the
fuse or circuit breaker rating. The information must either be typed or printed on
the card, or presented in similar legible manners.
10.11 Distribution and sub-distribution boards, bus bar rating, type of mounting
(surface, flush), etc. shall be indicated in the drawing. The reference number of
the Board shall be used in the Bill.

10.0 WIRING ACCESSORIES, SMALL EQUIPMENT AND

MATERIAL
11.1 Accessory boxes shall comply with BS 4662 or BS 5733 and where they are of
insulating material they shall have the ignitability characteristic ‘P’ as specified
in BS 476.
11.2 Accessory boxes shall be of adequate depth to accommodate the accessories

without causing compression of the cable. Generally boxes shall be 35mm
deep and shall have one fixing lug that is floating so that the final level of the
accessory can be adjusted.
11.3 Front plates of accessories shall be of the material and finish as indicated, but
generally the finish of various types of accessories in the same area shall
match. For flush mounting the plates shall overlap the boxes. For surface
mounting the plates shall match the profile of the box without overlap.
11.4 Where pilot lamps are required they shall comprise a neon lamp with resistor
and a red coloured lens, unless otherwise indicated.
11.5 Wall mounted switches located inside buildings shall have rocker type
actuating members unless otherwise indicated. Where mounted adjacent to
one another they shall be grouped in a multi-gang box with a common front
plate.
11.6 Dimmer switches for the control of tungsten filament lamps shall comply with
BS 5518. For other dimmer switches the limits and the method of measurement
of radio-frequency interference generated by the electronic assembly shall be
in accordance with BS 800.
11.7 Socket outlets shall be switched type as required, and of the type and rating
where indicated and may have pilot lamps where required.
11.8 Socket outlets for wet locations shall be provided with spring loaded cover
required to achieve total enclosure to ensure the required degree of protection
against moisture.
11.9 Unless otherwise indicated, time switches shall be self-starting, self-winding,

synchronous motor type rated at 230 volts. The motor shall be protected by a
fuse, which shall be easily accessible. The rated current of the switch shall be
as indicated.
11.10 The sensing unit of photo-electric control shall comprise a photo-conductive cell
enclosed in a translucent plastic dome sealed to a mounting base. The control
unit shall comprise a load controlling single pole switch; its rated current shall
be as indicated.
11.11 Bells and buzzers shall have contact-less movements and shall not incorporate
a transformer. Bell gongs shall have a minimum diameter of 75mm unless
otherwise indicated. For bells mounted outside a building, the enclosure shall
provide a minimum degree of protection of IP54 and shall have a tapped entry
for steel conduit. The base and cover of buzzers shall be of plastic material.
11.12 Push-button shall have a current rating 1A unless otherwise indicated and shall
be suitable for flush or surface mounting as indicated.
11.13 Indicator units for alarm or call system shall incorporate the number of signals
as indicated and enclosures shall be of metal, wood or plastic and finished as
indicated. Glass front plates shall be finished black and inscriptions shall be as

indicated.
11.14 Plugs rated at 13A shall be of a non-resilient material unless otherwise

indicated and fused plugs shall be fitted with fuses rated as indicated.
11.15 Air conditioners shall be of the specified size, rating and finish as specified in
the Bill of Quantities and shown on drawings and shall be understood as
including all related work.
11.16 Fans and extractors shall be wall mounted or hanging of the specified type and
rating shown on drawings or schedule and specified in the Bill of Quantities.
11.17 Conduits for telephone system shall be installed complete as indicated on

drawings. The wiring for each telephone outlet shall be carried out by the
Authority having jurisdiction .The Contactor shall liaise with the Authority having
jurisdiction to verify that adequate concealed conduits have been included.
11.18 Conduits for television system shall be installed complete as indicated on

drawings. The wiring for each television outlet shall be carried out by the
supplier and /or manufacturer .The Contactor shall liaise with the supplier and
/or manufacturer to verify that adequate concealed conduits have been
included.
11.19 Conduits for computer network system shall be installed complete as indicated
on drawings. The wiring for each data outlet shall be carried out by the supplier
and /or manufacturer. The Contactor shall liaise with the supplier and /or
manufacturer to verify that adequate concealed conduits have been included.
11.20 Terminal blocks shall comprise connectors contained within a moulded

housing. The moulded housing shall be of an insulating material suitable for the
maximum operating temperature of the conductors.
11.21 Conductors shall be clamped between metal surfaces and no screws shall
make direct contact with conductors. The design shall be such as to maintain
sufficient contact pressure to ensure connections of negligible impedance at all
time.
11.22 Mounting heights of accessories or equipment shall be in accordance with

Uganda Code for Electrical Installations and Equipment in Buildings unless
otherwise indicated. Where difficulty in locating of accessories or equipment
occurs the Project Manager shall be consulted.

11.0 INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY

12.1 Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) which supports speed up-to 155Mbps
integrating voice, data, image and multimedia shall be used where increased
band width application is required.
12.2. The fast Ethenet standard (100Mbps) over Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP)
cable shall be used for connection of desktops from hubs.
12.3. Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) floor cabling which supports multiple
applications – Voice, Data and multimedia is recommended for local area net
working.
12.4 For riser backbone system connecting different levels of floors with the server
optical fiber cables shall be utilized.
12.5 Server is a powerful computer that provides services to other computers and
devices on the network and is usually located on ground floor or basement.
12. 6 Modular patch panels shall be used for the termination and interconnecting of
data circuit in structured cabling system.
12. 7 Data outlet points are those points in the network where all the computers and
other devices are interconnected. The data outlet points shall be RJ-45 fed
through Cat 6 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable.
12.8 The wiring for each data outlet shall be carried out by the supplier and /or
manufacturer. The Contractor shall liaise with the Supplier and /or
manufacturer to verify that adequate trunking system and concealed conduits
have been included.
12.9 Conduit installation for telephones, public address, radio and televisions shall be
carried out to the same standard as for power and lighting services. Where
detailed in the Particular Specifications, plastic conduits shall be used and, when
necessary, an earth wire drawn in cables or draw wire shall be installed as
specified.
12.10 Broadband and Power over Ethernet applications shall comply with IEEE 802.3,
IEEE 802.5 and IEEE 802.af standards as a minimum.

12.0 LUMINAIRES AND LAMPS

13.1 Luminaires shall comply with BS 4533 and emergency lighting luminaires shall
comply with Industry Standard and shall be marked with certification label and
shall be installed as indicated on the drawing and the Bill of Quantities.
13.2 Tungsten filament lamps shall be of the general service type in accordance
with IRR BS 161 and fluorescent lamps shall comply with BS 1853.
13.3 The Contractor shall include for the provision of handling, taking delivery, safe
storage, wiring, assembling and erecting of all lighting fittings as specified. All
means necessary to protect electrical materials and fixtures during transport
and before, during and after installation shall be provided to ensure that no
damage occurs to the materials or their surfaces. Electrical fixtures shall be
supplied in their original packing.
13.4 All pendants fittings shall be fixed to conduit boxes with brass screws. Lighting
fittings detailed for the purpose of establishing a high standard of finish shall
under no circumstances be substituted without prior approval of the Project
Manager.
13.5 In case of rectangular shaped ceiling fitting the extreme ends of the fittings
shall be secured to suitable support in addition to the central conduit box
fittings. Supports shall be provided and fixed by the contractor.
13.6 The whole of the metal work of each lighting fittings shall be effectively bonded
to earth. Where ball and/or ankle joints are not made by the manufacturers, the
contractor shall include cost of additional work necessary in his tender.
Minimum size of internal wiring shall be 1.5 mm squared. Each lighting fitting
shall be provided with the number, type and size of lamps as detailed in the
specifications.
13.7 Self-contained emergency lighting luminaires shall be of the non-maintained

type self contained and equipped with an 8W fluorescent tube and shall be
fitted with a means of testing which shall comprise a push-button or similar
device that cannot be left in the test position. They shall be provided with a
means of isolating the lamp circuit for maintenance purposes.
13.8 Unless otherwise indicated, fixed luminaires shall be Class I and hand lamps
shall be Class III rated at 50 volts.
13.9 Unless otherwise indicated, enclosure to luminaires shall provide a minimum

degree of protection of IP20 when located within buildings and IP23 when
located outside buildings, but luminaires mounted externally and less than 2m
above finished ground of paved level shall be IP44.
13.10 The Contractor must order the appropriate type of lamp holder in ordering
lighting fittings, to ensure that the correct lamp holders are provided
irrespective of the type normally supplied by the manufacturer.
13.11 Lampshades shall be of the extra heavy duty and shall be provided for every
specified lighting fitting. They shall be heavy brass type (except for plain
pendants where reinforced bakelite type shall be used).Lampshades are
supported by flexible cable, the holders shall have “Cord grip” arrangements
and in the case of metal shades earthing screws shall be provided on each of
the holders.

13.0 SITE LIGHTING
14.1 Site lighting columns shall be constructed and installed in accordance with BS
5649 and shall be of the type as indicated, columns set in ground shall be fitted
with a base plate unless otherwise indicated.
14.2 The principal roads and access areas on the site shall be illuminated by
suitable discharge lamps mounted on lighting columns or wall brackets on
building.
14.3 The control of the lights shall be by means of an electromechanical timer switch
having adjustable contacts and capable of operating for a minimum of 48 hours
after interruption of the main power supply. The lighting control relay shall be
located on the main switchboard and shall switch all lamps simultaneously via
contactors.

14.0 LIGHTNING PROTECTION AND EARTHING

15.1 The lightning protection installation shall be in accordance with the
recommendations of the British Code of Practice as set out in BS 6651-1985.
15.2 To ensure an effective system, particular attention shall be paid to the quality of
the materials used which shall be electrically and mechanically sound and
provide good erosion resistance in a tropical environment.
15.3 The whole structure shall be provided with air terminations, down conductors
and earth terminations together with all necessary joints, bonds and earth
electrodes including test joints.
15.4 The installation of the earthing system shall be in accordance with the:
a) Recommendations of the British Code of Practice BS 1013;
b) Uganda Code for Electrical Installations and Equipment in Buildings and;
c) The latest Regulation issued by Uganda Electricity Regulatory Authority;
15.5 The Contractor shall supply, install and connect all necessary conductors,
clumps, connectors, terminals, etc. for an efficient earthing system.
15.6 Each termination shall be constructed using copper rods buried into the ground
to a depth of at least 3m. In order to achieve the necessary earth impendence,
rods shall be combined in groups with a separation between rods not less than
the length of the rods.
15.7 Concrete inspection pits shall be installed above each rod complete with
copper bars to which bolted sections can be made to link earth rods together to
form integrated network. To this bar shall also be connected all other earth
connections, including the down conductors to form the lightning protection
system.
15.8 The conductors between earth electrodes or groups of electrodes shall either
be copper strip, copper braid or copper cable (un-insulated) and will be buried
at a depth of 0.5m
15.9 Wall mounted copper earth bar shall be provided in each building for which an
earth electrode shall be in installed. This bar will act as a terminal strip for
bolted connections from switchgear, earth, the casing of electrical equipment
and any other structure which requires bonding to earth. All such connections
shall be sized in accordance with IEE Wiring Regulations Sixteenth Edition.
15.10 Each termination networks not incorporating lightning shall have a resistance to
earth determined by maximum earth fault loop impedance (as defined by the
IEE Wiring Regulations Sixteenth Edition) which shall be acceptable for the
correct functioning of the over current protection devices installed thereby.
15.11 The Lightning Protection System shall comply with BS 6651.
15.12 Aluminium Tape
Aluminium tape used for roof termination networks and down conductors shall
be bare to BS 2898-1350 and shall have a minimum cross sectional area of
50mm2.

15.13 Copper Tape
Copper tape used for earthing shall be bare and made from high conductivity
copper to BS 1432-C101/C103 and shall have a minimum cross sectional area
of 50mm2.
15.14 Fixing of Tape Conductors
Conductor tapes shall be fixed to the background using metallic tape clips of
the spacer bar type using 1! x no.10 countersunk wood screws and wall plug.
When straight through, cross or tee joints are formed in the tape, square tape
clamps shall be used and these shall be fixed to the background as described
above for tape conductor clips.
Copper conductor fixing accessories shall be made from high quality copper
alloys and aluminium accessories shall be made from high quality aliminium
alloys.
No accessory meant for copper conductors shall be used on aluminium

conductor and vice-versa.
When aluminium fittings are installed – an approved oxide inhibiting compound

shall be applied to the connection after it has been made.
At the junction between aluminium down conductors and copper earthing

conductors, a bimetallic connector shall be used. The connector shall be firmly
fixed to the background using 1! X no.10 countersunk wood screw and wall
plug.
15.15 Air Termination Network
The air termination network shall be arranged so that no part of the roof is more
than 5 metres from an air termination conductor.
15.16 Down Conductors
There shall be one down conductor for every 10 meters of the building
perimeter at ground level.
Down conductors shall be as evenly spaced, and shall be routed as directly

from the air termination network to the earth termination, as the building
contour will permit.
The existence of re-entrant loops in the down conductors shall not be

permitted, except as allowed by BS 6651.
15.17 Earth Termination Network
The earth termination network shall be executed in copper tape and copper
clad earth electrodes only.
The connection between tape and earth rod shall be made with a proprietary
rod to tape clamp of high strength copper alloy body and screw. Commercial
brass shall not be used for this purpose. This connection shall be made at
least 150mm above the immediate surrounding ground and enclosed in an
earth inspection chamber.
The inspection pit and cover shall be made of concrete of internal dimensions
160 x 160mm and minimum depth of 210mm. The top of the pit shall not be

below the general surrounding ground.
15.18 Earth Resistance
The resistance to earth of the complete lightning protection system measured

at any point, shall not exceed 10 ohms.
The resistance of each individual earth shall not exceed ten times the number
of down conductors in the complete system.
15.19 Testing and Commissioning
As the installation proceeds and on completion of the installation and at the

expiration of the maintenance period, the Contractor shall carryout tests in the
presence of the Project Manager on all sections of the Electrical Services
Installation and shall submit six signed copies of the results of the tests to the
Project Manager, together with six copies of a Completion and Inspection
Certificate as required by the IEE Wiring Regulations, Part 7.
Site testing of all systems and components comprising the Contract works shall
be carried out in the presence of and to the complete satisfaction of the Project
Manager, After the Contractor has first satisfied himself that the systems are
operating correctly.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval comprehensive

commissioning documents prior to commencement of testing.
No section of the installation shall be energized until these tests have been
completed.
The Contractor shall provide all certified instruments, equipment, plant, labour
and materials necessary for conducting specified site tests and shall be
responsible for and prepared to demonstrate the accuracy of all test
instruments supplied by him.
All installations, plant and tests must satisfy the requirements of the Factories
Act and the requirements of all other interested Authorities and the Contractor
shall include for all safety devices, etc. required by such Act or Authority.
Observations shall be made of the operation and performance of the

installations and subsequent readjustments made as necessary.
Accurate records of all commissioning and testing shall be kept and results
comprehensively reported to the Project Manager when the installed system(s)
are functioning correctly.
Where it is not possible at the particular time of commissioning and/or

demonstration of the plant for full load conditions to be obtained or assimilated,
the Contractor shall repeat the requisite operations of the commissioning and
demonstrations under such full load conditions (or the reasonable
approximation or simulation of such conditions acceptable to the Project
Manager) at the first opportunity.
The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment and plant under his supply shall
be tested at the maker’s works before dispatch and six copies of test
certificates in respect of each test shall be forwarded to the Project Manager.
All works tests shall comply with the relevant British Standard Specification or
IEC Standard Specification and shall be sufficient to show that equipment will
function correctly when installed as part of the Sub-Contract works.

Each item of electrical plant or equipment so tested shall be fitted with a plate
giving at least the following information:
Date of Test
Individual equipment serial number
BSS number if any
Test Voltage
Operating voltage (if different from test voltage)
Test current
Full load current (if different from test current)
Loading (expressed in kVA) and power factor Phase
Frequency 9expressed in Hz)
The above information shall be included on the test certificate for each item of
plant or equipment. This shall also include a description of any particular
method of wiring and/or connection with the location of the test and signature of
the witness.
The following test results shall be submitted:
a) Continuity of ring final circuit conductors

b) Continuity of protective conductors, including main and supplementary
equipotential bonding
c) Earth electrode resistance
d) Insulation resistance
e) Insulation of site-built assemblies
f) Protection by electrical separation
g) Protection by barriers or enclosures during erection
h) Polarity
i) Earth fault loop impedance
j) Operation of residual current devises and fault voltage operated
protective devices
k) Each circuit breaker shall be operated manually or electrically 50 times to
the satisfaction of the Project Manager. Where the circuit breaker is
designed for electrical operation at least 10 of these operations shall be
made with 80% normal voltage applied to the trip coil in accordance with
BS 116:1952. During this test the trip free feature shall be demonstrated.
15.20 Scope of Works
The Contactor shall supply, deliver, install, set to work, test, commission and
hand over to the Employer the complete Electrical Services installation
inclusive of the following:
(i) Power and lighting installation in all areas including supply to services

to be installed by others, such as lifts, parking entrance shutters,

parking control barriers, cooking equipment etc;
(ii) Installation of lightning protection system;
(iii) Liaison with the Power Supply Authority for power connection to the
building;
(iv) Liaison with the Telecommunication Authority for installation of
incoming telephone cables into the building;
(v) Testing, certificate and commissioning of the services; and
(vi) Preparation of co-ordinated working drawings, record drawings and
operating and maintenance manuals.
The foregoing is an outline description only and reference to the other Specification
Clauses and site inspection must be made to assess the full extent of the works.
Should any portion of the work which would reasonably and obviously be inferred as
necessary for the complete, safe, efficient and satisfactory operation of the installation
as a whole, not be expressly described or specified – then such works shall be
executed as part of the Contract at no additional cost.
In addition to the above – the Contractor shall quote a further extra over cost for the
maintenance of the above systems for the first nine months of operation.

15.0 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SURVEILLANCE

16.1 The works shall involve Supply and installation of a Closed Circuit Television
(CCTV) Surveillance System complete with mounting accessories.
16.2 The works shall also include preparation of 3 Sets of Hard and Soft Copies of
"As-Built" Drawings, Manuals, Testing and Commissioning the System to the
Satisfaction of the Engineer.
16.3 The CCTV system cameras shall produce sharp, detailed and stable images
on the monitor in sufficient detail to provide positive identification of
individuals within the protected areas under all conditions of light.
16.4 Where required, wide coverage public areas shall be viewed with pan, tilt and
zoom (PTZ) IP cameras, to provide close up images and tracking of events.
Fixed position and fixed focus IP cameras shall be used where a specific risk
has been identified in a particular area and it is important that should an event
occur it is viewed in real time or recorded.
16.5 The cameras shall be fitted with automatic light compensation devices to
provide compensation for variations over a wide range of scene brightness.
Where a camera must operate in total darkness, the nature of the possible
events will be analysed to determine whether the situation requires a special
application camera such as one that uses infra-red illumination.

16.0 CENTRALISED TELEVISION SYSTEM

17.1 The television system shall generally be centrally connected and
distributed per Block. The television system shall comprise a DSTV
Dish, UHF/VHF Antenna, Amplification and Distribution accessories
and a fully integrated wiring system. The Contractor shall provide both
accessible wire ways to facilitate the installation in accordance with the
design and faceplates to outlets.
17.2 Wiring from distribution points to television outlets will be carried by

the Contactor in 25 mm diameter conduits. Co-axial cables suitable for
the television installation shall be used. Television outlet points shall
be flush mounted with a steel box.

17.0 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

18.1 The works shall include supply and installation of the fire detection and alarm
system elements complete with fixing accessories of the Menvier / GENT
intelligent addressable fire detection system or approved equivalent.
18.2 The system components shall be Loop wired using using 2-core fire resistant
OHLS 300/500V stranded copper cables.

19.0 TRAINING OF CLIENT’S PERSONNEL

19.1 The Contractor shall upon the request of the Client, as a separate item, carry
out training of a number of persons who will be selected by the Project
Manager for the correct and careful operation, control and maintenance of all
the electrical services provided under the Contract before the final talking over
of the project.
19.2 The training shall be carried out by the qualified commissioning staff of the
Contractor for each particular service and shall be continued throughout the
contract period till the final taking over of the project, if the General Conditions
of the contract do not call for more extended period or as mutually agreed
between the client and the Contractor.

20.0 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

20.1 On completion of the electrical installation, the contractor shall, in the presence
of the Project Manager or his representative, test the installations as required
by the Project Manager and the local concerned authorities to demonstrate
compliance with the IEE Wiring Regulations Sixteenth Edition and Uganda
Code for Electrical Installations and Equipment in Buildings.
20.2 The following tests shall be carried out:
a) Verification of polarity (D.C. and single phase/ earth circuit)

b) Phase rotation
c) Resistance to earth of earthing system
d) Insulation resistance. Phase / phase and phase / earth.
e) Earth loop impedance
f) Operation of over current and earth relays by injection tests
g) Levels of illumination
h) Correct sequencing of all control equipment
20.3 The woks will not be accepted and taken over before the connection of power
supply. After the power supply connection the contractor shall commission all
his equipment to fulfill his contract obligations. Supply of power is the client's
obligation.
20.4 The Project Manager shall be given full opportunity to witness all tests and
shall approve all tests. He will have the right to ask for specific tests results to
be repeated. The Contractor shall provide accurate instruments and apparatus
and all labour required to carry out the above tests. The instruments and
apparatus shall be made available to the Project Manager to enable him carry
out such tests as he may require.

PART 4
AIRCONDITIONING AND
MECHANICAL VENTILATION

1.1 General
The particular and general specifications for Mechanical Ventilation are detailed in this part. The
Contractor shall supply and install Mechanical Ventilation equipment as detailed herein and in the
Contract Drawings.
1.2 Climatic Conditions
The following climatic conditions apply at the site of the Contract Works and all plant, equipment,
apparatus, materials and installations shall be suitable for these conditions.
Max. Highest Temp. 35 degrees Celsius
Min. Lowest Temp. 13.3 degrees Celsius
Mean Temp. 28 degrees Celsius
Relative Humidity 50% - 92%
Altitude 1312 meter A.S.L.
Longitude 32 degrees 36' E
Latitude 00 degrees 20' N
1.3 Design conditions for air conditioning installation
a) Inside temperature for all areas shall be 22 degrees Celsius. All Noise Level Max 45dB
b) Outside conditions: Temperature = 35 degrees Celsius, dry bulb;
2.0 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
The air conditioning system shall be by split unit air conditioning system for the Conference
rooms/Halls. The proposed split units shall be either Carrier/ Daikin/LG. The Contractor should
adhere strictly to these contract specifications. No alternative brand shall be accepted
2.1 Indoor Units
This indoor units shall either be Concealed ceiling units or High wall split units. The indoor units shall
be of low noise of 32dBA and shall operate on 240V, 50HZ, 1Phase. The indoor concealed ceiling
units shall be with drain lift pump .The power supply shall have a built-in protection unit to prevent
damage due to power fluctuations. The unit shall be fitted with a removable washable filter.
3.0 DUCTING
3.1 Material
The material from which the ductwork shall be made, shall be galvanized steel.
For ducts with the longer side equal to or less than 599mm, the thickness shall be 0.6mm.
3.2 Construction and Erection
All seams, joints and connections to plant shall be made so as to reduce air leakage to a
minimum.

Internal roughness and obstructions to airflow (other than dampers, vanes etc) will not be
accepted.
Sharp edges on corners or on the inside and outside of the ductwork, flanges, supports etc.
will not be accepted.
All openings for branches shall be cut before the ducting is erected and shall not be less than
the connection dimensions.
Connections to plant shall be made with angle flanged joints. Ductwork which may also have
to be moved to enable plant to be removed or accessed for maintenance shall incorporate
flanged joints, suitably painted and protected.
3.3 Fabrication and Consideration
The Contractor shall supply and install ductwork runs and sizes as shown on the Tender
Drawings. Alterations will be permissible only after Engineer's approval.
The Contractor shall be responsible for taking all measurements on site that are necessary
for the manufacture of and installing of the ductwork. The Contractor shall make the
arrangements, where necessary, for walls, doors, etc. to be down so that he can install the
Plants.
The Contractor shall be responsible for checking all Architects, Civil Engineers, Structural Engineers
and other Contractor drawings to see that the ductwork shall be accommodated within the structure
and does not foul pipework, light fittings, electric trunking and all other services.
When ductwork is run in false ceilings, bulkheads etc. the Contractor shall ensure that adequate
clearance is available for ceiling supports, light fittings and other services and equipment.
3.4 Sheet metal ducts
All sheet metal ducts, unless otherwise stated for special purposes, shall be manufactured from
galvanized mild steel sheets. All ductwork shall be constructed and installed in accordance with the
Heating and Ventilating Contractors Association, specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork, DW 142.
3.5 Jointing of ductwork
Jointing shall be arranged with the following:-
a) Longitudinal joints up to and including 1.2mm duct thickness with Pittsburgh lock, riveted
at a maximum of 65mm centres.
b) Joints between ducts riveted, flanged or bolted according to sheet metal gauge, and
location.
c) Slip joints with a minimum of 75mm slip and be taped with Arbol No. 1291 or equal and
approved.
d) Loose flanges fitted where the position of the ducts cannot be determined during planning.
e) Jointing compound for sealing joints of the slip type. Sealing strips according to application
between flanges.
f) Flanged drilled for 10mm diameter bolts at a maximum of 100mm centres, for duct sizes up to
760mm longest side, over 760mm longest side drilled for 10mm diameter bolts at 150mm centres
except for holes in flanged connections to plant which shall be made with the plant flanges. All
bolts, nuts, washers etc. shall be cadium plated.\
NOTE: The use of Imes 'Pop' rivets and huckbolts will normally not be allowed. The ductwork
Contractors shall make specific reference in his tender to any constructional details on which his price

is based which are not generally accepted practice, and written approval of such items must be
obtained prior to manufacture.
3.6 Flexible connections
Flexible connections shall be as follows:-
a) Revertex, silentium or neoprene or as specification Part C.
b) Approximately 1500mm long fixed ends, minimum.
c) Secured by either flanged or a bolted metal strip.
d) Fitted between fans and ductwork.
e) Fitted between grilles/diffuser and ductwork in ceiling grids.
3.7 Supports
a) Fixing from a structurally sound part of the building by mild steel straps, hanging brackets
on rolled steel angle.
b) Spacing at not more than 3m centres and beneath vertical risers. Branches must not be
used as supports.
c) For timber or heavy duty cork spacer between duct and the support where thermal
insulation is specified; elsewhere felt inserts shall be provided.
d) Fixing by clipping or building in. No drilling or burning holes and welding to the roof trusses
and other building structural steel members will be permitted without written permission from
the Engineer.
e) The corners of rolled steel sections to be neatly trimmed off. Screwed rods used for duct
hangers shall not project below the bolts.
f) Equipment such as fans where fitted in ductwork shall be fitted with their own supports. The
contractor shall ensure wherever fans or similar equipment are connected to the ductwork
system, the connections are made with a heavy duty rot or vermin proof neoprene or similar
material, flexible connection to prevent vibration transmission to the duct work or building
fabric. Flexible connection shall be secured by a pre-drilled mating flange, or when fixing to a
spigot, the spigot should be beaded and a jubilee clip or split flat iron ring should be used.
g) Where ductwork passes through the structure which is not a fire barrier fireproof packing shall
be provided between the duct and masonry with a mastic sealant.
h) Where ductwork passes through floors and walls, galvanised sheet steel sleeves or builders´
work timber frames shall be provided. The space between duct and sleeve or frame shall be
packed with asbestos rope or mastic to prevent air movement or noise transmission from one
space to another. Ducts must not come into direct contact with the building fabric.
i) All supports and brackets shall be wire brushed and painted one coat of red oxide paint prior
to and after erection. All nuts and bolts shall be sheradized. The fastening of electrical cables
to ductwork will not be permitted.
3.8 Ductwork
The Contractor shall supervise the positioning of ducting deliveries and off-loading of the plant.
Duct runs shall be erected on the supports provided and aligned, prior to connections to items of
equipment, to present a neat and workmanlike appearance with allowance made for all clearance for
insulation and other adjacent services. Transverse joints for rectangular and circular ducts shall be
made on site in a manner similar to that already detailed.

Transformation and taper pieces shall, wherever possible, be constructed so that the included angle
does not exceed 30 degrees.
Air conditioning ducts shall be insulated with rock wool covered with aluminium foil.
3.9 Test Holes and Access Doors
An adequate number of test holes shall be provided adjacent to all plant, inlet and outlet louvres, at
branches, after balancing dampers and elsewhere as required by the Contractor for balancing the
system. Test holes after dampers shall be positioned clear of the damper and at a position where the
air stream is flowing evenly along the duct. Rubber plugs shall be provided to seal test holes.
The contractor shall provide sufficient access doors for the purpose maintenance and inspection.
Access doors shall be of the hinged type or door openings in the ductwork shall be adequately
stiffened and made airtight with purpose made rubber gaskets around the door perimeter.
4.0 DAMPERS
Volume Control Dampers shall be fitted in all branch ducts and shall be of Multi leaf opposed blade
construction.
4.1 FANS
Fans shall be capable of the performance indicated in the schedules. Although the value of the
resistance to airflow is indicated for the systems this does not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for providing fans capable of delivering the required air volume through the system. Air
supply fans shall have a replaceable filter assembly, anti vibration mountings and shall be supplied
with direct on line starters of suitable rating incorporating over current and under voltage protection.
The fans shall have an enclosure of IP 65 and shall be of Vent Axia make.
The make and design of the fans and attenuators shall be as indicated in the schedules. If no
particular ,make of fan is indicated, the Contractor shall submit full details of the fan including the
drive and motor together with supporting evidence from the manufacturers of noise levels and
efficiencies to the Architect for approval.
Belt driven fans shall be fitted with pulleys suitable for V belts all as specified.
Machine bolts, nuts and washers only shall be used, for assembly of fans. All bearing surfaces for the
heads of bolts or washers shall be counterfaced.
Holding-down bolts for fans and motors shall be square section under the head or be fitted with snugs
to prevent them turning in the baseplate when the nuts are tightened.
Any fan which is too large or too heavy for sale handling shall be fitted with lifting eyes or other lifting
facilities to enable mechanical lifting equipment to be used.
5.0 GRILLES, DIFFUSERS AND LOUVRES
5.1 General
These shall be of the type specified in the schedules positively and firmly located within the ductwork
system. The Contractor shall provide the necessary air seal between grille and structure in all cases.
The Contractor shall provide all accessories for connecting/adapting the diffusers/grilles to the
ductwork.
All diffusers connected to ducting shall be provided with integral dampers.
Fixing screws that are visible shall be of a non rusting type, the colour and type to be agreed with the
Architect.
5.2 Louvres
The contractor shall supply and install at the termination of fresh air and exhaust air ducting at the
external walls louvered inlets and outlets with insect proof screens.
Louvres shall be of robust extruded aluminum alloy section or hot dipped galvanized mild steel
construction as indicated in the schedules. The finish shall be to Architect’s approval.Thelouvres shall
have specially designed water shedding blades and shall be fitted with a galvanized steel wire mesh
screen of 20mm diamond mesh and at least 2mm diameter wire, mounted in a frame of galvanized
steel rod with securing lugs or flat galvanized mild steel.Flanges shall be fitted with a returned edge,
drilled for screw fixing.
5.3 Air extract grilles
All supply and extract grilles shall be constructed from aluminium alloy or mild steel, with a finish of
approved colour. Flanges shall be fitted with a return edge, complete with plastic foam or sponge
rubber sealing gasket. The grilles shall be suitable for fixing to timber grounds, mild steel or plastic
ducting. All grilles shall incorporate an aluminium alloy or mild steel opposed blade, volume control
damper adjustable from within the ventilated space without grille removal. Two sets of volume and
pattern adjustment keys shall be handed to the Engineer.
5.4 Air supply diffusers
All air diffusers shall be constructed from aluminium alloy or mild steel and shall be of the sizes and
suitable for the operating conditions indicated in the schedules.All diffusers shall incorporate an
aluminium alloy or mild steel volume control damper adjustable from within the ventilated space
without the removal of any part of the diffuser.
Two sets of volume control damper keys shall be handed to the Engineer.
5.5 Transfer grilles
Transfer grilles shall be of the sizes and suitable for the operating conditions indicated in the schedules.
The grilles shall be manufactured from aluminium or mild steel with an approved finish.The grilles shall
be sight proof and rattle free with a flange frame auxiliary frame for the reverse side.

5.6 Fineline Linear grilles
Continuous line grilles shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings, and to the
dimensions indicated in the schedules.
The grilles shall be fabricated from aluminium extrusions and all the components shall be
mechanically interlocked to give a blemish free appearance. Where the overall length of the
grille is greater than the standard manufactured length it shall be made up of sections which
shall butt together to give hairline joints. Keyways and splice plates to facilitate the jointing
shall be provided by manufactures.
The grilles shall have flanges not less than 25mm in width return edges.The grilles shall be
held in position with concealed fasteners.
5.7 FIRE DAMPER
Fire dampers complying with BS 476 and CP 413 shall be installed in the ducting as per
Contract Drawings. The spindles of the dampers shall be placed off centre. When the fusible
links melt, the dampers close automatically.
ADDENDUM:
The following materials which are not directly specified in the above shall be used on this
project under the following guidelines:
1. INTERLOCKING STABILISED SOIL BLOCKS
Blocks shall be preferably made on site using good soil selection, a stabilizer to complement
the type of soil and good practices during production and implementation.
Good quality soil sieved to remove foreign elements is mixed with a stabilizer (cement or
lime). This is then mixed with sand in the ratio of 1:1. A Manual or motorized press shall be
used to compact the soil: sand mixture. Blocks should be allowed to cure for at least 28 days
before they can be used.
Samples shall be submitted for the Project Managers approval
Blocks to comply with UNBS Uganda Standard US 849, specification for stabilized earth
blocks a regards size and tolerances and shall be of good shape, well-formed and free from
flaws.
According to UNBS (2011), the US 849 technical considerations for ISSBs include;
(i) water absorption: at max 15 % of original mass,
(ii) density: at min 1600 kg/m3
(iii) shrinkage cracks: at max 0.5 mm wide and 70 mm long
(iv) dry and wet compressive strengths: at min 2.5 and 1.5 N/mm2 Respectively
(v) modulus of rapture: at min 0.5 N/mm2
(vi) Weathering (% loss in mass): at max 15 %. Visually, there should be no broken
edges or honey comb effect.
ISSB not recommended for foundation plinth walls. Burnt Clay Bricks shall be used for the
foundations.
Dry stack the ISSB when erecting the walls, mortar shall be used when constructing columns.
[Note that in case of unsatisfactory workmanship, a little mortar shall be recommended for the
entire walling].
2. CONCRETE ROOFING TILES

Concrete Roofing tiles as Butema Concrete Tile manufactured from Butema Brick Factory,
Hoima. Dimensions: 35.5 x 2.0 x 17.7 cm.

List of Reference Documents

Standard Bidding Document for the Procurement of Works issued by PPDA, June 2003
Standard Bidding Document for the Procurement of Services, issued by PPDA, June
2003
FIDIC publication - Construction Contract (updates to Red Book)
FIDIC publication - Works of Civil Engineering Construction (Red Book)
FIDIC publications - Tendering Procedure, Contract Guide, Consultant Selection,
The Building Control Bill, 2012
World Bank publication - Procurement Guidelines under IBRD Loans and IDA Credits
African Development Bank publication - Disbursement Handbook
African Development Bank publication - “Project Cycle”, dated 2004
EU publication - Guide to Procurement, dated 2002
Agreement and Schedule of Conditions of Building Contract, published July 1998 jointly
by Architectural Association of Kenya, East Africa Institute of Architects, East African
Section of the Institution of Structural Engineers, Kenya Association of Building and Civil
Engineering Contractors, Federation of Contractors’ Association (East Africa), Uganda
society of Architects, Joint Building Council, Kenya

FLYSHEET:
Volume 3B of 4 - Code for Electrical
Installations in Buildings

THE REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
MINISTRY OF WORKS AND TRANSPORT
CODE FOR ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATIONS IN BUILDINGS
December 2012
B1

FOREWORD
The mission of the Ministry of Works and Transport (MoWT) is to promote an
adequate, safe and well maintained works and transport infrastructure and
services so as to effectively contribute to the socio-economic development of
the country.
In exercising this mission and in discharging its responsibilities, the Ministry is

issuing a series of Design Manuals, Guidelines, Codes and Standards, of
which the “Code for Electrical Installations in Buildings” is one part thereof.
The Code for Electrical Installations in Buildings will be a nationally recognized

document which will serve as a standard reference for the regulation of design
and construction of electrical installations and equipment in buildings.
The major benefits to be gained in applying this document are the

harmonization of professional practice in the building construction in Uganda
and curtailment of informal developments so as to ensure well-planned, well-
maintained, safe, cost effective and decent building developments and human
settlements throughout the country.
The Code will be periodically updated and new editions issued to cater for the
dynamic technological developments in the construction industry.
Abraham Byandala
Minister of Works and Transport
December 2012

Code for Electrical Installations and Equipment in Buildings
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Definitions....................................................................................................... iv
SECTION 1 SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS ........................................................................... 1.1
1.1 Scope .................................................................................................... 1.1

1.2 Definitions .............................................................................................. 1.1
SECTION 2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 2.1
2.1 Administrative ........................................................................................ 2.1

2.2 Technical ............................................................................................... 2.2
2.3 Planning and Designing ............................................................................ 2.4
SECTION 3 METHODS OF INSTALLATION ..................................................................... 3.1
3.1 General .................................................................................................. 3.1

3.2 Fundamental Requirements for Safety ................................................... 3.1
3.2.1 Workmanship and Materials ................................................................3.1
3.2.2 Protective Devices ..............................................................................3.2
3.2.3 Portable Appliances .............................................................................3.3
3.3 Switchboard and Switchgear.................................................................. 3.3
3.3.1 General ...............................................................................................3.3
3.3.2 Isolation (Protection against direct contact) .........................................3.8
3.3.3 Cable Terminations to Switch Gear ...................................................3.11
3.4 Wiring and Wiring Accessories ............................................................ 3.12
3.4.1 Cable Wiring .....................................................................................3.12
3.4.2 Cable Trunking ..................................................................................3.14
3.4.3 Conduit Wiring ..................................................................................3.15
3.4.4 Mounting Heights of Wiring Accessories ...........................................3.16
3.4.5 Ceiling Roses and Lamp Holders.......................................................3.18
3.4.6 Switches and Socket Outlets .............................................................3.18
3.4.7 Motors ...............................................................................................3.18
3.4.8 Final Circuits .....................................................................................3.20
3.5 Underground Cables ............................................................................ 3.21
3.5.1 Cable Specification ............................................................................3.21
3.5.2 Cable Laying......................................................................................3.21
3.5.3 Warning Covers .................................................................................3.23
3.5.4 Earthenware Ducts and Fiber Conduits .............................................3.23
3.5.5 Concrete Cable Markers ...................................................................3.24
3.5.6 Cables Jointing..................................................................................3.24
3.5.7 Identification of Cables and Cable Joints ...........................................3.25
3.5.8 Position of Cable Routes ...................................................................3.25
3.5.9 Bonding and Earthing of Cables ........................................................3.25
3.6 Excavation and Reinstatement ............................................................ 3.26
3.7 Consumer Mains .................................................................................... 3.27
3.7.1 Feeder Pillars ....................................................................................3.27
3.7.2 Earthing.............................................................................................3.28
i
Ministry of Works and Transport
3.8 "AS INSTALLED" Drawings .................................................................. 3.29

3.9 Inspection and Testing ......................................................................... 3.29
SECTION 4 MISCELLANEOUS ........................................................................................ 4.1
4.1 Street Lighting........................................................................................ 4.1

4.2 Lightning Protection and Earthing .......................................................... 4.2
4.3 Lifts ........................................................................................................ 4.2
4.4 Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems ........................................... 4.3
4.5 Radiation Emissions .............................................................................. 4.3
4.6 Special Services .................................................................................... 4.3
4.6.1 Data Network .......................................................................................4.3
4.6.2 Other ...................................................................................................4.4
SECTION 5 .. SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV) POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM MODULES AND
BATTERIES ................................................................................................................... 5.1
5.1 Scope .................................................................................................... 5.1

5.2 Photovoltaic (PV) Modules ..................................................................... 5.1
5.2.1 PV Modules (Panels) Specifications ....................................................5.1
5.2.2 PV Modules Position ...........................................................................5.1
5.2.3 PV Modules Orientation ......................................................................5.1
5.2.4 PV Modules Lightning Protection.........................................................5.2
5.2.5 PV Modules Support Structure ............................................................5.2
5.2.6 PV Modules Roof Mounting .................................................................5.2
5.2.7 PV Modules Ground Mounting ...........................................................5.2
5.3 Batteries ................................................................................................ 5.3
5.3.1 Type ....................................................................................................5.3
5.3.2 Installation ...........................................................................................5.3
5.3.3 Controllers and Circuit .........................................................................5.4
5.4 Samples................................................................................................. 5.5
5.5 System Design - Essential and Non- Essential Service (ES and NES) .. 5.5
5.5.1 Design data .........................................................................................5.5
5.5.2 Calculations ........................................................................................5.5
5.5.3 System Autonomy ...............................................................................5.6
5.5.4 Essential Services (ES) .......................................................................5.6
5.5.5 Non-Essential Services (NES) .............................................................5.7
5.6 Labels .................................................................................................... 5.7
5.7 Inspection and Testing ........................................................................... 5.8
5.8 Maintenance, Spare Parts and Warranties............................................. 5.8
5.9 Registration, Approval and Acceptance for Photovoltaic Installations .... 5.8
5.10 Field of Application ................................................................................ 5.9
5.11 Installation Design ............................................................................... 5.10
5.12 Wiring Methods and Cables ................................................................. 5.11
5.12.1 Conduit Wiring...................................................................................5.11
5.12.2 Cable Wiring .....................................................................................5.11
5.12.3 Conductor Cross-section and Voltage Drop .....................................5.11
5.12.4 Use of Existing 240V AC Wiring ........................................................5.12
ii
5.12.5 Cable Connections ............................................................................5.12

5.12.6 Power Intake - Underground and Overhead ......................................5.12
5.13 Workmanship and Finishing ................................................................. 5.13
5.14 Light Fixtures ....................................................................................... 5.14
5.15 Sockets ................................................................................................ 5.14
5.16 Switches .............................................................................................. 5.15
5.17 Installation ........................................................................................... 5.15
SECTION 6 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM................................................................................... 6.1
6.1 Scope .................................................................................................... 6.1

6.2 General Design Considerations ............................................................. 6.1
6.3 Manual Call Points Location, Construction and Requirements ............... 6.2
6.4 Selection of Fire Detectors ..................................................................... 6.3
6.5 Sitting of Detectors................................................................................. 6.3
6.6 Audible and Visual Alarms ..................................................................... 6.4
6.7 Cables and Wiring ................................................................................. 6.5
6.8 Power Supply System ............................................................................ 6.6
APPENDICES
Appendix 1 : Measurement of earth electrode resistance (e.e.r) using a four-terminal

earth tester megger
Appendix 2 : Overhead line clearances
Appendix 3 : Current carrying capacity
Appendix 4 : Capacities of conduits for single-core pvc cables
Appendix 5 : Referenced documents
BIBLIOGRAPHY
iii
Definitions
Alarm box control room: A facility from which the necessary
firefighting measures can be initiated at all time.
Alerting facility : A facility which issues the fire alarm –e.g. by means
of audible and visual signaling devices – and which
is not contained in the fire alarm control and
indicating panels.
Automatic fire alarm system: A system which detects the occurrence of fire
in its incipient stage and immediately signals this
without human intervention.
Automatic fire detector: A part of a fire alarm system which, either
continually or at periodic intervals, observes a
suitable physical and/or chemical identifier for
detecting a fire in the monitored area.
Flame detector : A detector which responds to the radiation emitted
in the air.
Fire identifier : Physical variables which are subject to measurable
changes in the environment of a fire in its incipient
stage; e.g. rise in temperature, smoke, flame
radiation.
Fire alarm signal: A signal which alerts the fire fighting forces.
Fire alarm system : The entirety of the equipment and parts, matched
for correct interaction, used in a fire alarm system.
False alarm : A fire alarm signal caused by technical
malfunctions in the fire alarm system(alarm
resulting from disturbance) or spurious alarms
resulting from the fire detector being “mislead”.
Heat detector : A detector which respond to an increase in
temperature.
Non-automatic (manual) fire alarm devices: Alarm devices which can be
used to initiate the fire alarm signals
manually.
Smoke : Particulate product of combustion generated by
fire, whether this be of smouldering or open-flame
type.
Sounders: Devices in which electric signals are converted into
sound signals.
Smoke detector : A detector which responds to products of
combustion and/or pyrolysis (suspended matter)
contained in the air.
PV cell: Basic PV device which can generate electricity
when exposed to light such as solar radiation
PV module: Smallest completely environmentally protected
assembly of interconnected PV cells
PV string: Circuit in which PV modules are connected in
series, in order for a PV array to generate the
required output voltage.
iv
PV array: Mechanically and electrically integrated assembly

of PV modules and other necessary components,
to form a d.c. power supply unit.
PV array junction box: Enclosure where all PV strings of PV array are
electrically connected and where protection
devices can be located if necessary.
PV generator: Assembly of PV arrays
PV generator junction box: Enclosure where all PV arrays are
electrically connected and where protection
devices can be located if necessary.
PV string cable: Cable connecting PV modules to form a PV string.
PV array cable: Output cable of a PV array.
PV d.c. main cable: Cable connecting the PV generator junction box to
the d.c. terminals of the PV inverter
PV inverter : Device which converts d.c. voltage and d.c. current
into a.c. voltage and a.c. current
PV supply cable : Cable connecting the a.c. terminals of the PV
inverter to a distribution circuit of the electrical
installation.
v
Code for Electrical Installations and Equipment in Buildings Section 1
SECTION 1 SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS
1.1 Scope
This Code for Electrical Installations and Equipment in Buildings establishes general
principles for the wiring, selection, erection and testing of electrical installations for
residential commercial and public premises. They are applicable to electrical
installations that operate at a voltage up to and including 1000V a.c or d.c., supplied
from the public supply or from a private generating plant.
a) residential, commercial and public premises, and

b) is applicable to electrical installations that operate at a voltage up to
and including 1000V a.c. or d.c., and
c) are supplied from an external source or from a private generating
plant.
1.2 Definitions
For the purpose of this Code, the following definitions shall apply:
Accessory: A device, other than current-using equipment,

associated with such equipment or with the wiring
of an installation.
Ambient temperature: The temperature of the air or other medium

where the equipment is to be used.
Appliance: An item of current-using equipment other than a

luminaire or an independent motor.
Apparatus: An electrical apparatus, and includes all

apparatus, machines and fittings in which
conductors are used, or of which they form a
part.
Authority: means Uganda Electricity Regulatory Authority.
Authorized person: a person employed or appointed, by the Authority

to carry out certain duties incidental to the
generation, distribution or use of electrical
energy, such a person being competent for the
purposes transmission in which the term is used,
and holds an appropriate certificate of
competency issued in accordance with the
provisions of the Electricity Act of Uganda.
Barrier: A part providing a defined degree of protection

against contact with live parts from any usual
direction of access.
1.1
Basic insulation: Insulation applied to live parts to provide basic

protection against electric shock and which does
not necessarily include insulation used
exclusively for functional purposes.
Bonding conductor: A protective conductor providing equipotential

bonding.
Building void, accessible: A space within the structure or the

components of a building only at certain
points.
Building void, non-accessible: A space within the structure or the

components of a building which has no
ready means of access.
Bunched: Cables are said to be bunched when two or more

are contained within a single conduit, duct,
ducting, or trunking or, if not enclosed, are not
separated from each other by a specified
distance.
Cable bracket: A horizontal cable support system, consisting of

elements fixed at one end only, spaced at
intervals along the length of the cable and on
which the cable rests.
Cable channel: An enclosure situated above or in the ground,

ventilated or closed, and having dimensions
which do not permit the access of persons but
allow access to the conductors and/or cables
throughout their length during and after
installation. A cable channel may or may not form
part of the building construction.
Cable cleat: A component of a support system, which consists

of elements spaced at intervals along the
length of the cable or conduit and which
mechanically retains the cable or conduit.
Cable coupler: A means of enabling the connection or

disconnection, at will, of two flexible cables. It
consists of a connector and a plug.
Cable ducting: A manufactured enclosure of metal or insulating

material, other than conduit or cable trunking,
intended for the protection of cables which are
drawn-in after erection of the ducting.
1.2
Cable ladder: A cable support consisting of a series of

supporting elements rigidly fixed to main
supporting members. The supporting elements
occupy les than 10% of the plan area.
Cable tray: A cable support consisting of a continuous base

with raised edges and no covering. A cable tray
is considered to be non- perforated, where less
than 30% of the material is removed from the
base.
Cable trunking: A manufactured enclosure for the protection of

cables, normally of rectangular cross-section, of
which one side is removable or hinged.
Cable tunnel: An enclosure (corridor)containing supporting

structures for conductors and or cables and joints
and whose dimensions allow persons to pass
freely throughout the entire length.
Cartridge fuse link: A device comprising a fuse element or several

fuse elements connected in parallel enclosed in a
cartridge usually filled with arc-extinguishing
medium and connected to terminations (see fuse
link).
Ceiling rose: An accessory for connection to the fixed wiring of

an installation to pass current to a lampholder or
a luminaire by means of the conductors of a
flexible cord.
1.3
Ceiling rose - surface type: A ceiling rose provided with a seating

surface such that when mounted as
intended it projects wholly outside the
surface on which it is mounted.
Ceiling rose - semi-recessed or flush-type: A ceiling rose intended

for mounting with its base partially or
completely sunk into a box complying with
BS 31, BS 4568: Part 2, BS 4607: Part 5
or BS 4662.
Circuit: An assembly of electrical equipment

supplied from the same origin and
protected against over current by the
same protective device(s).
Circuit-breaker: A device capable of making, carrying and

breaking normal load currents and also
making and automatically breaking, under
pre-determined conditions, abnormal
currents such as short-circuit currents. It
is usually required to operate infrequently
although some types are suitable for
frequent operation.
Circuit-breaker, linked: A circuit-breaker the contacts of which are

arranged as to make or break all poles
simultaneously or in a definite sequence.
Circuit protective conductor (cpc): A protective conductor

connecting exposed-conductive-parts of
equipment to the main earthing terminal.
Conduit: A part of a closed wiring system for

cables in electrical installations, allowing
them to be drawn in and/or replaced, but
not inserted laterally.
Connector: The part of a cable coupler or of an

appliance coupler which is provided with
female contacts and is intended to be
attached to the end of the flexible cable
remote from the supply.
Consumer unit: A particular type of distribution board

comprising a co-coordinated assembly for
the control and distribution of electrical
energy, principally in domestic premises,
incorporating manual means of double
pole isolation on the incoming circuits(s)
1.4
and an assembly of one or more fuses,

miniature circuit-breakers, residual current
operated devices or signaling and other
devices purposely manufactured for such
use.
Current-carrying capacity of a conductor: The maximum current

which can be carried by a conductor
under specified conditions without its
steady state temperature exceeding a
specified value.
Current-using equipment: Equipment which converts electrical

energy into another form of energy, such
as light, heat or motive power.
Danger: Risk of injury to persons (and livestock

where expected to be present) from:-
a) fire, electric shock and burns arising

from the use of electrical energy, and
b) mechanical movement of electrically
controlled equipment, in so far as such
danger is intended to be prevented by
electrical emergency switching or by
electrical switching for mechanical
maintenance of non-electrical parts of
such equipment.
Dead: At, or about, zero potential, and

disconnected from any live system.
Direct contact: Contact of persons or livestock with live

part which may result in electric shock.
Disconnector: A mechanical switching device which, in

the open position, complies with the
requirements specified for isolation. A
disconnector is otherwise known as an
isolator.
Distribution board: An assembly containing switching or

protective devices (e.g. fuses, circuit-
breakers, residual current operated
devices) associated with one or more
outgoing circuits fed from one or more
incoming circuits, together with terminals
for the neutral and protective circuit
conductors. It may also include signaling
and other control devices. Means of
1.5
isolation may be included in the board or

may be provided separately.
Distribution circuit: A category I circuit connecting the origin

of the installations to:-
a) an item of switchgear, or
b) an item of control gear, or
c) a distribution board to which one or
more final circuits or items of
current-using equipment are
connected (see also definition of
Final circuit).A distribution circuit
may also connect the origin of an
installation to an outlying building or
separate installation, when it is
sometimes called a sub-main.
Double insulation: Insulation comprising both basic

insulation and supplementary insulation.
Duct: A closed passageway formed

underground or in a structure and
intended to receive one or more cables
which may be drawn in.
Fault: A circuit condition in which current flows

through an abnormal or unintended path.
This may result from an insulation failure
or a bridging of insulation. Conventionally
the impedance between live conductors
or between live conductors and exposed
or extraneous-conductive-parts at the
fault position is considered negligible.
Fault current: A current resulting from a fault.
Final circuit: A circuit connected directly to current-

using equipment, or to a socket-outlet or
socket-outlets or other outlet points for the
connection of such equipment.
Flexible cable: A cable whose structure and materials

make it suitable to be flexed while in
service.
Flexible cord: A flexible cable in which the cross-

sectional area of each conductor does not
exceed 4 mm2
1.6
Fuse carrier: The movable part of a fuse designed to

carry a fuse link.
Fuse element: A part of a fuse designed to melt when

the fuse operates.
Fuse link: A part of a fuse, including the fuse

element(s), which requires replacement
by a new or renewable fuse link after the
fuse has operated and before the fuse is
put back into service.
Fused plug: A plug having provision for a replaceable

cartridge fuse link.
Fused socket-outlet: A socket-outlet having provision for a

replaceable cartridge fuse link.
Indirect contact: A contact of persons or livestock with

exposed-conductive-parts which have
become live under fault conditions.
Insulation: Suitable non-conductive material

enclosing, surrounding or supporting a
conductor.
Isolator: A mechanical switching device which, in

the open position, complies with the
requirements specified for isolation. An
isolator is otherwise known as a
disconnector.
Live part: A conductor or conductive part

intended to be energized in normal use,
including a neutral conductor but, by
convention, not a PEN conductor.
Luminaire: Equipment which distributes, filters or

transforms the light from one or more
lamps, and which includes any parts
necessary for supporting, fixing and
protecting the lamps, but not the lamps
themselves, and, where necessary, circuit
auxiliaries together with the means for
connecting them to the supply. For the
purpose of this Code, a lamp holder,
however supported, is deemed to be a
luminaire.
1.7
Main earthing terminal: The terminal or bar provided for a

connection of protective conductors,
including equipotential bonding
conductors, and conductors for functional
earthing, if any, to the means of earthing.
Neutral conductor: A conductor connected to the neutral

point of a system and contributing to the
transmission of electrical energy. The
term also means the equivalent conductor
of an IT or d.c system unless otherwise
specified in the Code.
Non-rewirable plug: A plug so constructed that it forms a

complete unit with the flexible cord after
connection and assembly by the
manufacturer of the plug.
Origin of an installation: The position at which

electrical energy is delivered to
an electrical installation.
Over-current: A current exceeding the rated value. For
conductors the rated value is the current-
carrying capacity.
Over-current detection: A method of establishing that the value of

current in a circuit exceeds a
predetermined value for a specified length
of time.
Overload current: An over-current occurring in a circuit

which is electrically sound.
Phase conductor: A conductor of an a.c. system for the

transmission of electrical energy other
than a neutral conductor, a protective
conductor or a PEN conductor. The term
also means the equivalent conductor of a
d.c. system unless otherwise specified in
the Code.
Plug: A device, provided with contact pins,

which is intended to be attached to a
flexible cable, and which can be engaged
with a socket-outlet or with a connector.
1.8
Point (in wiring): A termination of the fixed wiring intended

for the connection of current-using
equipment.
Portable equipment: Electrical equipment which is moved while

in operation or which can easily be moved
from one place to another while
connected to the supply.
Protective multiple earthing (PME): An earthing arrangement, found

in TN-C-S systems, in which the supply
neutral conductor is used to connect the
earthing conductor of an installation with
Earth.
Public supply: The supply of electrical energy to the

premises of any person by licensed
electricity service provider.
Rewirable plug: A plug so constructed that a flexible cord

can be fitted or replaced using general
purpose tools.
Reduced low voltage system: A system in which the nominal phase

to phase voltage does not exceed 110
volts and the nominal phase to earth
voltage does not exceed 63.5 volts.
Ring final circuit: A final circuit arranged in the form of a

ring and connected to a single point of
supply.
SELV (separated extra-low voltage): An extra-low voltage system

which is electrically separated from Earth
and from other systems in such a way
that a single fault cannot give rise to the
risk of electric shock.
Short-circuit current: An over-current resulting from a fault of

negligible impedance between live
conductors having a difference in
potential under normal operating
conditions.
Skilled person: A person with technical knowledge or

sufficient experience to enable him/her to
avoid dangers which electricity may
create.
1.9
Socket-outlet: A device, provided with female contacts,

which is intended to be installed with the
fixed wiring, and intended to receive a
plug. A luminaire track system is not
regarded as a socket-outlet system.
Shutter: A movable device arranged to shield the

current-carrying socket-outlet contacts
automatically when a corresponding plug
is removed.
Street furniture: Fixed equipment, located on a highway,

the purpose of which is directly
associated with the use of the highway.
Street located equipment: Fixed equipment, located on a highway,

the purpose of which is not directly
associated with the use of the highway.
Supplier: A person who supplies electrical

energy, and, where electric lines and
apparatus used for that purpose are
owned otherwise than by that person,
shall include the owner of those electric
lines and apparatus.
Supplier’s works: Electric lines, supports and apparatus of,

or under the control of, a supplier used for
the purposes of supply, and cognate
expressions shall be construed
accordingly.
Substation: Any premises, or that part of any

premises in which electrical energy is
transformed or converted to or from
voltage above low voltage, except for the
purpose of working instruments, relays, or
similar auxiliary apparatus, if such
premises or part of the premises are large
enough for a person to enter after the
apparatus is in position.
Switchboard passage-way: A passage-way or compartment large

enough for a person to enter, and used in
connection with a switchboard when live.
Switched socket-outlet: A socket-outlet with an associated switch

to disconnect the supply from the line
socket contact or from both line and
neutral socket contacts.
1.10
Switch: A mechanical device capable of making,

carrying and breaking current under
normal circuit conditions, which may
include specified operating overload
conditions, and also of carrying for a
specified time currents under specified
abnormal circuit conditions such as those
of short-circuit. It may also be capable of
making, but not breaking, short-circuit
currents.
Switchboard: An assembly of switchgear with or without

instruments, but the term does not apply
to groups of local switches in final circuits.
Switchgear: Main switches, cut-outs or fuses,

conductors and other apparatus in
connection therewith, used for the
purpose of controlling or protecting
electrical circuits or machines or other
current using appliances.
System: An electrical system consisting of a single

source of electrical energy and an
installation. For the purpose of this
Regulation (Code), the system adapted
shall be protective multiple earthing
(PME), in accordance with the Uganda
Electricity Distribution Company.
Voltage, nominal: Voltage by which an installation (or part of

an installation) is designated. The
following ranges of nominal voltage (r.m.s
values for a.c.) are defined:-
Extra-low voltage: Normally not exceeding 50 V a.c. or 120

V ripple free d.c., whether between
conductors or to earth.
Low voltage: Normally exceeding extra-low voltage but

not exceeding 1000V a.c. and d.c.
between conductors, or 600 V a.c. and
d.c. between conductors and earth.
Medium voltage: Normally exceeding 1kv but not

exceeding 35 kv.
1.11
High voltage: Normally exceeding 35kv but not

exceeding 230 kv.
The actual voltage of the installation may differ from the nominal value
by a quantity within normal tolerances.
1.12
Code for Electrical Installations and Equipment in BuildingsSection 2
SECTION 2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Administrative
2.1.1 In exercise of the powers conferred upon the Minister by Section

47 of the BuildingControl Act, this Code for Electrical
Installations and Equipment in Buildings has been adapted
and hereby orders and directs its observance.
2.1.2 This Code shall be cited as the Code for Electrical Installations
and Equipment in Buildings.
2.1.3 Electrical contractors or other responsible for the carrying out the
work shall obtain a permit from the Authority before commencing
work with respect to installation, alteration, repair, or extension of
any equipment
2.1.4 An application for inspection shall be fixed with the Authority on a

form provided by the later at the time the permit is obtained.
2.1.5 A copy of the permit shall be posted in a conspicuous place on

the site of the work and shall not be removed until the inspection
is completed
2.1.6 The Authority shall be notified in writing by the electrical

contractor that work is ready for inspection at such time or times
as will permit inspection being made before any work or portion
thereof is commenced.
2.1.7 Plans and specifications in duplicate or in greater number if

required by the Authority, one copy to be retained by the
Authority shall be submitted by the owner or his agent to, and
acceptance obtained from, the Authority before work is
commenced on:
a) wiring installation of residential, commercial, public buildings, and other
establishments in which public safety is involved;.
b) large light and power installations and the installation or apparatus such
as generators transformers switchboards, large storage batteries;
c) such other installations as may be prescribed by the Authority.
2.1.8 Where any electrical installation or part thereof to which electrical

power or energy has not previously been supplied is made in or
upon any land building or premises, where any electrical
installation or part thereof has been disconnected or cut off from
any service or other source of supply under this code, no Private
Generating Plant, contractor or other person shall connect or
reconnect the installation or part thereof to any service or other
source of supply unless:
2.1
a) the installation and all work in respect thereof have been inspected by an
authorized person;
b) a connection authorization has been issued by the Authority in respect of
the installation.
2.1.9 The Authority reserves the right to re-inspect at any time

electrical installation notwithstanding any previous inspection and
acceptance, if and when it considers such action to be necessary.
2.1.10 The Authority may require such changes as may be necessary

to be made to existing installations where, through hard usage
wear and tear, or as a result of alteration or extensions,
dangerous conditions have developed.
2.1.11 No one shall use any electrical equipment other than approved
electrical equipment of a kind or type and rating approved for the
specific purpose for which it is to be employed.
2.1.12 In any case where deviation or postponement of the Regulation

(Code) may be necessary, special permission shall be obtained
before proceeding with the work, but this special permission shall
apply only to the particular installation for witch it is given.
2.1.13 Even though approval has previously been granted, the

Authority may reject, at any time any electrical equipment under
any of the following conditions:
a) if the equipment is substandard with respect to the sample on which
approval was granted;
b) if the condition of use indicate that the equipment is not suitable;
c) if the terms of the approval agreement are not being carried out.
2.1.14 Electrical equipment shall be installed as to insure that, after

installation, there is ready access to nameplates and access to
parts requiring maintenance.
2.1.15 No person shall interfere with any electrical installation or

component thereof except when, in the course of alteration or
repairs to non-electrical equipment or structures, it may be
necessary to disconnect or move components of an electrical
installation.
2.1.16 It shall be the responsibility of the person carrying out the

alteration or repairs to issue that the electrical installation is
restored to a safe operating condition as soon as the progress of
the alterations or repair will permit.
2.2 Technical
2.2.1 Graphical symbols that are to be used in all drawings, wiring

plans, etc. for electrical installation of buildings shall be issued by
Authority having jurisdiction or reference may be made to other
2.2
recognized Code of practice.
2.2.2 Proper coordination and collaboration between the architect,

building engineer and the electrical engineer shall be effected
from the planning stage of the installation.
2.2.3 The provisions that will be needed for the accommodation of

substation, transformer, switch room, lift wells and other
equipment rooms, service cable ducts, rising mains and
distribution cables, sub-distribution boards, openings and chases
in floor and walls for all required electrical installations etc. shall
be specified in advance.
2.2.4 The ideal location of an electrical substation for a group of

buildings would be at the load center and shall be located on the
ground floor.
2.2.5 In multi–storeyed buildings, the substation shall preferably be

installed on the lowest floor level, but direct access from the
street for installation or removal of equipment shall be provided.
The floor level of the substation or switch room shall be above the
highest flood level of the locality. In this case, the load center
would be somewhere between the geometrical center and the air-
conditioning plant room.
2.2.6 The availability of power lines nearby may also be kept in view
while deciding the location of the substation.
2.2.7 In allocating area of a substation it shall be noted that the flow of

electric power is from supply company’s line to transformer where
required and finally to the low voltage switchgear room. The
layout shall be in accordance with this flow.
2.2.8 The following rooms are required in a substation:
a) switchgear room-Supply company’s switchgear room and/or

space for meters.
b) transformers room-The number and size of transformer rooms
shall be ascertained from the total power requirement of the
consumer where required.
c) stand-by generator room-A room for housing a stand-by
generator in accordance with the requirement of the supplier
where required.
2.2.9 In large installations other than where a substation is provided, a

separate switch room shall be provided; this shall be located as
closely as possible to the electrical load center and suitable ducts
shall be laid with minimum number of bends from the point of
entry of the supply to the position of the main switchgear.
2.3
2.2.10 The switch room shall be placed in such a position that rising
ducts may readily be provided there from to the upper floors of
the building in one straight vertical run.
2.2.11 In larger buildings, more than one rising duct and horizontal
ducts may also be required for running cable from the switch
room to the foot of each rising main.
2.2.12 Suitably segregated cable ducts shall be reserved for the

electrical services which may, include low and extra-low voltage
installations, such as bell call-systems; fire alarm and computer
net work system and telephone installations.
2.2.13 The electrical control gear distribution boards and other

apparatus, which are required on each floor, may conveniently be
mounted adjacent to the rising mains, and adequate space
should be provided at each floor for this purpose.
2.2.14 Information regarding provision for and location of PBX/PABX

shall be obtained from the relevant authority and adequate space
should be provided for the installation of the boards.
2.3 Planning and Designing
2.3.1 The design and planning of an electrical installation shall take into
account all the prevailing conditions which may include some or
all of the following:
a) type of supply;
b) envisaged load having regard to the requirements of the owner
or occupant;
c) the probable modifications and future extensions;
d) the degree of electrical and mechanical protection necessary;
e) the probable operation and maintenance cost taking into
account the electricity supply tariffs available;
f) the relative cost of various alternative methods;
g) the need for radio and telecommunication interference
abatement.
2.3.2 The electrical layout should be considered after proper locations

of all outlets for lamps, fans, and appliances- both fixed and
transportable, motors, etc, have been selected and best methods
of wiring determined.
2.3.3 All runs of wiring and exact positions of all points of switch-boxes
and other outlets shall be first marked on the plans of the building
and approved by the engineer in charge or the owner before the
2.4
actual commencement of the work.
2.3.4 The design of electrical installation shall insure:
a) the protection of persons livestock and property;

b) the proper functioning of electrical installation for the intended
use.
2.3.5 The information required as a basis for design shall be:
a) nature of current; a.c and/or d.c

b) nature and number of conductors:
i) fora.c
- phase conductor(s)
- neutral conductor;
- protective conductor,
ii) ford.c
- conductors equivalent to those listed above
c) voltage and voltage tolerances;
d) frequency and frequency tolerances;
e) maximum current allowable
f) prospective sort-circuit current;
g) nature of demand;
h) emergency supply or supplies;
i) environmental conditions;
2.3.6 The design shall comply with the requirements of this Regulation
(Code).
2.3.7 Each piece of electrical equipment shall bear such of the

following markings as may be necessary to identify the
equipment and ensure that it is suitable for the particular
installation.
a) the maker’s name, trademark or other recognized symbol of

identification;
b) catalogue number or type;
c) voltage;
d) rated load amperes;
e) watts volt-amperes or horsepower;
f) whether for d.c ,a.c or both;
g) number of phases;
h) frequency in Hertz;
i) rated load speed in revolution per minute;
j) designation of terminals;
k) whether for continuous or intermittent duty;
l) evidence of approval;
m) such other marking as may be necessary to ensure safe and
proper operation.
2.5
2.3.8 Each service box, at the time of installation, shall be marked in a

conspicuous, legible and permanent manner to indicate clearly
the maximum rating of the over-current device which may be
used for this installation.
2.3.9 At each distribution point, circuit breakers, fuses and switches

shall be marked, adjacent thereto, in a conspicuous and legible
manner to indicate clearly:
a) which installation or portion of installation they protect or

control;
b) the maximum rating of over-current device that is permitted.
2.6
SECTION 3 METHODS OF INSTALLATION
3.1 General
3.1.1 Requirements for approval of building plans shall include

drawings, for electrical installations and equipment in
accordance with Section 2, Clause 2.1 (8).
3.1.2 All works shall be finished, completed and ready for service. It
shall be tested in accordance with this Code and to the
satisfaction of the Building Committee, through its nominated
supervising officer.
3.1.3 The Contractor shall supply all superintendence and labour,

skilled and unskilled, necessary to carry out the work in the best
possible manner. Trade custom in the various classes of work
must be followed.
3.1.4 All of the installation and components thereof shall be in

accordance with the latest edition of and current amendments to:-
(a) "Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings", issued

by the Institution of Electrical Engineers (IEE), Great Britain;
(b) Uganda Government Electricity Rules currently in force.
3.2 Fundamental Requirements for Safety
3.2.1 Workmanship and Materials
3.2.1.1 All Equipment shall be constructed, installed and

protected and shall be capable of being maintained,
inspected and tested, so as to prevent danger so far as is
reasonably practicable.
3.2.1.2 All equipment shall be suitable for the maximum power

demanded by the current-using equipment when it is
functioning in its intended manner.
3.2.1.3 All electrical conductors shall be of sufficient size and

current carrying capacity for the purpose for which they
are intended.
3.2.1.4 All conductors shall either be insulated and where

necessary further effectively protected or be so placed
and safeguarded as to prevent danger, so far as is
reasonably practicable.
3.2.1.5 All conductors and equipment likely to be exposed to

weather, corrosive and explosive atmospheres,
3. 1
inflammable surroundings, or other adverse conditions

shall be so constructed or protected as may be necessary
to prevent danger arising from such exposure.
3.2.2 Protective Devices
3.2.2.1 Every installation and every circuit thereof shall be

protected against over current by devices which:
a) will operate automatically at values of current which

are suitably related to the safe current rating of the
circuit, and
b) are of adequate breaking capacity and where
appropriate, making capacity, and
c) are suitably located and are constructed so as to
prevent danger from overheating, arcing or the
scattering of hot particles when they come into
operation, and
d) to permit ready restoration of the supply without
danger.
3.2.2.2 Every switch, circuit-breaker, and isolating link shall be:
(a) so constructed, placed or protected as to prevent

danger;
(b) so constructed and adjusted as accurately to make
and to maintain good contact;
(c) provided with an efficient handle or other means of
working, insulated from the system and so arranged
that the hand cannot inadvertently touch live metal;
(d) so constructed or arranged that it cannot accidentally
fall or move into contact when left out in off position.
3.2.2.3 Every switch intended to be used for breaking a circuit
and every circuit-breaker shall be so constructed that it
cannot with proper care be left in partial contact. This
applies to single pole, double-pole, or multi-pole switches
or circuit.
3.2.2.4 Efficient means, suitably located, shall be provided for

cutting off all voltage from every part of a system as may
be necessary to prevent danger.
3.2.2.5 Every fuse shall have a fusible metal that shall be readily
renewed without any danger.
3.2.2.6 Every electrical joint and connection shall provide durable

electrical continuity, insulation and adequate mechanical
strength.
3. 2
3.2.2.7 Where one of the conductors of a system is connected to

earth, no single-pole switch, other than a link for testing
purposes or a switch for use in controlling a generator,
shall be placed in such conductor or any branch thereof.
3.2.2.8 A switch or automatic or other cut-out may, however, be

placed in the connection between the conductor and earth
at the generating station, for use in testing and
emergencies only.
3.2.3 Portable Appliances
3.2.3.1 Every flexible wire for portable apparatus shall be

connected to the system either by efficient permanent
joints or connections or by a properly constructed
connector.
3.2.3.2 The metal-work of a portable apparatus, pendant lamps

with switches and any flexible metallic covering of the
conductors shall be efficiently earthed.
3.2.3.3 A lamp holder shall not be in metallic connection with the

guard or other metal-work of a portable or pendant lamp.
3.2.3.4 Any portable apparatus and its flexible wire shall be

controlled by efficient means suitably located and
capable of cutting off the supply.
3.2.3.5 Where the voltage exceeds low voltage the metal-work

shall be efficiently earthed independently of any flexible
metallic cover of the conductors and any such flexible
cover shall itself be independently earthed.
3.3 Switchboard and Switchgear
3.3.1 General
3.3.1.1 Switchboards for the control of equipment rated at

240V/415V shall conform with BS 5486 (IEC 60439:
Part1). Panels shall be free standing of uniform height,
flush mounted and totally enclosed protection class not
less than IP 43 in accordance with BS 5420:1977.
3.3.1.2 Each switchboard shall be controlled by a suitable

isolating switch/circuit breaker. The general arrangement
of switchboards shall, so far as is practicable, be such
that:
a) all parts which may have to be adjusted or handled are

readily accessible;
3. 3
b) the course of every conductor may where necessary be

readily traced;
c) conductors not arranged for connection to the same
system are kept well apart,and can, where necessary,
be readily distinguished;
d) all bare conductors are so placed protected as to
prevent danger from accidental short circuit.
3.3.1.3 The following equipment may be housed in the panels as

required and where applicable:
a) ammeters, voltmeter and selector switches for incoming supply;
b) main incoming circuit breaker;
c) moulded-case (MCCB) and miniature (MCB) circuit breakers for
power socket lighting ; etc.
d) automatic changeover contactor unit for stand-by generator;
e) auxiliary facilities like emergency power shut-off, under voltage
relay release and power factor correction;
f) any other equipment necessary for proper operation of the
system.
3.3.1.4 The base of the panel shall be effectively sealed against

the ingress of vermin and termites, and all equipment shall
be rated for continuous operation in a tropical climate. Any
ventilation louvers shall be backed by brass fine mesh
gauze to exclude termites.
3.3.1.5 Framework for the panels shall be of welded construction

and panels shall be fabricated from mild steel sheet of
2mm minimum thickness, folded and braced where
necessary to provide a rigid structure.
3.3.1.6 All bolts, nuts, screws, hinges, handles etc shall be

corrosion resistant. Interiors shall be furnished white, and
the exterior shall be furnished to light grey shade except
the plinth which shall be black.
3.3.1.7 Cabling access shall be from the rear by means of

gasketted bolt-on plates, which shall be fitted with handles
to facilitate removal/replacement. Access to the cubicles
or cubicles compartments for all normal routine
maintenance shall be from front by hinged and lockable
doors fitted with neoprene gaskets (all gaskets shall be
termite resistant) and chromium plated lockable tee type
handles. All doors shall be electrically bonded to the main
frame, using adequate flexible conductors, protected
against mechanical damage.
3. 4
3.3.1.8 All locks on a given panel unit shall be operated by the

same key. Each multi-compartment control panel shall
comprise an assembly of individually constructed cubicles.
These shall be assembled to include a metallic sheet
between adjacent cubicles. In each multi-compartment
panel at least one empty compartment shall be provided
for future use.
3.3.1.9 Panels shall be readily capable of extension at either end,

within the bus bar rating. Where panel size is excessive,
easily handled sections shall be supplied for site
assembly. Sections shall be fitted with eyebolts, which
after positioning of the panel, shall be removed and
replaced with plated bolts and washers.
3.3.1.10 All bus-bars shall be of electro tinned copper, and shall

be of uniform section throughout the length of the panel.
They shall be run in a separate screened compartment
divided with barriers into as many compartments as there
are cubicles in the panel. Access to individual
compartments shall be via bolt-on cover plates each
bearing the legend in white on a red background:-
“DANGER” – “LIVE BUS-BARS,” also the red arrow
symbol denoting danger from electric shock. The neutral
bus-bars shall be not less than half the cross sectional
area of the base bars. Phase bus-bars shall be colour
coded Red, Yellow and Blue. The neutral shall be black.
3.3.1.11 Panels shall be equipped with an electro tinned earth

running the full length of the panel rated to withstand
without damage, the thermal and dynamic effects of earth
fault currents, minimum size shall be 25 x 3mm.
3.3.1.12 The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all

components, sub-assemblies, gland plates, etc are solidly
bonded to earth using green/ yellow PVC insulated copper
conductors of appropriate cross sectional area. Reliance
on metal to metal joints for electrical continuity will not be
accepted.
3.3.1.13 Surge arresters shall be installed on the 240V/415V bus- Surge

bar of the LV panel. They shall be connected permanently Voltage
between each phase and earth and shall be as near as Protection
possible to the incoming circuit breaker. Each unit shall be
seated and encapsulated with connecting tails and be
suitable for continuous operation at 400V.
It shall also comply with class 2.5KA requirements according to IEC

60099: Part1. All solid state control or electronic devices which may
be located within panel, shall be individually protected by surge
arresters.
3. 5
Small
Wiring
3.3.1.14 Suitably sized compression type cable gland shall be

provided for all cables. Glands used for armoured cable
shall include provision for sealing the armour wires to
protect them from corrosion and to prevent ingress of
moisture into the cable. Brass lugs shall be provided for
connection of the cable armouring to earth. Adequately
sized blank gland plates shall be provided below each out
going terminal section to accommodate the requisite
glands. Gland plates shall be positioned 200mm minimum
above the base of the cubicle, and shall be solidly bonded
to earth.
3.3.1.15 All indicating instrument shall be moving iron type with a Door
quadrant scale of minimum length 75 mm and conform to Mounted
IEC 60051. Their accuracy shall be to class 2.5 or better. Compone
Main switchboards and control panels shall be equipped
with voltmeter and ammeter selection switches. All
instruments and protective relays shall be flush mounted
and effectively sealed against ingress of moisture, dust
and insects.
3.3.1.16 Control and selector switches shall have their positions

clearly labeled and additional shall each have a separate
label to indicate the switch function. Label shall
correspond with the associated schematic diagrams.
3.3.1.17 Interlocks of a substantial mechanical type shall be

provided on each cubicle between door and the circuit
breaker or fused switch such that the door cannot be
opened unless the circuit breaker or fused switch is in the
off position. ON/ OFF switches and circuit breakers shall
be pad-lockable in the ‘OFF’ position.
3.3.1.18 Push buttons and indication lamps shall be selected from

a matching range and they shall be colour coded in
compliance with IEC 60073 as follows:
Indicating Lamps Colour
On White
Off Green
Fault Red
Alarms Yellow
Heaters Blue
Push Buttons Colour

Start Green
Stop Red
Alarm accept Black
Emergency stop Red
3.3.1.19 Each indicating lamp shall incorporate a push-test

feature. Alternatively a test push button shall be provided
3. 6
which activates all lamps simultaneously via a contactor.

Lamp fittings shall be capable of pre-lamping from the
front of the panel, and shall be positively locked against
rotation.
3.3.1.20 Fault indicating lamps shall remain on until the associated

trip relay is reset or the fault is corrected. Should there be
an interruption to the electricity supply, all fault indicating
lamps will again be illuminated on reconnection of the
supply, until the fault is cleared or the trip relay is reset.
3.3.1.21 At exposed terminals on the rear of door mounted

components shall be shrouded to prevent accidental
contact when the panel doors are open. Component
labels shall also be of laminated plastic and shall show the
reference by which it is identified on the schematic
diagram.
3.3.1.22 When an item of switchgear is required by the Code to

disconnect all live conductors of a circuit, it shall be of a
type such that the neutral conductor cannot be
disconnected or reconnected before the phase
conductors.
3.3.1.23 All switchgears shall be of 240 volt or 415 volt grade

according to application. It shall be single pole and
neutral, double pole and neutral, triple pole and neutral,
and quad pole and neutral, as specified in the bill of
quantities.
3. 7
3.3.1.24 Consumer units shall comply with BS EN 60439.

Miniature Circuit Breaker that comply with BS EN 60898
shall be used ,but Cartridge fuse links, fuse carriers,
bases and associated parts that comply with BS 1361
may be used in the installation as specified and agreed by
the Engineer. Residual current operated circuit breakers
(RCCB) that comply with BS 4293 shall be included to
give added protection against earth faults.
3.3.1.25 Three phase switchgear terminals shall be connected

with phases red, yellow and blue in that order from left to
right.
3.3.1.26 All main gear is to be sign-written with the place of

isolation if remote from isolation.
Complete fuse charts shall be fixed in lids or mounted

adjacent to all distribution boards.
3.3.1.27 Labels engraved "DANGER 415 VOLTS" shall be
attached to all three phase switches and distribution gear.
3.3.2 Isolation (Protection against direct contact)
3.3.2.1 Every switchboard having bare conductors normally so

exposed that it may be touched, shall, if not located in an
area or areas set apart for the purpose, where necessary
be suitably fenced or enclosed.
3.3.2.2 No person except an authorized person, or a person

acting under his immediate supervision, shall have
access to any part of an area so set apart.
3.3.2.3 All apparatus appertaining to a switchboard and requiring

handling, shall so far as is practicable be so placed or
arranged as to be operated from the working platform of a
switchboard.
3.3.2.4 All measuring instruments and indicators connected

therewith shall, so far as is practicable, be so placed as to
be observed from the working platform. If such apparatus
be worked or observed from any other place, adequate
precautions shall be taken to prevent danger.
3.3.2.5 Where bare conductors are exposed and arranged in

such a way that they shall be touched when live, a clear
and unobstructed passage-way, free from danger, of
ample width and height, with a firm even floor shall be
provided
3.3.2.6 Where necessary to prevent danger, adequate

3. 8
precautions shall be taken either by earthing or by other

suitable means to prevent any metal other than the
conductor from become electrically charged.
3.3.2.7 Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent any

conductor or apparatus from being accidentally or
inadvertently electrically charged when persons are
working thereon.
3.3.2.8 Insulating stands or screens shall be provided and kept

permanently in position, and shall be maintained in sound
condition.
3.3.2.9 Portable insulating stands, screens, boots, gloves or

other suitable means shall be provided and used when
necessary to prevent danger, and shall be periodically
examined by an authorized person.
3. 9
3.3.2.10 Adequate working space and means of access, free from

danger, shall be provided for all apparatus that has to be
worked or attended to by any person.
3.3.2.11 All those parts of premises in which apparatus is placed

shall be adequately lighted to prevent danger.
3.3.2.12 No person except an authorized and competent person

over the apparent age of twenty or acting under his
immediate supervision shall undertake any work such as
repair, alteration, extension, cleaning or such work where
technical knowledge or experience is required
3.3.2.13 Where a contractor is employed, and the danger to be

avoided is under his control, the contractor shall appoint
the authorized person, but if the danger to be avoided is
under the control of the occupier, the occupier shall
appoint the authorized person.
3.3.2.14 Every substation shall be substantially constructed and

shall be so arranged that no person other than an
authorized person can obtain access thereto otherwise
than by the proper entrance, or can interfere with the
apparatus or conductors therein from outside.
3.3.2.15 Every substation shall be provided with efficient means of

ventilation and, in the cases of open-air substations, it
shall be kept dry.
3.3.2.16 Every substation shall be under the control of an

authorized person, and none but an authorized person or
a person acting under his immediate supervision shall
enter any part thereof where there may be danger.
3.3.2.17 Every underground substation not otherwise easily and

safely accessible shall be provided with adequate means
of access by a door, or trap door, with a staircase or
ladder securely fixed and so placed that no live part of
any switchboard or any bare conductor shall be within the
reach of a person thereon
3.3.2.18 Instructions in the prescribed form as to the treatment of

persons suffering from electric shock shall be affixed in all
premises where electrical energy is generated,
transformed, or used above low voltage; and in such
premises or classes of premises in which electrical
energy is generated, transformed or used at or below low
voltage as the Responsible Officer may direct.
3.3.2.19 Occupiers and contractors shall ensure that authorized or
3. 10
competent persons employed by them are conversant

with these instructions.
3.3.3 Cable Terminations to Switch Gear
3.3.3.1 Unless instructed otherwise by the Engineer cable

termination boxes to switchgear shall be supplied and
fixed under a separate contract. The cable contractor will
however be required to make the cable terminations and
supply all necessary compounds, solder, tape and
bonding materials.
3. 11
3.4 Wiring and Wiring Accessories
3.4.1 Cable Wiring
3.4.1.1 Wiring of the main and final sub-circuits shall be carried

out in PVC insulated and PVC sheathed cables as
specified on the drawings or contract documents.
3.4.1.2 All cables shall be manufactured and tested in
accordance with BS 2004(US 602 and 605) with the
exception that the conductors need not necessarily be
tinned.
3.4.1.3 `All cables shall be of a minimum 240 volt grade unless
stated otherwise and not less than 1mm2.
3.4.1.4 The final sub-circuit wiring for all services shall be of such
cross-section that the permissible voltage drop as allowed
for in the IEE Wiring Regulations current Edition is not
exceeded.
3.4.1.5 Calculations shall be based on final sub-circuit distribution
board to the last point in the circuit. Note: mains and sub-
mains have been calculated for in this arrangement.
3.4.1.6 No cables forming sub-circuits connected to different
distribution boards are to be drawn in the same conduit or
draw-in box.
3.4.1.7 No reduction of the number of strands forming the
conductors will be allowed at switch or other terminals,
and all strands shall be efficiently secured by screws or
nuts and washers or some other approved method.
3.4.1.8 No cables shall be installed within 300mm of galvanized
iron roofs when run on surface unless authorized by the
Engineer.
3.4.1.9 Unless otherwise specified, all outdoor wiring shall be
carried out in PVC cables buried underground and
protected by conduit or other suitable means where rising
above ground.
3.4.1.10 Unless specifically indicated on the drawing, not
more than one phase of the a.c. installation shall be
brought into a switch, ceiling rose or socket-outlet or
other fitting in the lighting or single phase power circuits.
3.4.1.11 All flexible conductors to lighting fittings etc. shall
be visible without exception.
3.4.1.12 Cable joints shall be kept to a minimum in any part
of underground wiring system. However, where such
joints are unavoidable and are specified on the drawings
or are deemed to be necessary by the Engineer they
3. 12
shall be "made off" to an approved terminal block, of

approved current rating for the associated cable, housed
within a suitable case or box.
3.4.1.13 Connections between flexible cables and conduit
wiring shall be made by means of an approved connector
secured in a suitable case or box.
3.4.1.14 Lighting switches shall be connected in the phase
line of all circuits.
3.4.1.15 Ceiling switches when called for shall be fixed at a
distance of not less than 300mm from the point they
control and shall not foul the associated fitting.
3.4.1.16 Sheathed cables without conduit protection shall
only be used when they are approved by the Building
Committee.
3.4.1.17 Sheathed cables shall be secured to the surface of
walls and ceiling by means of saddles or clips with brass
pins where fixed to wood, screws in other positions.
3.4.1.18 Where the materials of a building are unsuitable for
direct cable mounting, timber battens shall be provided
by the main building contractor for securing cables.
3.4.1.19 Electrical contractors shall supply and fix timber
battens on contracts where building contractors are not
present. The maximum spacing of saddles or clips shall
comply with current IEE Wiring Regulations. Cable
sheathing shall be carried well into all accessories such
as junction boxes, control gear, cases, etc.
3.4.1.20 Where sheathed cables pass through ceilings, the
holes shall be made good to prevent any possibility of the
spread of fire.
3.4.1.21 Where cables pass through walls and floors, the
holes shall be fitted with sleeves with bushed or belled
ends to avoid any possibility of damage to the cables.
3.4.1.22 Where switchgear is mounted on the external
surface of buildings, all cables entering the building must
be enclosed in conduit.
3.4.1.23 Where a building is fed by an overhead line
distribution system, the service cable shall be led to the
switchgear in conduit with "swan neck" and "bell mouth"
at take off, and constructed in such a fashion as to
prevent the ingress of moisture.
3.4.1.24 Flexible cords shall be: -
a) not less than 0.75mm2,
b) fire resistant
3. 13
c) manufactured and tested in accordance with BS 6007

and BS 6500, and particular attention must be paid to
the application of Regulations BS 36 of the current
IEE regulations.
3.4.1.25 Unless otherwise stated on contract documents,

cables shall be coloured as follows:-
(a) Red phase : Red /Brown
Yellow phase : Yellow/Brown
Blue phase : Blue /Brown
Neutral : Black/Blue
(b) d.c. positive: Red/Brown ,d.c. negative Black /Blue
(c) Earth wire in all circumstances: Green / Yellow
When brown is used phases shall be clearly marked or

taped.
3.4.2 Cable Trunking
3.4.2.1 Trunking of all sizes shall be secured at intervals of not

more than 1200mm, and joints shall overhang fixings by
more than 600mm.
3.4.2.2 All tees and bends shall leave the trunking trough clear
of obstructions and continuously open except when
passing through walls and floors.
3.4.2.3 When trunking passes through walls, floors and ceilings,
the covers shall be solidly fixed to 13mm of either sides of
walls, and 150mm of either side of floors and ceilings.
3.4.2.4 No trunking shall be installed with its cover on the
underside unless detailed onthe drawing or authorized by
the Engineer.
3.4.2.5 Screws and bolts securing trunking covers shall be so
designed that damage to cables cannot occur when fixing
covers in position by such screws and/or bolts.
3.4.2.6 Adjoining sections of trunking shall be tightly secured
and joined by copper bending links. The trunking shall be
electrically and mechanically continuous throughout its
length.
3.4.2.7 Where switchgear and fuse boards, etc., are secured to
trunking, such connections shall be made by necks and
not by multiple conduit couplers unless specifically
authorized by the Engineer.
3.4.2.8 Where trunking is slotted to receive connecting necks,
gaskets made from synthetic resins bonded fabric to BS
2966, 20mm smaller than the trunking, shall be fixed in
position to prevent abrasion to cables on sharp edges.
3. 14
3.4.2.9 Where cables are installed in trunking, each group of

cables comprising a circuit shall be half hitched at 600mm
intervals , and the circuit reference identified with "Elasso"
or similar approved tape at 1800mm intervals on straight
runs and 150mm back from tees and bends.
3.4.3 Conduit Wiring
3.4.3.1 All conduit and conduit fittings shall be manufactured and

tested in accordance with the requirements of BSEN
60423, BS 731 and BS 31 Class B, and all conduit boxes
shall be provided with covers.
3.4.3.2 All conduit and conduit fittings shall be of heavy gauge,
solid drawn or welded steel, galvanized or sheradised
when run externally; black enamel or "high impact" rigid
grade plastic where run internally.
3.4.3.3 Where internal surface conduit is detailed in the case of
bathrooms, kitchens, laundries, ducts and any damp
disputations, galvanized conduits shall be used. Plastic
conduit may be used on the surface upon approval of the
Building Committee.
3.4.3.4 Conduit shall not be less than 20mm diameter.
3.4.3.5 Fixing screws for all conduits, switches and box covers
shall be made of brass or sheradised.
3.4.3.6 "Spacer bar" type saddles shall be used for fixing of
conduit on the surface of walls and ceilings.
3.4.3.7 Spacing of saddles shall be such as to give adequate
support. Saddles shall be installed within 300mm either
side of conduit boxes where the free length of conduit
exceeds this distance.
3.4.3.8 Multiple saddles shall be used where two or more surface
conduits run parallel and adjacent to each other.
3.4.3.9 Where conduit passes through a floor, wall, partition or
ceiling, the fabric shall be made good with cement or
the fabric medium to the thickness of floor, wall, etc.
3.4.3.10 Where conduits terminate at a main switchboard,
distribution board, consumer unit, box or any metal-clad
accessory, screwed sockets shall be used and so
arranged as to be in good mechanical and electrical
contact with the metal case, with internal brass male
bushes into the sockets from the inside of the case and
the two locked together.
3. 15
3.4.3.11 All conduit bends are to be made on site and not

more than two right angle bends will be permitted without
the inter-positioning of a draw box.
3.4.3.12 Conduits that are concealed in the building fabric
shall be arranged as a "looping- in" system and no
elbows, tees or bends, solid or inspection type, shall be
employed.
3.4.3.13 Conduits shall be kept at least 150mm clear of gas
piping and colour coded where required.
3.4.3.14 Conduits shall be kept at least 150mm clear of
steam and hot water systems and preferably installed
beneath the gas piping and hot water systems services.
3.4.3.15 Care should be taken when installing conduit to
see that the enamel is removed from threads and from the
interior of the fitting to ensure good connection.
3.4.3.16 The interior of conduit ends shall be rendered free
from burrs and sharp edges. Where threads are exposed
on conduit after it has been screwed into equipment, all
such threads shall be painted with an approved paint to
prevent rusting.
3.4.3.17 Conduit runs shall be complete before wiring is
started and shall not be dismantled for wiring operations.
3.4.3.18 Conduit used in flameproof installations shall be of
the solid drawn type.
3.4.3.19 Where conduit crosses expansion joints, the
contractor shall provide expansion couplers. He shall run
an earth wire between the nearest conduit box from each
side of the coupling. This earth wire shall be solidly
bonded at each box.
3.4.4 MountingHeights of Wiring Accessories
3.4.4.1 The approximate positions of lighting fittings, socket

outlets, main switchgear and distribution boards shall be
3.4.4.2 The contractor shall determine the exact positions of any
conduit runs, when necessary, in consultation with the
Engineer and with the local power supply authority.
3.4.4.3 Switchgear, distribution boards and consumer units shall,
unless detailed to the contrary, be mounted with the lower
edge 2000mm from the finished floor level.
3.4.4.4 Light switches, other than ceiling switches, shall be fixed
at 1400mm to centre of switch above finished floor level.
3.4.4.5 Isolators and switch fuses other than those mounted on
3. 16
bus bar chambers or providing local control shall be

unless otherwise stated on the drawings, fixed at 1400mm
from finished floor level to underside of fitting.
3.4.4.6 Switched-socket-outlets and socket outlets in offices and
corridors shall, unless otherwise specified, be fixed
300mm above finished floor level to underside of fittings.
3. 17
3.4.5 Ceiling Roses and Lamp Holders
3.4.5.1Ceiling roses shall be of best quality white bakelite to BS

67.
3.4.5.2Unless otherwise stated in the contract documents, all
lamp holders shall be of the "bayonet cap" BS 7895 and
BS EN 61184 type and best quality bakelite suitably
reinforced and fitted with shade carrier rings.
3.4.5.3Batten type lamp holders shall be suitable for mounting
direct on a conduit box and shall be of best quality
bakelite suitability reinforced and fitted with shade carrier
rings.
3.4.5.4Lamp holders for lamps rated 200 watts and above shall
be of the Edison screw type.
3.4.6 Switches and Socket Outlets
3.4.6.1 Lighting switches shall be to BS 3676-1, 6 amp or 15 amp

where necessary, insulated pattern, single pole, quick
make and slow break type for a.c. circuits and quick make
and quick break for d.c. circuits, unless prior approval to
the contrary is obtained from the Building Committee.
3.4.6.2 Ceiling switches shall be complete with pull cords and
suitable for mounting direct on a conduit box.
3.4.6.3 The successful action of switches shall not depend wholly
upon spring action.
3.4.6.4 All single-phase socket outlets shall be 3 pin rectangular,
shuttered to BS 2814, (1363-2)1957, with boxes to BS
3676-1 or 1363. Socket outlets shall be unstitched unless
instructed to the contrary.
3.4.6.5 All three phase socket outlets and all three phase with
neutral outlets shall be of the 4 pin or 5 pin scraping earth
pattern.
3.4.6.6 Switched type socket outlets may be used where
required.
3.4.6.7 The third pin of all single phase socket outlets shall be
effectively earthed.
3.4.7 Motors
3.4.7.1 All motors shall generally be supplied and installed by

others but the contractor is responsible for the wiring from
each motor control to the respective motor terminals.
3.4.7.2 An earth wire, green or yellow insulated copper cable,
shall be run to connect the frame of the motor to the earth
3. 18
termination of the controlling isolator.

3.4.7.3 When installing welding transformers and big motors
(10KW and above), local power supply authority shall be
consulted.
3.4.7.4 The method of starting motors unless otherwise stated
shall be as follows:
a) Motors up to and including 5.5KW shall be started

direct on line (D.O.N.)
b) Motors 7.5 and above star / delta or autotransformer.
3. 19
3.4.8 Final Circuits
3.4.8.1For low voltage systems 240V/415V A.C. the following

shall apply:
a) All final three phase and single phase circuits to

motors and fixed equipment shall be controlled
locally by the appropriate three phase and
neutral(T.P. & N.) double phase and neutral, or
single phase and neutral ( DP or SP. & N) isolating
switch.
The contractor shall include for the provision of these
switches. Separate switches may be omitted where
combined motor starters and isolators are used.
b) Additional isolators shall be provided adjacent to
equipment or a motor where normal control gear or
starting is installed remote from the equipment or
motor. In general, control gear more than 1800mm
from equipment shall be considered remote;
however, this distance may be increased at the
discretion of the supervising officer (electrical) or as
instructed on drawings.
c) Single pole switching and fusing shall be used on
single phase circuits where one conductor is
normally earthed.
d) Double pole switching and fusing shall be used on
single phase systems such as 1:1 transformers, low
voltage systems, etc., where neither conductor is
normally earthed.
e) One conductor of low voltage supply systems shall
be earthed when the utilization of the supply makes
this possible.
f) Where a transformer is used to supply a secondary
circuit the control switch shall be on the primary side.
g) Switching and fusing shall be single, double or triple.
3.4.8.2Directs current systems:
a) The minimum size of cable to d.c. socket outlets

shall be 2.5mm2. Larger cables may be used on low
voltage d.c. systems at the discretion of the Engineer
to prevent excessive proportional voltage drop.
b) The main distributing spur maybe adopted to serve
more than one point as allowed by I.E.E. regulations.
c) Double pole fusing shall be employed except when
one conductor is common to several voltages in
which case the common conductor shall be solid.
3. 20
d) D.C supplied outside the limit of 240 volt and/or 15

amps shall be treated individually, preferably by a
permanent connection to the apparatus served
through an approved isolator.
e) Exposed terminal connection shall not be used on
d.c. equipment rated at 50 volt or above unless
specified
3.5 Underground Cables
3.5.1 Cable Specification
3.5.1.1 The cables shall be of approved manufacture in

accordance with BS 6004, 6007&6346 or other
appropriate BS, IEC or manufacturer's standard and
specification and shall be suitable for the voltage and
nature of the supply specified.
3.5.1.2 Medium voltage (up to 3.3 KV) cables and low voltage
cables shall be XLPE SwA, PVC 2, 3 or 4 core with high
conductivity copper shaped conductors of equal section
and complying in all respects with BS 6480, 1988 for
1,100 volt cables or aluminum cables approved by the
Engineer.
3.5.1.3 240 volt d.c. services shall be XLPE SwA, PVC 2, 3 or 4
core with high conductivity copper shaped conductors of
equal section and complying in all respects with BS 6480;
1988 or aluminum cables approved by the Engineer.
3.5.1.4 Telephone cables shall have high conductivity copper
conductors of 3kg or 9kg per mile weight as specified and
shall be polythene insulated PVC sheathed overall. The
number of conductor pairs will be specified on the
drawings.
3.5.1.5 Multi-core Cables shall have 2.5mm2 high conductivity
copper conductors and be PVC insulated and PVC
sheathed galvanized steel wire armoured and PVC
sheathed overall.
3.5.2 Cable Laying
3.5.2.1 All cables shall be buried in open ground or drawn into

earthenware or other ducts as specified where crossing
roadways, paths exceeding 1508cm in width, and on entry
into buildings.
3.5.2.2 Cables shall be laid in such manner that no electrical or
mechanical damage is sustained during the laying
process.
3.5.2.3 Where more than one cable is laid in a trench cables
3. 21
should be spaced apart in accordance with the following

table (or as given on drawings):
CABLE EHV EHV MV or LV TELEPHONE CO-
EHV 50mm 50mm - - -
HV 50mm 50mm - - -
MV 300mm 300mm 25mm 25mm -
Telephone 300mm 300mm 300mm 25mm -
Co-Axial 300mm 300mm 300mm 25mm 25mm
3.5.2.4 All cables shall be separated by at least 230mm from gas

and water mains.
3.5.2.5 In straight run trenches cable crossing will not be
permitted except when cables have to branch from main
run.
3.5.2.6 At every draw-in point or junction box, and at the foot of
any pole, the cable shall be laid snaked, to the
satisfaction of the supervising Officer.
3.5.2.7 Cables to termination points in substations or buildings
shall enter via glazed earthenware piped, supplied and
fixed by others which shall be sealed in an approved
manner after the cables have been laid.
3.5.2.8 Appropriate sealing compound mixture shall be provided
at both outlets ends of the pipe.
3.5.2.9 Before cables are laid, the bottom of the trench shall be
evenly graded and cleared of loose stones and shall then
be covered with 50mm layer of sand or sieved earth
which shall have been pressed through sieve with a
maximum mesh of 13mm.
3. 22
3.5.2.10 The cables shall be carefully laid in the bed without

dragging and they shall then be covered with fine sand or
sieved earth in such quantity as to ensure a cover of
75mm after tamping.
3.5.2.11 Where cover tiles are required before the sand or
sieved earth is filled in, the cable run shall be marked with
temporary wood pegs, in order to ensure that when the
warning covers are laid over they overlap the cable each
side by 50mm.
3.5.2.12 Sand provided by the contractor may be used
where the Engineer agrees that the ground is unsuitable
for sieving.
3.5.2.13 Cables shall not be laid in ashes, organic refuse or
other materials likely to damage them. When such
conditions are encountered the method of laying the
cables shall be agreed with the Engineer.
3.5.2.14 Cables having a run of more than 1800mm inside
a building shall be cleated or saddled to walls or ceilings
with cleats or saddles at spacing recommended by IEE
Wiring Regulations current Edition.
3.5.3 Warning Covers
1. Unless otherwise stated by the Supervising Officer warning

covers shall be provided over all cables except as detailed in
Clause 2 below.
2. Warning covers shall not be provided over; XLPE SwA, PVC
cables except when the Engineer considers the cables are
liable to damage.
3. All covers shall be earthenware apex type in accordance with
drawings and laid to provide a margin of 50mm of cover on
both sides of cable, (s).
4. The warning tape shall be coloured yellow/black stripes and
bear the following legend in block black capitals, at regular
intervals: “CAUTION-ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW” It shall be
laid at a depth 200mm below final grade.
3.5.4 Earthenware Ducts and Fiber Conduits
1. Where cables cross under roads or paved areas the following

ducts or conduits shall be provided under a separate contract,
unless otherwise determined:-
a)Earthenware duct
i) 1 cable 2 x 100mm or 150mm ducts
3. 23
ii) 2 cables 3 x 100mm or 150mm ducts

ii) 3 cables 4 x 100mm or 150mm ducts
vi) 4 or 5 cables 6 x 100mm or 150mm ducts
v) 6, 7 or 8 cables 9 x 100mm or 150mm ducts
2. Five or more plastic sheathed cables shall normally be laid

together, depending on the size of cable, shall be drawn into
100mm or 150mm duct where the need arises
3. Should the contractor be required to supply and lay ducts the
following conditions shall apply:-
a) Trenches for stoneware ducts shall be scooped out at all
points where the sockets rest, so that the body of the
duct lies solid on the ground.
b) Rocky soils and a layer of soft earth shall be spread over
the bottom of the trench and rammed to afford bedding for
the ducts.
c) Where the soil is unstable or water logged, a foundation for
the ducting should be provided by laying 75mm of suitable
concrete. The Contractor shall carry out all necessary
cutting of ducts.
d) Ducts and conduits shall be clear of gas or water pipes,
drains and sewers.
3.5.5 Concrete Cable Markers
1. Reinforced concrete cable markers shall be installed at all

positions necessary to indicate the run of cables.
2. Concrete marker posts shall be erected at intervals of 25m
and at changes of directions of cable trenches. A plate shall
be fixed to the post stating “BURIED CABLES” and their
position marked on the final “AS INSTALLED” drawings.
3. Adequate number of ducts shall be provided at points of entry
into buildings. These shall be in form of easy sweep ends,
having a bending radius appropriate to the size of the largest
cable but in any case not less than 10 times a cable diameter.
4. After installation and the final tests, all cable ducts will be
sealed using fine resistant materials to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, to prevent ingress into buildings of water, vermin
termites etc.
3.5.6 Cables Jointing
1. Cable jointing shall be carried out in accordance with the

relevant British Standard Code of Practice, and the respective
cable maker's instructions.
3. 24
2. Underground joints in all cables shall be kept to a minimum,

and may be allowed by permission of the Engineer, and in a
manner approved by him.
3.5.7 Identification of Cables and Cable Joints
1. At all cable terminations cables shall be identified by labels

securely attached to the cables.
2. Labels shall be made of heavy gauge brass or gunmetal of
such a size as to render their reading clear and be punch
lettered with the name of the service and size of cable,
number of cores and location of termination of the other end
of the cable.
3. All underground joints in cables shall be indicated by
concrete cable markers as indicated in Clause 3.5.5, suitably
lettered with details of the cable joint and placed above the
joint.
3.5.8 Position of Cable Routes
1. The positioning of all cable routes, street lighting columns and

feeder pillars shall be agreed with the Engineer before any
work is put in hand.
3.5.9 Bonding and Earthing of Cables
1. Cables entering any piece of apparatus shall enter via an

approved type armour clamp and gland effecting a
satisfactory mechanical connection to the casing of the
apparatus, and making an efficient earth connection with all
metal parts of the apparatus to be bonded. A wire binder shall
be provided on the armouring of the cable entering the
apparatus.
3. 25
2. On jointing cables buried in the ground two wire binders shall

be provided on the armouring on each cable at the joint in
addition to the armour clamps. The armour clamp shall grip
the armouring firmly to the joint box gland or casting so that
no undue stress is caused by ground movement.
3. The armouring of all cables shall be efficiently bonded to the
cable sealing boxes and joint boxes by the use of copper
tapes. The size of the copper tape used shall be agreed by
the Engineer.
3.6 Excavation and Reinstatement
1. The contractor shall obtain a work permit prior to excavation.

2. Works related to excavation, planking and strutting, supply of and
laying of ducts, back fillings, reinstatement, removal of surplus soil
and any other work of this nature shall be as indicated in the
preliminaries and/or particular specification.
3. Where extensive trenching is involved this may be carried out
under a separate contract and in which case the cabling contractor
shall mark out in advance the positions of all cuttings. The
contractor shall be held responsible for accurate and satisfactory
installation of the work in open ground.
4. Where necessary excavations shall be kept free from water at all
times by pumping, bailing or other means.
5. Where pumping is necessary the material in and around the
excavations shall not be disturbed thereby and temporary sumps
shall be constructed if necessary and back filled on completion.
6. The Contractor shall provide all the necessary equipment to keep
the work clear of water, together with pipes, chutes, dams,
screening chambers, diversions and the like.
7. Where necessary the Contractor shall properly timber or shore the
sides of trenches, and the sides, and roofs of tunnels in such a
manner as to ensure their withstanding against falls, slips, and all
loose materials and to ensure the safety of men and protection of
the work and adjoining property from damage.
8. All excavations shall be taken out sufficiently full to allow for
adequate timbering and the efficient carrying out of the works.
9. All damage arising from the falling in of the sides of any
excavations through insufficient or careless timbering or other
causes must be made good at the Contractor's expense and the
Contractor shall forthwith remove all the material which has fallen
in.
10. On completion of the laying and testing of the cables as specified,
the Contractor shall complete the filling in of trenches in layers of
3. 26
not more than 150mm thickness each layer being well rammed
until solid before the next is added. If instructed, watering of the
backfill shall be adopted to secure proper consolidation.
11. The final reinstatement of excavations shall be left sufficiently
mounded to allow for future settlement. If such settlement is of a
major nature the Contractor will be required to make good such
subsidence free of cost.
12. All hollows formed outside the limits of the excavations or trenches
due to collapse or any other cause shall be filled in with excavated
material, properly backfilled, rammed and consolidated.
13. The surplus material arising from the excavations shall be removed
to a distance not exceeding 400m deposited, spread and leveled
as directed by the Supervising Officer.
14. The length of trench opened at any time shall be kept to a
minimum. The top soil shall be carefully removed and shall be
replaced to its original position as soon as possible after closing in
of the work. All turf shall be carefully preserved and replaced.
15. During excavation the contractor shall take particular care to avoid
damaging any other services which may cross or run adjacent to
the cable route. Any services uncovered shall be adequately
supported by slings or other suitable means.
16. The approximate position of existing services will be indicated on
the drawings.
17. The Contractor shall exercise great care in carrying out
excavations in the vicinity of existing services and in the event of
damage he shall be charged for remedial work that may be
necessary.
18. Trenches shall be excavated to enable the cables to be laid at
minimum depth below finished ground level, as detailed on
drawings. Cables will normally be laid at a depth of 600mm unless
otherwise specified.
3.7 Consumer Mains
3.7.1 Feeder Pillars
1. Feeder pillars shall be weatherproof and of robust

construction with hinged lockable doors. The back shall have
removable plates, bolted or screwed to the shell.
2. When installed the feeder pillar shall be mounted on a firm
base or as shown on the drawings and arranged to prevent
the ingress of rainwater within the enclosure.
3. The capacity and number of links and/or fuse ways shall be
as specified on the drawings and shall have phase, colour
3. 27
and circuit identification. Unless otherwise specified feeder

pillars shall be "dwarf type", tailless units.
3.7.2 Earthing
1. In every installation a consumer’s earthing shall be provided

adjacent to the consumer’s supply terminals
2. Particular attention should be given to conduit and trunking
installations to ensure that the earth continuity is reliable and
permanent.
3. All apparatus or parts thereof not solidly connected to the
earthing systems shall be connected thereto in an approved
manner by a solid copper conductor secured by means of
substantial bonding clamps.
4. All services entering the installation at earth potential shall be
efficiently bonded to the main earth points.
5. All joints in the earth system shall be made with solder-less
connectors or by an approved brazing method.
6. The resistance of the earth continuity system when
measured between the main earth point and any other point
in the installation, including all metalwork which may provide
a path to earth such as gas, water, waste pipes, etc., shall
not exceed 1 ohm.
7. All flexible metallic tubing shall have a green / yellow
insulated earth conductor run with the tubing and the ends
shall be securely bonded at positions accessible for
inspection.
3. 28
8. The size of the earth conductor shall be as indicated in the

current edition of the I.E.E. Regulations and shall not be less
than 4 Sqmm.
9. Care shall be taken that the neutral conductor does not
become accidentally earthed.
10. The neutral of the supply shall be bonded to the earth tape,
in accordance with the licensed electricity service provider’s
procedure of multiple neutral earthing. The actual bonding
will be performed by a representative of the licensed
electricity service provider.
11. The earthing terminal of every socket-outlet shall be
connected to the earth-continuity conductor of the final sub-
circuit.
12. Earthing shall confirm to the IEE Wiring Regulations
Sixteenth Edition.
3.8 "AS INSTALLED" Drawings
1. On completion of the contract the contractor shall produce "AS

INSTALLED" drawing to the satisfaction of the Engineer
2. The Contractor shall prepare "as fitted record negatives" during and
upon completion of the work. The Contractor shall include for them
in the tender.
3.9 Inspection and Testing
1. The complete installations or completed sections of the installations

shall be subjected to acceptance tests as ordered by the Engineer
before being connected to the supply.
2. The Contractor shall give 48 hours written notice to the Engineer of

his intention to carry out any or all of the "acceptance tests" in
Clause 3 below.
3. On completion of the installation, the Contractor shall carry out the

following tests in accordance with the IEE Regulations and in the
presence of the Engineer as applicable:
a) tests as prescribed in the Ugandan Electricity Supply
Regulations currently in force;
b) tests in accordance with BS 6480:1988;
c) megger insulation resistance (sections of, and the complete
installation);
d) circuit and earth continuity tests;
e) loop impedance and polarity tests;
f) continuity resistance of conductors and sheathing sections and
the complete installation;
g) phasing out;
3. 29
h) full load when specifically ordered.
4. Tests shall be carried out on each and every circuit in addition to

the complete installation.
5. The contractor shall enter the results on paper, letter form, duly
signed by the contractor and countersigned by the Engineer present
during the said tests.
6. The contractor shall supply all necessary equipment, labour and

instructions to carry out these tests and shall demonstrate the
accuracy of his test instruments, to the Building Committee.
7. Periodical tests shall be conducted on electrical installations in
building every 5 years.
8. The Contractor shall complete test result forms recorded in triplicate
and return them signed to the Supervising Officer within 7 days of
the date of the tests.
3. 30
SECTION 4 MISCELLANEOUS
4.1 Street Lighting
1. Street lighting columns shall be constructed and installed in accordance with BS 5649 and shall be of
the type as indicated, columns set in ground shall be fitted with a base plate unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Each street lighting columns shall be fitted with a fuse unit providing terminations adequate for the
cabling to be looped in and out and shall be fitted with fuses to BS 88, rating as indicated. Control
equipment shall be incorporated as indicated.
3. Unless otherwise specified the lighting columns shall be of steel construction to give a fitting height of
4600mm or 7600mm or as specified on the drawings and shall be supplied to the contractor complete
with lamp brackets.
4. The Contractor shall provide and install the necessary cut-out terminals and loop in facilities in the base
of the column as specified and shall terminate the incoming cable or cables.
5. Wiring of the lighting columns and lighting fittings shall form part of the specification.
6. Switching:
a) Photocells may be used for individually switching street lights

or may be connected to contactors for group switching.
b) Time switches shall incorporate a 24 hour spring reserve to
operate the timing mechanism in the event of a power failure to
activate contactors for switching.
7. Lanterns (luminaries):
a) The sealing of luminaries, and their resistance to ingress of

water and dirt should be as described by their international
protection code IP number and shall be not less than IP34
(International Protection Code).
b) Where night time public use is likely to be moderate and the
crime risk is low, low pressure sodium lamp which emits a
monochromatic light rendering yellow colour is the preferred
light source.
c) Where pedestrian activities predominate and where there is a
high crime risk high pressure sodium lamp which renders
colours throughout the spectrum shall be utilized.
d) For urban and residential roads the light source used should
have a colour rendering index of (Ra) ≥20.
e) In civic centers, shopping streets, boulevards, promenades and
other places that are the hub of social activity, the light source
used should have a colour rendering index of (Ra) ≥60.
4.1
4.2 Lightning Protection and Earthing
1. All public buildings such as schools, churches, mosques, halls,

hospitals, theatres etc shall be provided with lightning protection
system.
2. Lightning protection installations shall, in general consist of copper

or aluminum tapes 20mm x 3mm section with similar clips, test
clamps and copper bond earth rods which shall be mounted in the
position as indicated on drawings
3. Each roof tape shall be provided with a similar copper or aluminum

down tape to the earth test position, and from the earth test
position to the earth electrode in copper only. Suitable approved
arrangements must be made for the junction of aluminum and
copper tapes.
4. The electrode shall consist of a copper bond rod buried in the

ground as close as possible to the installation to be protected.
5. The earth resistance of the completed system shall in no

circumstances exceed 10 ohms and shall be as low as possible.
6. Where earth resistance cannot be obtained by means of a single

earth electrode, extra rods shall be added in parallel at a distance
not less the length of the earth electrode.
7. After completion of the installation the contractor shall be required

to provide the necessary instruments and carry out earth resistance
tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.3 Lifts
1. All apparatus and materials supplied and work carried out shall
comply with the following provisions:
a) Institution of Electrical Engineer (IEE) of United Kingdom

b) The Uganda Electricity Board byelaws
c) "Code for Electrical Installations and Equipment in
Buildings."
d) Any other regulations governing lift installations in Uganda.
2. Every hoist or lift shall be of good mechanical construction, sound

material and adequate strength, with safe electrical controls and
periodically be properly maintained.
3. A fireman’s control switch shall be provided on the ground floor and

main entrance lobby. The fireman’s switch shall be of the type
approved by the Engineer.
4.2
4. The fireman’s switch shall stop all the lift cars on the next landing
and without opening the doors, and all the cars shall return to the
ground floor.
5. An emergency alarm system in the form of an intercom shall be
installed between the car, the motor room and the reception desk
on the ground floor.
6. The lift motor room shall be mechanically ventilated.
4.4 Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems
1. Refrigerants in air conditioning and refrigeration systems shall comply with

National Environment Management Authority (NEMA) Regulations.
4.5 Radiation Emissions
1. Any person wishing to use radioactive material or other sources of dangerous

ionizing radiation shall apply to the relevant authorities for an appropriate license.
2. An application for a license to use radioactive material or other source of
dangerous ionizing radiation shall be in the prescribed form and shall be
submitted to the Chief Radiation Safety Officer who shall prepare the appropriate
license.
3. The holder of a license shall be responsible to ensure that any operation,
condition of storage, transport or disposal shall not result directly or indirectly in
exposure of ionizing radiation in such amounts as are likely to cause harmful
effects to the public, his employees, other workers or other users or to property
owned either privately or by the Government.
4. Any person who uses radioactive material or source of dangerous ionizing
radiation without authorization shall be held responsible for its effects.
5. The radiation safety requirements prescribed under the Decree on radiations do
not extend to patients undergoing medical treatment by exposure to radiation by
or under the supervision of a medical practitioner; but do apply to the safety of
medical and technical staff working with the radioactive material or a source of
ionizing radiation and to the protection of all other persons other than the patient
undergoing treatment.
6. Domestic radiation equipment such as televisions shall be positioned at an
appropriate distance to protect the users from the radiation emissions.
7. Living rooms shall be designed such that enough cross-ventilation is available to
check on the radioactive gases.
8. Building materials such as rocks, steel rods which are rich in radioactive
elements shall be avoided in construction of Buildings.
4.6 Special Services
4.6.1 Data Network
1. Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) which supports speed up-to

155Mbps integrating voice, data, image and multimedia shall be used
where increased band width application is required.
2. The fast Ethernet standard (100Mbps) over Unshielded Twisted Pair
(UTP) cable shall be used for connection of desktops from hubs.
4.3
3. Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) floor cabling which supports multiple

applications – Voice, Data and multimedia is recommended for local area
net working.
4. For riser backbone system connecting different levels of floors with the
server optical fiber cables shall be utilized.
5. Server is a powerful computer that provides services to other computers
and devices on the network and is usually located on ground floor or
basement.
6. Modular patch panels shall be used for the termination and
interconnecting of data circuit in structured cabling system.
7. Data outlet points are those points in the network where all the
computers and other devices are interconnected. The data outlet points
shall be RJ-45 fed through Cat 6 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable.
8. The wiring for each data outlet shall be carried out by the supplier and /or
manufacturer. The Contactor shall liaise with the supplier and /or
manufacturer to verify that adequate trunking system and concealed
conduits have been included.
4.6.2 Other
Conduit installations for telephones, public address, radio and television, etc.
shall be carried out to the same standards as for power and lighting services.
Where detailed in specification, plastic conduits may be used and when
necessary an earth wire drawn in. Cables or draw wire shall be installed as
specified.
4.4
SECTION 5 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV) POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

MODULES AND BATTERIES
5.1 Scope
1. This section of the regulation gives guidance on safe installation and

utilization of photovoltaic power supply system as an alternative
source of energy.
5.2 Photovoltaic (PV) Modules
5.2.1 PV Modules (Panels) Specifications
1. The output current and voltage of the modules or panels

shall be appropriate for the application, and shall be clearly
established by the contractor from the manufacturer's
documentation and stated in the contract. The pertinent
conditions are solar radiations of 1 KW per sqm or less and
cell temperature of 35ºC or higher.
2. The Uganda National Bureau of Standards is able to provide

advice on quality and finish of panels, and can test new
panels under local conditions where necessary.
3. The module shall have a quality mark form PV GAP or any

other Accredited Testing Laboratory on the module. This
mark provides assurance that the module has been tested to
IEC 61215 or IEC 61646 and that the manufacturing has ISO
9000 certification and periodic auditing.
5.2.2 PV Modules Position
1. No object (trees, buildings, etc.) should shade any part of the

PV-panel at any time of the year between 90 minutes after
sunrise and 90 minutes before sunset.
2. Should shading be unavoidable, this shall be compensated

for by reducing the daily energy output in the system design.
Note that reduction in output due to partial shading will
typically be much greater than the portion of the array that is
shaded.
3. Where possible, the PV-panel shall be installed on the roof of

a building near the controller and battery bank.
5.2.3 PV Modules Orientation
1. The panel must be installed facing due north/south, at an

angle of between 10 and 20 degrees to horizontal plane.
5.1
5.2.4 PV Modules Lighting Protection
1. PV-panels shall be installed lower than the highest point of

the building.
2. The support frame shall be provided with a short lightning rod

if this becomes the highest point of the building.
3. The UNBS or other specialized contractors will provide

expert advice in case of doubt.
4. The contractor should make the client aware of the risks that
can arise due to unsafely earthed structures. Where
grounding of structures for lighting protection is needed a
minimum of 16mm2 cable shall be connected to a 1.5m earth
rod.
5.2.5 PV Modules Support Structure
1. The support structure for panels shall be made of permanent

materials, be strong enough to withstand all climatic
conditions (wind, heat, water) without deflection or vibrations
and be securely braced and fixed to the roof or the wall of a
building or the ground.
2. Frames, support structure and other metal parts shall be

made of non-corroding materials, or protected against
corrosion by galvanization, painting, etc. as appropriate for
the material used. It is good practice to keep dissimilar
metals separate, unless they are well sealed against water
by paint or sealing compound.
3. Calculations and supporting documentation to demonstrate

adequate design may be required.
5.2.6 PV Modules Roof Mounting
1. Fixing to roofs shall be done so that leakages are prevented

and no corrosion of roofing materials will occur.
2. Bolts to be fixed through top of corrugations on corrugated
metal roofs, to be secured to purlins, or special supports to
be fixed to the roof structure if the purlins are of poor quality.
3. All holes in the roofing shall be thoroughly sealed and made

waterproof with UV- resistant silicone sealant or suitable
sealing compound.
5.2.7 PV Modules Ground Mounting
5.2
1. Solid foundations shall be provided at each corner of the

array with additional support as required by the design of the
supporting structure.
2. Panels shall not be mounted closer than 0.8m from the
ground to avoid shading by grass and other vegetation.
3. Small arrays may alternatively be fixed to a single pole,
securely buried into the ground and if necessary secured
with stays.
4. The location shall be chosen such that no damage can be
caused by animals (and the site shall be fenced).
5. This method of mounting should be avoided whenever
possible.
5.3 Batteries
5.3.1 Type
1. Batteries shall be of a design suitable for PV applications.
Deep discharge and long cycle life batteries are
recommended.
2. Conventional car/truck starter batteries are not generally
acceptable. For specifications of batteries, refer to US 149-1:
2000 Specification of batteries for photovoltaic systems.
3. The technical implications of the choice of battery and the
costs and benefits of different types should be explained to
the client in general terms.
5.3.2 Installation
1. Batteries shall be installed in boxes, racks, or cupboards to

protect the connections (terminals) against accidental short-
circuiting while still being checked.
2. At least 20mm free space shall be left between the batteries,

the wall, and the top of the box.
3. Ventilation of the enclosure shall be ensured to avoid build

up of explosive gases during charging.
4. The box shall be made of suitable durable materials and if

made of wood, it shall be well preserved against insects
(termites), rot and acid.
5. The box shall be securely fixed in position and each battery

shall be marked with the date of manufacture and year and
month of installation by the installer.
5.3
6. Maintenance requirements shall be clearly laid out in the

owner's manual.
5.3.3 Controllers and Circuit
1. Controllers shall be designed and installed to protect the

batteries against overcharging, as well as over-discharging.
2. Voltage disconnect/reconnect settings shall depend on the

type of battery.
3. The rated capacity of the controller shall be selected to

handle the maximum short circuit current from the PV-array
and the maximum load.
4. The charge controllers and circuit breakers / fuses shall bear

manufacturers PV quality mark, PV GAP or any other
Accredited Testing Laboratory PV Quality Mark.
5. This quality mark provides the assurance that the module

has been tested by an Accredited Testing Laboratory to IEC
61215 or IEC 61646, and that the manufacturing has ISO
9000 certification and periodic auditing.
6. A warning system consisting of a light and or an audible

alarm providing at least three minutes advanced warning of
disconnection should be installed.
7. Where the controller is installed in a room which is not

regularly used, a remote alarm shall be installed at a place
where it can be easily noticed.
8. Essential Service (ES) circuits may be provided with a switch

to facilitate bypass of the over- discharge protection or to
bypass the regulator completely.
9. Warning for low battery shall however be included as for

Non-Essential Services (NES).
10. The owners manual and markings on the bypass device shall
clearly indicate the implications and potentially irreversible
damage that may be caused by bypassing this protection.
5.4
11. The system shall be protected against damage due to

accidental short-circuits by use of fuses or circuit breakers.
12. Any consumer circuits shall have circuit breakers.
13. Individual circuits from the battery shall have a maximum

rated capacity of 25 amperes where not otherwise specified
14. Each circuit shall be so designed that the peak demand does
not exceed 80% of the rated capacity of the fuse or circuit
breaker.
15. Required fuses and circuit breakers may be integrated in the

controller box or installed separately in a fuse or distribution
box positioned near the controller and battery.
16. Each fuse or circuit-breaker shall be clearly marked with

rated capacity and for which circuit it is used.
5.4 Samples
1. Where new components or of innovative techniques, are used by
the contractor samples of materials and equipment shall be
submitted for approval before installation commences. It is
recommended, where possible, to show the client an existing
installation so that any ambiguities may be explained.
5.5 System Design - Essential and Non- Essential Service (ES and
NES)
5.5.1 Design data
1. The client may provide data for dimensioning of each

system where the design is not prepared in detail by the
contractor.
2. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that

such system details are consistent with the:-
a) Type of lights and appliances

b) Essential Services (ES )and Non-Essential Services
(NES)
c) Daily Load (DL)
3. The contractor shall specify the manufacturer, types of
equipment with relevant rated capacities to be installed and
enclose calculations and other documentation to prove that
all requirements are met.
5.5.2 Calculations
5.5
1. Calculations of requirements for a functional system shall

depend on whether it is considered NES or ES.
2. The system sizing rules are based on mathematical

modeling with daily solar radiation records from Uganda
over the period of at least 5 years, taking into account panel
degradation as well as battery ageing.
3. Essential Service (ES) and Non- Essential Service (NES)

systems should in general be installed as totally separate
systems.
4. Where a combination of ES and NES are connected to the

same system, it shall be sized as if all services are ES,
unless particular calculations are provided to prove that the
design of all combined system will satisfy the requirements
to both types of services
5.5.3 System Autonomy
1. The period of autonomy of a Photovoltaic system may be

defined as the total period for which the system shall provide
power to its regular load without solar energy input. In other
words, this is the period for which the system will operate
normally without sunlight.
2. The autonomy of a system depends mostly on the depth of

discharge of the batteries under normal daily loads and the
number of batteries included in the system.
3. If a battery is only discharged by a small fraction of its total

capacity each day, it will clearly provide more days of
operation than a battery that is discharged by a large
fraction each day.
4. The overall life of a battery is affected by the depth of its

regular daily discharge; the life being inversely proportional
to the depth of discharge (i.e. the shallower the discharge
the longer the battery life).
5. The contractor shall give careful consideration to the sizing

of the batteries in relation to the system load requirements.
The cost implications of this should be presented clearly to
the client
5.5.4 Essential Services (ES)
1. The battery capacity shall be at least 5 times the maximum

daily load in Ah. This provides a normal cycle depth of 20%
5.6
or less, assuming ample battery service life, and will provide

5 days autonomy in case of total array failure.
2. The array output current / in amperes under conditions as

specified above shall be at least DL (Ah)/4(h).
5.5.5 Non-Essential Services (NES)
1. The total nominal capacity of the batteries in Ah shall be at

least 4 times the daily load in Ah.
2. The array output current; in amperes under conditions as

specified above shall be DL (Ah)/4(h).
5.6 Labels
1. Supply and fixing of labels shall be carried out by the contractor.
2. Labels shall be made of; permanent inerasable material with

clearly legible letters and shall be displayed in a prominent
position(s), providing the following information.
a) Battery enclosure:
"Danger!”“Explosive gas". “Do not smoke”. “Do not use open

flames”. “Do not short circuit battery terminals!"
b) At Controller
i) Name and address of electrical contractor responsible for
installation
ii) Date of installation
iii) How to read performance (display or coloured
lights)
iv) Operation of circuit breakers or fuses (replacement of
fuses)
vi) Identification of circuits from the controller
vii) Instructions on maintenance/cleaning of photovoltaic
panels.
c) Distribution Board (if using wiring for 240V a.c.) the following
phase shall be clearly indicated- "Use 12 Volt appliances only".
d) Remote Warning if is installed, shall have an explanation of the

warning signals.
e) At main entrance to building or home, the following text in

English and/or Swahili, or any other appropriate local dialect
shall be clearly marked "Please save energy. Switch off lights
and appliances when leaving room".
5.7
5.7 Inspection and Testing
1. On completion of installation the system shall be inspected to ensure

expected operation.
2. In addition to checking that all parts are correctly installed and

operating satisfactorily, the electrician will certify in writing that:
a) Voltage drop (loss) in cables does not exceed specifications

b) Output from PV modules is within 5% of manufacturer’s specified
value
c) All wiring has been installed in an appropriate manner
d) No safety hazards exist
e) All signs and labels have been sensibly placed
5.8 Maintenance, Spare Parts and Warranties
1. The contractor shall be liable for all repair or replacement as per the
installation warranty that he will provide.
2. Spare parts and expertise for maintenance and repair shall be made
available by the contractor for the equipment after expiry of the
warranty period.
3. Cost shall be separately detailed in the original quotation
4. Notwithstanding any third party warranties that may be passed on by

the contractor, the minimum warranty period of some important
system components shall be as follows:
Minimum
Components warranty
period
Light bulbs 1 year
Batteries 1 year
PV modules and Wiring to PV modules 5 years
Controller / Inverter 3 years
Complete system 1 year
5.9 Registration, Approval and Acceptance for Photovoltaic

Installations
1. Registration of Contractors for photovoltaic installation shall be

carried out by the Uganda National Bureau of Standards (UNBS).
2. The UNBS shall issue certificate of registration to the registered

Contractors who will then be entitled to use the title and logo of
5.8
"UNBS Approved Contractor" in their Company and promotional

literature.
3. The certificate shall be issued subject to a nominal certification fee,

and shall be uniquely numbered with the contractor's number.
4. The certificate shall remain the property of the UNBS, as the agent
for the Code of Practice control body.
5. The Code of Practice Control Body will reserve the right to publicize
all newly approved contractors in the public media in Uganda.
6.All contractors shall be required to maintain numbered records of all

Photovoltaic installations they perform. Such records shall include
the date, system type, unit installed, serial number, etc.
7. All contractors shall be required to inform the UNBS the date, type
and system details of all new installations, but need only refer to their
own internal reference number. Such detail may not include
commercial or financial information.
8. The Control Body shall at random select installations from each

contractor by these reference numbers for follow up inspections. It is
planned to inspect one installation per year for each approved
installation.
5.10 Field of Application
1. This code shall be read in conjunction with the relevant parts of the
current IEE Regulations for Electrical installations, and shall apply
to installation of direct current (d.c.) Photovoltaic (PV) energy
systems.
2. This code has been drafted for 12V and 24V systems for residential
applications, the so-called Solar Home Systems and is not intended
to be used for other PV systems such as PV- pumping systems and
grid -connected systems.
3. The application of this Code of Practice shall include everything

necessary to provide lights and outlets for power as part of a
photovoltaic power system.
4. Where drawings or instructions are not specified, then they shall be

specified by the client, or as shown on the contractors drawings,
including PV-panels, batteries, controllers, fuses and/or circuit
breakers, switches, socket outlets, wiring, appliances, etc., The work
shall also include repair of all damages to buildings and grounds
caused by the installation where not otherwise specified by the client.
5.9
5.11 Installation Design
1. Where the layout of the installation is shown in drawings or detailed

specifications are given, these shall be accurately followed.
2. Where no detailed drawings are provided, the installation shall be

designed as efficiently as possible to minimize the loss of energy
through cables and junctions.
5.10
3. A system design specified for a client by a contractor should be in a

form that may be readily explained to a non-technical client.
4. This design information should be kept on file by the contractor, and

may prove useful after completion of the installation in case of any
subsequent dispute.
5. In the case of a client-specified installation, it is the responsibility of

the contractor to inform the client of any areas that do not conform to
this Code of Practice.
6. The contractor is entirely responsible for any deviations from the

established code of practice and wiring standards.
7.Under no circumstances, even by client dispensation, shall any

unsafe practice be acceptable. Written dispensation from the client
should be obtained where necessary to protect the interests of the
contractor.
5.12 Wiring Methods and Cables
5.12.1 Conduit Wiring
1. Surface mounted conduit with single wire conductors shall be

installed using saddles or supports at suitable interval.
2. Conduits must be supported using saddles or supports.

Drooping or unsupported runs shall be avoided.
3. PVC conduit may be used under floors but steel conduit

should be used in all places where heavy or unpredictable
loads may occur.
4. Under floor conduit should not be less than 19mm to allow for
subsequent maintenance.
5.12.2 Cable Wiring
1. Surface mounted cables shall be installed using appropriate

fasteners at suitable intervals to prevent sagging as shown on
drawings.
5.12.3 Conductor Cross-section and Voltage Drop
1. The cross-sections of the conductors shall be according to

Building Code "Code for Electrical Installations and
Equipment in Buildings", APPENDIX 3 and the relevant
tables in the IEE Wiring Regulations 16th edition.
5.11
2. The rated current carrying capacity at 35°C for any given

wire cross-section shall not be exceeded. Wires of cross
section area less than 2.5mm2 are not recommended for use
with photovoltaic systems.
3. The voltage across any appliance shall not be less than 5%

volts of the battery terminal voltage. Under no conditions is a
voltage of less than 10.5V permissible across an appliance.
The voltage shall be measured with all appliances in the
circuit, including those connected to socket outlets.
4. Voltage drop between the PV-panels and batteries shall not

exceed 1.0V or 5% measured at maximum charging current.
This voltage drop measurements will include any series or
protection diodes.
5. To avoid using long cable runs with large numbers of T and

star junctions, the load may be split into several circuits from
the controller.
5.12.4 Use of Existing 240V AC Wiring
1. The existing wiring of 240V a.c. shall be used, provided it

complies with other conditions in Clause 5.13.3 above.
2. If new wiring is installed in 240V a.c. conduits, it shall also be

in accordance with IEE Wiring Regulations 16th edition for
240Va.c.
5.12.5 Cable Connections
1. Cables can be connected by the use of junction boxes, block

connectors or soldering joints (with insulating sleeves).
2. All cable joints must be contained within a suitable junction

box where they will be visible.
3. The rated capacity through the joints shall not be less than
for the circuit they form a part of.
4. Lights, switches and sockets may be used as junction boxes

where this is practicable.
5.12.6 Power Intake - Underground and Overhead
1. Underground cables shall be at least 0.6m below the surface

and be indicated with markers (coloured plastic tape,
minimum 50mm wide or lining with bricks or slates, 0.2m
above the cable).
5.12
2. Underground cables shall be used across all areas with

vehicular traffic and they may also be used for aesthetic
reasons or to achieve a short cable run as instructed by the
client.
3. The cables must be designed for this type of application and

conduit must be able to withstand vertical loads if heavy
vehicles are expected to cross the area.
4. Suspended cables shall be mounted so that the lowest point

is at least 2.7m above ground level.
5. The cables shall be held in position by suitable brackets and

strain relief to prevent mechanical wear and stress of the
electrical connections.
6. Cables for outdoor exposed usage, shall be fully UV-resistant
7. Attachment of cables or conduit to concrete, bricks or mortar,

walls etc. shall be made with appropriate fasteners and
attachment of cables to metal or asbestos sheeting or similar
material shall be made by use of suitable toggles.
8. Holes through roofing should be avoided where possible.

Cables through roofing shall be contained in roof-entry
boxes, which also shall form a waterproof seal to avoid
leakage.
9. All holes for cables shall be drilled at top of corrugations. All

holes in the roofing shall be thoroughly sealed and made
waterproof with UV-resistant silicone sealant or equivalent.
10. Where wires or cables are fixed to or passing through

particularly flammable materials (thatch, etc.) they should be
shielded in non-flammable conduits.
11. Fittings must be fastened to suitable supports, which may

need to be provided if not already present. No conduit or
fitting should be attached directly to thatch, or any other non-
supportive surface.
12. Holes for cables through walls shall be sealed with mortar or
putty and the surfaces touched up with paint. Holes that
penetrate external walls must slope downwards slightly
towards the inside to prevent the ingress of water.
5.13 Workmanship and Finishing
5.13
1. Where no detailed specifications are provided by the client for

choice of materials or workmanship, standard practice for the trade
shall be followed.
2. Regarding the approval of quality, assessing capacity of PV-

panels, batteries, controllers and other components, the client or
contractor may seek assistance from the Uganda National Bureau
of Standards (UNBS), or from the Energy Unit of the Ministry of
Energy and Mineral Development.
3. The installation shall include the completion and tidying up of any

work that is a direct result of the installation. Any damage to
surface walls or fittings caused by or as a result of the installation
should be repaired by the contractor.
5.14 Light Fixtures
1. For general purpose and task indoor lighting, fluorescent lamps that
comply with BS 1853 shall be recommended.
2. Ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps shall comply with BS EN

60920 and 60921. Power factor correction shall be provided and
this shall be not less than 0.85 lagging unless otherwise indicated.
3. Tungsten incandescent lamps that comply with BS 161 shall be

used for particular tasks as required.
4. Halogen lamps in approved adjustable or portable fixtures shall be

used for task light or spot light.
5. Where lamps are fitted next to thatched or flammable ceiling

materials a metal lamp fitting or a metal shield shall be used to
minimize the risk of fire.
6. For outdoor lighting such as security and street lighting, sodium

vapour or other monochrome high intensity lamp shall be used.
7. Where there are insect's lamps with enclosures or defractors must
be capable of being opened for cleaning by the client.
8. Where tools are necessary to open lamps for cleaning, such tools
should be provided by the contractor as part of the installation.
5.15 Sockets
1. Socket outlets to be connected to solar PV system shall be

designed for 12V d.c. and 2-pin plugs and shall not be possible to
reverse the polarity.
2. Domestic appliances such as radios, fans spotlights, rechargeable

torches, refrigerators and special instruments shall be connected to
5.14
the solar PV system through socket outlets designed for such

voltage or provided with suitable and efficient adaptors or inventers.
3. Any 12 V appliance shall not have a 240V a.c. mains type plug
attached to it.
4. Where 240V outlets from a d.c.-a.c. inverter are provided, mains

type socket shall be used and a label on each socket shall be
added to show the maximum power available from that socket.
5. All wiring in these circuits shall conform to IEE wiring regulations for
240V a.c. mains wiring
6. Circuit breakers and proper earth safety system shall be provided to

prevent damage to the inverter in case of an overload.
7. All installations that have d.c. sockets shall be wired so that the
large diameter pin in the plug is always positive.
8. All positive connections shall be made with red insulated wire and
all negative connections with black insulated wires.
5.16 Switches
1. Standard switches for 240Va.c. shall not be used as an alternative

to special switches for 12 V d.c. unless written approval from the
manufacturer is obtained which shall include acceptable d.c.
voltage and current limits.
2. All switches shall be rated at twice their expected current carrying

load.
3. Where particularly required, special time switches, photosensitive

switches, remote and relay switches shall be specified and these
shall be of good quality and performance, as specified for each
purpose.
4. All switches shall include a clear visual indication of their state.
5.17 Installation
1. The whole of the installation and components shall be in

accordance with:-
a) The current edition of "Regulations for the Electrical Equipment

of Buildings" issued by the Institution of Electrical Engineers.
b) Relevant British Standard specifications.
c) Relevant Uganda Government Legislation.

5.15
5.16
SECTION 6 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
6.1 Scope
This section provides recommendations for planning, design and

installation of a local fire alarm system
6.2 General Design Considerations

1. Fire alarm system shall be designed so that:
a) the earliest possible definite warning of fire (i.e., avoiding false

alarm) is given to all personnel immediately concerned;
b) it is capable of indicating the locality of the origin of the fire

alarm as to facilitate the safe evacuation of the premises and to
direct the fire fighters; and
c) it performs its function with great reliability.

2. The equipment, wiring and use of fire alarm system shall be
exclusive to that system and its power supply shall be provided
independently from those for any other equipment.
3. The audible and visual alarm signals shall be used solely for the fire
alarm purpose, and these signals shall not rest automatically.
4. The fire alarm and associated indicating panel shall be sited where
they can be under constant observation when the premises are
occupied and shall be accommodated in a room:
a) in the direct vicinity of the main entrance;
b) that provides adequate protection against ambient influences

which could impair operations; e.g. vibration, smoke, dust,
gasses, vapour, etc. produced by machinery, etc.; and
c) that has room climate suitable for proper operation of the fire
alarm control and indicating panel.
5. The design of a fire alarm circuit shall provide facilities for rapid and
reliable transmission of initiated signals when manual call points or
detectors are operated and when specified faults occur to control
and indicating equipment.
6. Any resultant signal shall be transmitted by the simplest possible
circuitry to sounders and other indicating equipment and to any
equipment which is to be operated by the fire alarm system; e.g. fire
extinguishers, fire protection traps, local plant facilities, etc.
7. Where chances of malfunction are high in fire alarm system,
discriminatory circuit shall be incorporated in the system so that
false alarms are identified.
6. 1
8. Except in buildings where fire can be located without delay, the fire
alarm system shall include an identification panel designed to show
clearly the location of the origin of the alarm
6.3 Manual Call Points Location, Construction and Requirements

1. A manual call point shall be operated by a spring-loaded switch,
which is held in “non- alarm” position and protected from accidental
operation by a cover usually of glass. Breaking this glass cover
releases the switch to an “alarm” position and the system starts to
operate
2. Manual call points shall:
a) be constructed of pressed metal, cast metal or plastic materials

so that will not be adversely affected by the ambient
temperature;
b) be rigid enough in construction to withstand the abuse to which

they are likely to be subjected, without deterioration or reduction
in their ability to operate effectively when required to do so.;
c) have contacts that are capable of operating satisfactorily during

the design life of the installation;
d) be coloured “signal red” over at least 50% of their visible area;
e) have replaceable glass cover ; breaking the glass shall

automatically operate the call point, and shall include description
of the method of operation by a concise inscription including the
word “FIRE” on case, or suitably inscribed plate behind the glass
cover and;
f) incorporate means whereby satisfactory operation may be

readily and individually tested; e.g. by opening the front by
means of special keys.
3. A striker shall be provided adjacent to the call point to facilitate
breaking the glass.
4. Manual call points shall be:
a) so located that no person need travel more than 30.0m from any
position within the premises in order to give fire alarm;
b) located on the exit routes and, in particular, on the floor landing

of staircases and on exits to the street; and
c) fixed at a height of 1.4m above the floor at easily accessible,

well illuminated and conspicuous positions free from obstruction.
5. Where manual call points are incorporated in an automatic fire
alarm system, they shall be included in such a way that the
operation of any one of them produces the same effects as though
fire had been detected by fire detector in the same zone.
6. 2
6.4 Selection of Fire Detectors

1. When selecting the type of detectors, the probable development of
fire in the incipient stage, the room height, the ambient conditions
and all sources of spurious alarms in the area to be monitored shall
be taken into consideration.
2. If development of a smoldering fire is anticipated in the incipient
stage of fire (intense smoke generation, very little or no flame
radiation), smoke detectors shall be used.
3. If a rapid development of the fire is anticipated as early as in the
incipient stage of a fire (intense heat generation, intense flame
radiation, and generation of smoke), smoke detectors, heat
detectors, flame detectors, or combinations of the various types of
fire detectors shall be used.
4. If smoke damage is anticipated as early as the incipient stage of a
fire owing to room occupancy (risk to human life, materials and
goods sensitive to smoke), smoke detectors shall be used.
5. If a very rapid development of the fire is anticipated with a high
degree of probability, an automatic extinguisher system shall
be considered.
6. Where high and/or suddenly rising temperature owing to natural
conditions or conditions resulting from normal operations are likely,
fixed-temperature detectors shall be used.
6.5 Sitting of Detectors

1. Building and installation complexes shall be monitored or covered
completely and each effectively enclosed space shall be considered
separately for this purpose in accordance with the limits of spacing
for the types of detectors concerned.
2. Rooms divided into sections by walls, partitions or storage racks
reaching 300.0mm of the ceiling or where goods might be
stacked in defined areas to a corresponding height, shall have
detectors for each section or passageway.
3. Hoists, elevators and similar flue-like openings shall be monitored
by detectors at the top.
4. Staircases shall be monitored by detectors on each floor.
5. Generally, the inter-relationship between the suitability of the
various types of fire detectors and room height shall be considered
6. Heat sensitive point detectors shall be mounted so that their heat
sensitive elements are positioned not less than 25.0mm and
not more than 150.0mm below the ceiling or the
underside of the roof.
7. Where ceiling are crossed by beams, girders or other structural
features having a depth of 500.0mm or more, at least one detector
shall be installed in each “pocket” formed between each features,
and these detectors shall not be less than 500.0mm from any
beam, girder or wall.
6. 3
8. Smoke detectors shall normally be sitting at the highest part of the

enclosed areas, and shall be mounted so that their sensing area is
not less than 25.0mm or more than 600.0mm below roof ceiling,
except as may be indicated by site tests.
6.6 Audible and Visual Alarms

1. Inside a building at least two sounders shall be installed.
2. In case of an automatic system, an additional sounder outside the
building (preferably near fire brigades access) shall be
installed.
3. Alarm sounders shall satisfy the following requirements:
a) Their type, number and location shall be such that the alarm is
distinct from the background noise in every part of the premises.
b) Their noise shall be quite distinct from any other sounders likely
to be heard.
c) Alarm sounders of the same kind on a particular installation shall

produce a similar sound.
4. Where a general alarm is undesirable (e.g. department stores,
entertainment places, hospitals), the alarm system shall be
restricted to the provision of sounders out of the hearing of the
public or patients.
5. The sounders shall be supplemented by an adequate number of
visual signals throughout the premises for staff recognition only
and/or by discrete special alerting facilities.
6. Silencing switches shall only be installed for transferring an alarm or
fault warning to a supervisory sounders, and shall be so
arranged as to put out of service the smallest practicable number of
manual call points and detectors.
7. The operation of a silencing switch shall neither cancel the
indications of the alarm or fault on any indicator concerned while an
alarm or fault condition exists not prevent the proper receipt of
alarms or fault warnings on any circuit other than those with which
the silencing switch is associated.
8. Where it is desired to distinguish between an alert and an evacuate
signal, a two-stage alarm shall be used in which the first type of
signal indicates an alert and the second type indicates a need to
evacuate the locality.
9. In general, visual signals shall be used to supplement audible
alarms.
10. The operation of a sounder shall not be prevented by a defect in a
visual signal or vice versa.
11. In situations where a normal type of alarm sounder may be
ineffective, e.g. where the background noise is excessive or where
the occupants are deaf, visual signals such as rotating beacon
lamps shall be used in addition.
12. Where public-address equipment is used instead of conventional
sounders, it shall be ensured that:
6. 4
a) alarm of fire is automatically transmitted over the public address

system, taking priority and over-riding every other facility and
circuit conditions of the public address system;
b) other signals such meal-break, start and stop work, are not at
any time broadcast by the public address equipment in a
manner which can not be confused with a fire alarm signals:;
c) during alarm conditions, all microphones are automatically

disconnected, except one designated a “fire microphone” which
is retained in circuit so that it can be used for announcements
and instructions relating to the fire;
6.7 Cables and Wiring

1. Cables shall have copper conductors and the cross-sectional area
of the. conductors shall be selected on the basis of the
current consumption of the equipment used and the line
length
2. All conductors of a fire alarm system shall be:
a) installed in a metal raceway of the totally enclosed type;
b) incorporated in cable, having metal armour or sheath;
c) installed in rigid non-metallic conduit where embedded in at least

50.0mm of masonry or poured concrete, or installed
underground.
3. The conductors shall be installed so as to be entirely exclusive to a
fire alarm installation and the wiring of the alarm system shall be
segregated from the wring of any other circuits and shall not enter a
fixture, raceway, box or enclosure occupied by other wiring, except
as may be necessary for connection to:
a) the source of supply,
b) a signal,
c) an ancillary device,
d) a communication circuit.
4. Fire-alarm wiring shall be spaced at least 50.0mm away from the
circuits of any other service.
5. Where crossings are unavoidable, a bridge of suitable non-
combustible insulating material, at least 6.0mm thick, shall be
securely fitted to maintain path in air of 50.0mm between circuits.
6. All conductors contained in the same raceway or cable shall be
insulated for the highest voltage in the raceway or cable.
7. In order to reduce the likelihood of damage to fire-alarm cables by
fire, main fire alarm wiring shall avoid lift wells, staircases, and other
flue-like opening.
6. 5
8. If necessary, special measures shall be taken to protect the fire-

alarm networks against disruptive electrical influences (electrical
interferences) resulting from lightning strike, switching on high-
power loads, electrical sparks of all types and electromagnetic
waves.
6.8 Power Supply System

1. For powering a fire alarm system two mutually independent power
sources shall be provided. The sources shall be:
a) a general mains or an equivalent network, operated continually;

and
b) a rechargeable lead acid or nickel cadmium with sealed cells

trickle-charging battery which is able to power in the event of
main’s failure.
2. The battery and charger shall be contained in a ventilated metal
enclosure.
6. 6
APPENDICES

Appendix 1
MEASUREMENT OF EARTH ELECTRODE RESISTANCE (E.E.R) USING A

FOUR-TERMINAL EARTH TESTER MEGGER
PROCEDURE
a) Set the pointer at zero

b) Auxiliary electrodes “B” and “C” must be driven to a reasonably good depth
into the ground.
c) The resistance areas of the earth electrodes must not overlap.
d) The two auxiliary electrodes must be in a straight line with the main
electrode “A” under test.
e) The test leads must not cross each other.
Recommended results must be less than 8 ohms.


APPENDIX 2
OVERHEAD LINE CLEARANCES
1. CLEARANCE IN CROSSINGS
Crossing of Main Roads
The vertical clearances of a current-carrying conductor from the

surface of a main road shall be at least:
- 0.4kV bare conductor lines 7.5m

- 0.4kV aerial bundled conductors 7.5m
- 0.4kV bare conductor lines 8.0m
- 33kV bare conductors lines 8.0m
Crossing of Public Streets
The vertical clearance of a current-carrying conductor from the surface

of a public street shall be at least:
-0.4kV bare conductor lines 5.5m

-0.4kV aerial bundled conductors 5.5m
- 11kV bare conductor lines 6.0m
Crossing of Private Driveways
The vertical clearances of a current-carrying conductor from the

surface of a private driveway shall be at least:

Crossing of Pedestrian Walkways
The vertical clearance of a current-carrying conductor from the surface

of a pedestrian walkway shall be at least:
- 0.4kV bare conductor lines 4.5.m

- 0.4kV aerial bundled conductors 4.0m
- 33kV bare conductor lines 6.0.m
Crossing of Railway Tracks
The vertical clearance of a current-carrying conductor from a railway

track shall be at least:


-11kV bare conductor lines 7.5m
-33kV bare conductor lines 7.5m
Crossing of Water Ways
When crossing canals or other navigable waterways, the height of the

conductors from the highest shall be at the highest water level at least
20m high.
2. HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE FROM ROADS
If possible the line supports (with stays) shall be located at a distance of at

least 2 meters from the edge of a road.
3. CLEARANCE FROM BUILDING
3.1 Line above or adjacent to building
1. If the horizontal clearance of a current-carrying conductor of a low

voltage overhead line from any part of the building is less than
2meters its height above the referred part should be at least
3meters.
2. If the horizontal clearance of a current-carrying conductor of aerial

bundled conductors (ABCs) from any part of the building is less
than 0.5meters, its height from the referred part shall be at least
2.0meters.
3. The horizontal clearance of 11kV and 33kV bare conductor line

from buildings shall be at least 3meters.
4. The horizontal clearances of 132kV and 220kV bare conductor line

from buildings shall be at least 15meters.
4. CLEARANCE FROM TELECOMMUNICATION LINES
1. The clearance of the conductor of a 33kV bare conductor line from a

telecommunication line shall be at least:
a) 2.3 meters from parallel line

b) 1.8 meters from a crossing line
2. The clearance of the conductor of an 11kV bare conductor line from a

a) 2.0 meters from parallel line

b) 1.5 meters from a crossing line

3. Due to interference effects, it is not recommended to construct MV

lines and telecommunication lines parallel with each other for long
distances.
4. The clearance of conductor of a 0.4kV bare conductor line from a

a) 2.0 meters from a parallel line

b) 1.5 meters from crossing line
5. The clearance of a 0.4kV of aerial bundled conductors (ABCs) line

from a telecommunication line shall be at least 0.3meters.

APPENDIX 3
1) SINGLE-CORE PVC-INSULATED CABLES, NON-ARMOURED, WITH OR WITHOUT SHEATH (COPPER CONDUCTORS)
BS 6004, BS 6231, BS 6346 Ambient
temperature: 30ºC
CURRENT-CARRYING CAPACITY (Amperes): Conductor operating
temperature: 70ºC
Conductor Installation method Installation method Installation method (clipped Installation method (on a Installation Method (free air)
cross- (enclosed in conduit in (enclosed in conduit on a direct) perforated cable tray
Horizontal Vertical Trefoil
sectional thermally insulated wall wall or in trunking etc.) horizontal or vertical)
area etc.) flat spaced flat spaced
2 cables, 3 or 4 2 cables 3 or 4 2 cables, 3 or 4 2 cables, 3 or 4 cables 2 cables, 2 cables, 3 cables
single- cables single- cables single- cables single- three-phase single- single- trefoil three-
phase a.c. three-phase phase a.c. three-phase phase a.c. three-phase phase a.c. a.c flat and phase a.c. phase a.c. phase a.c.
or d.c. a.c. or d.c. a.c or d.c. flat a.c flat and or d.c. flat touching or or d.c. or 3 or d.c. or 3
and touching or and trefoil cables cables
touching trefoil touching three-phase three-phase
a.c. a.c
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
mm2 A A A A A A A A A A A
1 11 10.5 13.5 12 15.5 14 - - - - -
1.5 14.5 13.5 17.5 15.5 20 18 - - - - -
2.5 19.5 18 24 21 27 25 - - - - -
4 26 24 32 28 37 33 - - - - -
6 34 31 41 36 47 43 - - - - -
10 46 42 57 50 65 59 - - - - -
16 61 56 76 68 87 79 - - - - -
25 80 73 101 89 114 104 126 112 146 130 110
35 99 89 125 110 141 129 156 141 181 162 137
50 119 108 151 134 182 167 191 172 219 197 167
70 151 136 192 171 234 214 246 223 281 254 216
95 182 164 232 207 284 261 300 273 341 311 264
120 210 188 269 239 330 303 349 318 396 362 308
150 240 216 300 262 381 349 404 369 456 419 356
185 273 245 341 296 436 400 463 424 521 480 409
240 320 286 400 346 515 472 549 504 615 569 485
300 367 328 458 394 594 545 635 584 709 659 561
400 - - 546 467 694 634 732 679 852 795 656
500 - - 626 533 792 723 835 778 982 920 749
630 - - 720 611 904 826 953 892 1138 1070 855

800 - - - - 1030 943 1086 1020 1265 1188 971
1000 - - - - 1154 1058 1216 1149 1420 1337 1079
2) MULTI-CORE PVC-INSULATED CABLES, NON-ARMOURED (COPPER CONDUCTORS)
BS 6004, BS 6346 Ambient temperature: 30ºC

temperature: 70ºC
Conductor Installation method Installation method Installation method Installation method (on a
cross- (enclosed in an insulated (enclosed in conduit on a (clipped direct) perforated cable tray or
sectional wall etc.) wall or ceiling etc.) free air)
area 2 cables, 3 or 4 2 cables 3 or 4 2 cables, 3 or 4 2 cables, 3 or 4
single- cables single- cables single- cables single-phase cables
phase a.c. three- phase a.c. three-phase phase a.c. three- a.c. or d.c. three-
or d.c. phase a.c. or d.c. a.c or d.c. flat phase a.c flat and phase a.c
and flat and touching flat and
1 touching touching or touching or
trefoil trefoil
2 3 4 5 8
6 7 9
mm2 A A A A A A A A
1 11 10 13 11.5 15 13.5 17 14.5
1.5 14 13 16.5 15 19.5 17.5 22 18.5
2.5 18.5 17.5 23 20 27 24 30 25
4 25 23 30 27 36 32 40 34
6 32 29 38 34 46 41 51 43
10 43 39 52 46 63 57 70 60
16 57 52 69 62 85 76 94 80
25 75 68 90 80 112 96 119 101

35 92 83 111 99 138 119 148 126
50 110 99 133 118 168 144 180 153

70 139 125 168 149 213 284 232 196
95 167 150 201 179 258 223 282 238
120 192 172 232 206 299 259 328 276

150 219 196 258 225 344 299 379 319
185 248 223 294 255 392 341 434 364
240 291 261 344 297 461 403 514 430
300 334 298 394 339 530 464 593 497
400 - - 470 402 634 557 715 597

3) SINGLE-CORE ARMOURED (NON-MAGNETIC ARMOUR) PVC INSULATED CABLES (COPPER CONDUCTORS)
BS 6346 Ambient temperature:

30ºC CURRENT-CARRYING CAPACITY (Amperes): Conductor operating
temperature: 70ºC
Conductor Installation method Installation method
cross- (clipped direct) (on a perforated Installation Method
sectional cable tray (free air)
area horizontal or
vertical)
2 cables, 3 or 4 2 cables, 3 or 4
single- cables single- cables 2 cables single- 2 cables d.c. 3 or 4 cables, three-phase a.c.
phase three- phase three- phase a.c.
a.c. or phase a.c. flat phase Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical 3 cables
1 d.c. flat a.c flat and a.c flat flat flat spaced spaced flat flat trefoil
and and touching and spaced spaced spaced spaced
touching touching touching 8 9 12
2 4 6 7 10 11
3 5
mm2 A A A A A A A A A A A
50 193 179 205 189 229 217 229 216 230 212 181
70 245 225 259 238 287 272 294 279 286 263 231
95 296 269 313 285 349 332 357 340 338 313 280
120 342 309 360 327 401 383 315 396 385 357 324
185 447 399 469 422 511 489 548 525 490 456 425
240 525 465 550 492 593 568 648 622 566 528 501
300 594 515 624 547 668 640 748 719 616 578 567
400 687 575 723 618 737 707 885 851 674 632 657
500 763 622 805 673 810 777 1035 997 721 676 731

630 843 669 891 728 893 856 1218 1174 771 723 809
800 919 710 976 777 943 905 1441 1390 824 772 886
1000 975 737 1041 808 1008 967 1685 1627 872 816 945

4) MULTI-CORE ARMOURED PVC-INSULATED CABLES (COPPER CONDUCTORS)
BS 6346 Ambient temperature: 30ºC

temperature: 70ºC
Conductor cross- Installation method (clipped direct) Installation method (on a perforated horizontal or
sectional area vertical cable tray or free air)
1 two-core cable, 1 three- or four- core 1 two-core cable, 1 three- or four-core
single phase a.c. or cable three-phase a.c. single-phase a.c. or d.c. cable, three-phase
1 d.c. 3 4 a.c.
2 5
mm2 A A A A
1.5 21 18 22 19
2.5 28 25 31 26
4 38 33 41 35
6 49 42 53 45
10 67 58 72 62
16 89 77 97 83
25 118 102 128 110

35 145 125 157 135
50 175 151 190 163
70 222 192 241 207
95 269 231 291 251
120 310 267 336 290

150 356 306 386 332
185 405 348 439 378
240 476 409 516 445
300 547 469 592 510
400 621 540 683 590


APPENDIX 4
CAPACITIES OF CONDUITS FOR SINGLE-CORE PVC CABLES
Nominal Size of Conduits (mm diameter)

cable 20 25 32 40 50
cross- Maximum number of cables that may be used in conduit
section
(mm2)
1 11 16 - - -
1.5 9 13 - - -
2.5 6 9 17 - -
4 5 7 14 - -
6 4 6 10 18 -
10 3 4 8 13 -
16 - 3 5 9 -
25 - 2 3 6 9
35 - - 2 4 7
50 - - - 3 5
70 - - - 2 4


APPENDIX 5
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
I- STANDARDS
The following standards contain provisions, which through reference in this
text constitute provisions of this regulation. At the time of publication of this
regulation the editions indicated were valid. All standards are subject to
revision and, since any reference to a regulation is deemed to be a reference
to the latest edition of that standard, parties to agreements based on this
regulation are encouraged to take steps to ensure the use of the most recent
editions of the standards indicated below. Information on currently valid
national and international standards may be obtained from the Uganda
National Bureau of Standards (UNBS) Documentation and Information Centre.
BS 7 Rubber-insulated cables and flexible cords for electric power

and lighting (for working voltages up to and including 11kv)
BS 31 Specification. Steel conduit and fittings for electrical wiring
BS 67 Specification for ceiling roses
BS 88-4 1988 Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and including 1000V a.c. and
1500V d.c.
BS 731:2:1958 Specification. Flexible steel conduit for cable protection and

flexible steel tubing to enclose flexible drives
BS 3676-1:1989 Switches for household and similar fixed electrical

installations
BS 1363 13A plugs, socket-outlets, adaptors and connection units
Part 1- Specifications for rewirable and non-rewirable13A

fused plugs
Part 2- Specification for 13 A switched and un-switched
socket-outlets
BS 2004 PVC insulated cables and flexible cords for electric power
and lighting
BS 7671:1992,
AMD 8536:1994 Requirements for Electrical Installations IEE Wiring

Regulations Sixteenth Edition
IEC 60364-7-712 Electrical installation of buildings Solar photovoltaic (PV)

power supply system

IEC 61215 Crystalline silicone terrestrial photovoltaic (PV) module

-Design qualification and type approval
IEC 61646 Thin film terrestrial photovoltaic (PV) module

-Design qualification and type approval
BS EN 60423 Conduits for electrical purposes
BS EN 61184 Bayonet lamp holders
BS 7895 Specification for Bayonet lamp holders with enhanced safety
BS 6007 Specification for rubber insulated cables for electric power and
lighting
BS 6480 Specification for rubber insulated cables for electric power and
lighting
US 602 Standard specification for PVC- insulated cables (non-

armoured) for electric power and lighting
US 605 Standard specification for conductors in insulated cables

and cords
II BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. IEE Regulations for Electrical Installations – 16th Edition (1992)

2. Code of Practice for Installation of Photovoltaic system US 152:2000
3. The Atomic Energy Decree, 1972
4. National Building Code of India
5. South African Standard-Code of Practice (The wiring of premises)
6. Ethiopian Building Code Standard-Electrical Installation of Buildings

Uganda BTVET Training Providers Construction Specs

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Uganda BTVET Training Providers Construction Specs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Republic of Uganda

MINISTRY OF EDUCATIONAND SPORTS

Subject of Procurement: CONSTRUCTION OF FIVE (5NO)

Procurement Reference No: …………………………………………….

Date of Issue: Mar, 2018

Volume 1 of 4: Bidding procedures, employer's requirements and conditions of

Volume 2 of 4: Bills of quantities

Volume 3 of 4: Technical Specifications comprising:

(A) Standard Specifications for Building works

(B) Code for Electrical Installations in Buildings

Specifications for Building works

FIVE (5) BTVET TRAINING PROVIDERS – BIDDING DOCUMENTS (VOLUME 3 OF 4)

MINISTRY OF WORKS AND TRANSPORT

FIVE (5) BTVET TRAINING PROVIDERS – BIDDING DOCUMENTS (VOLUME 3 OF 4)

In exercising this mission and in discharging its responsibilities, the Ministry is

The Standard Specifications for Building Works will be a nationally recognized

The major benefits to be gained in applying this document are the

The Standard Specifications will be periodically updated and new editions

FIVE (5) BTVET TRAINING PROVIDERS – BIDDING DOCUMENTS (VOLUME 3 OF 4)

General Table of Contents

Part 1: Architectural, Structural and

Part 2: Building Sanitation

Part 3: Electrical Services

Ministry of Works and Transport i

1.0 GENERAL MATTERS ...................................................................................................... 2

Ministry of Works and Transport ii

2.14 Definiton of “Make Out”and “Make Good” ............................................................. 12

Ministry of Works and Transport iii

4.27 Fixing and Assembly of Reinforcement................................................................. 33

Ministry of Works and Transport iv

8.11 Veneers ................................................................................................................. 61

Ministry of Works and Transport v

11.10 Expanded Polystyrene Tiles ................................................................................. 74

Ministry of Works and Transport vi

1.16 Baths, Lavatory Basins and Sinks....................................................................... 103

Ministry of Works and Transport vii

17.0 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM ................................................................. 138

Ministry of Works and Transport viii

Ministry of Works and Transport 1

1.0 GENERAL MATTERS

1.1 General Conditions of Contract

All clauses, definitions and procedures described in the General Conditions of

1.2 Instructions to Bidders

1.3 Scope of Contractor’s Obligations

The Contractor shall provide all labour, carriage, freightage, building

1.4 Interpretation of Terms

Ministry of Works and Transport 2

1.6 Codes of Practices

A reference to Standard Specification shall be understood to mean the most

In absence of a specification of intended material does not exist in that

1.8 Ordering of Materials

Ministry of Works and Transport 3

1.9 Proprietary of Materials

Where proprietary materials are specified hereafter the Contractor may

Samples shall be as representative as possible and no attempt shall be made

1.11 Prove Vouchers

The testing of materials will, unless expressly stated to the contrary, be

Ministry of Works and Transport 4

1.13 Payment forTests

1.14 Test Samples

(a) Name of project and location

1.15 Rejected Workmanship and Materials